ML12284A257: Difference between revisions

From kanterella
Jump to navigation Jump to search
(Created page by program invented by StriderTol)
(Created page by program invented by StriderTol)
 
Line 15: Line 15:


=Text=
=Text=
{{#Wiki_filter:AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 B 3.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.1 AC Sources-Operating  
{{#Wiki_filter:AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 B 3.8   ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.1   AC Sources-Operating BASES BACKGROUND        The AC sources to the Class 1E Electrical Power Distribution System consist of the offsite power sources starting at the 4.16 kV engineered safety feature (ESF) buses and the onsite diesel generators (DGs). As required by Reference 1, General Design Criteria (GDC) 17, the design of the AC electrical power system has sufficient independence and redundancy to ensure a source to the ESFs assuming a single failure.
The Class 1E AC Distribution System is divided into two redundant load groups so that the loss of one group does not prevent the minimum safety functions from being performed.
Each load group has connections to two offsite sources and one Class 1E DG at its 4.16 kV 1E bus.
Offsite power is supplied to the 500 kV Switchyard from the transmission network by three 500 kV transmission lines.
Two electrically and physically separated circuits supply electric power from the 500 kV Switchyard to two 13 kV buses and then to the two 4.16 kV ESF buses. A third 69 kV/
13.8 kV offsite power source that may be manually connected to either 13 kV bus is available from the Southern Maryland Electric Cooperative (SMECO). When appropriate, the Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) loss of coolant incident and shutdown sequencer for the 4.16 kV bus will sequence loads on the bus after the 69 kV/13.8 kV SMECO line has been manually placed in service. The SMECO offsite power source will not be used to carry loads for an operating unit. A detailed description of the offsite power network and the circuits to the Class 1E ESF buses, is found in Reference 2, Chapter 8.
The required offsite power circuits are the two 13 kV buses (Nos. 11 and 21) which can be powered by:
: a. Two 500 kV lines, two 500 kV buses each of which have connections to a 500 kV line that does not pass through the other 500 kV bus and both P-13000 (500 kV/14 kV) transformers; or CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2        B 3.8.1-1                        Revision 5


BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-1 Revision 5 BACKGROUND The AC sources to the Class 1E Electrical Power Distribution System consist of the offsite power sources starting at the 4.16 kV engineered safety feature (ESF) buses and the onsite diesel generators (DGs). As required by Reference 1, General Design Criteria (GDC) 17, the design of the AC electrical power system has sufficient independence and  
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES
: b. One 500 kV line, one 500 kV bus, and one associated P-13000 (500 kV/13.8 kV) transformer, and the 69 kV/
13.8 kV SMECO line. When the SMECO line is credited as one of the qualified offsite circuits, the disconnect from the SMECO line to Warehouse No. 1 must be open.
In addition, each offsite circuit includes the cabling to and from a 13.8/13.8 kV voltage regulator, 13.8/4.16 kV unit service transformer, and one of the two breakers to one 4.16 kV ESF bus. Transfer capability between the two required offsite circuits is by manual means only. The required circuit breaker to each 4.16 kV ESF bus must be from different 13.8/4.16 kV unit service transformers for the two required offsite circuits. Thus, each unit is able to align one 4.16 kV bus to one required offsite circuit, and the other 4.16 kV bus to the other required offsite circuit.
In some cases, inoperable components in the electrical circuit place both units in Conditions. Examples of these are 13.8 kV bus Nos. 11 or 21, two 500 kV transmission lines, one P-13000 service transformer, or one 500 kV bus.
In other cases, inoperable components only place one unit in a Condition, such as an inoperable U-4000 and/or 13.8 kV regulator that feeds a required 4.16 kV bus.
The onsite standby power source to each 4.16 kV ESF bus is a dedicated DG. A DG starts automatically on an safety injection actuation signal or on a 4.16 kV degraded or undervoltage signal. If both 4.16 kV offsite source breakers are open, the DG, after reaching rated voltage and frequency, will automatically close onto the 4.16 kV bus.
In the event of a loss of offsite power to a 4.16 kV 1E bus, if required, the ESF electrical loads will be automatically sequenced onto the DG in sufficient time to provide for safe shutdown for an anticipated operational occurrence (AOO) and to ensure that the containment integrity and other vital functions are maintained in the event of a design bases accident.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.1-2                      Revision 12


redundancy to ensure a source to the ESFs assuming a single
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES Ratings for the No. 1A DG satisfies the requirements of Reference 3 and ratings for the Nos. 1B, 2A, and 2B DGs satisfy the requirements of Reference 4. The continuous service rating for the No. 1A DG is 5400 kW and for the Nos. 1B, 2A, and 2B DGs are 3000 kW.
 
APPLICABLE       The initial conditions of Design Basis Accident (DBA) and SAFETY ANALYSES   transient analyses in Reference 1, Chapters 6 and 14, assume ESF systems are OPERABLE. The AC electrical power sources are designed to provide sufficient capacity, capability, redundancy, and reliability to ensure the availability of necessary power to ESF systems so that the fuel, RCS, and containment design limits are not exceeded. These limits are discussed in more detail in the Bases for Sections 3.2, 3.4, and 3.6.
failure.
The OPERABILITY of the AC electrical power sources is consistent with the initial assumptions of the accident analyses and is based upon meeting the design basis of the unit. This results in maintaining at least one train of the onsite or offsite AC sources OPERABLE, during accident conditions in the event of:
The Class 1E AC Distribution System is divided into two
 
redundant load groups so that the loss of one group does not
 
prevent the minimum safety functions from being performed. 
 
Each load group has connections to two offsite sources and
 
one Class 1E DG at its 4.16 kV 1E bus.
 
Offsite power is supplied to the 500 kV Switchyard from the
 
transmission network by three 500 kV transmission lines. 
 
Two electrically and physically separated circuits supply
 
electric power from the 500 kV Switchyard to two 13 kV buses
 
and then to the two 4.16 kV ESF buses. A third 69 kV/
 
13.8 kV offsite power source that may be manually connected
 
to either 13 kV bus is available from the Southern Maryland
 
Electric Cooperative (SMECO). When appropriate, the
 
Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) loss of
 
coolant incident and shutdown sequencer for the 4.16 kV bus
 
will sequence loads on the bus after the 69 kV/13.8 kV SMECO
 
line has been manually placed in service. The SMECO offsite
 
power source will not be used to carry loads for an
 
operating unit. A detailed description of the offsite power
 
network and the circuits to the Class 1E ESF buses, is found
 
in Reference 2, Chapter 8.
The required offsite power circuits are the two 13 kV buses (Nos. 11 and 21) which can be powered by:  a. Two 500 kV lines, two 500 kV buses each of which have connections to a 500 kV line that does not pass through the other 500 kV bus and both P-13000
 
(500 kV/14 kV) transformers; or AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-2 Revision 12
: b. One 500 kV line, one 500 kV bus, and one associated P-13000 (500 kV/
13.8 kV) transformer, and the 69 kV/
13.8 kV SMECO line. When the SMECO line is credited as one of the qualified offsite circuits, the
 
disconnect from the SMECO line to Warehouse No. 1 must
 
be open.
In addition, each offsite circuit includes the cabling to
 
and from a 13.8/13.8 kV voltage regulator , 13.8/4.16 kV unit service transformer , and one of the two breakers to one 4.16 kV ESF bus. Transfer capability between the two
 
required offsite circuits is by manual means only. The
 
required circuit breaker to each 4.16 kV ESF bus must be
 
from different 13.8/4.16 kV unit service transformers for the two required offsite circuits. Thus, each unit is able
 
to align one 4.16 kV bus to one required offsite circuit, and the other 4.16 kV bus to the other required offsite
 
circuit.
In some cases, inoperable components in the electrical
 
circuit place both units in Conditions. Examples of these
 
are 13.8 kV bus Nos. 11 or 21, two 500 kV transmission
 
lines, one P-13000 service transformer, or one 500 kV bus. 
 
In other cases, inoperable components only place one unit in
 
a Condition, such as an inoperable U-4000 and/or 13.8 kV
 
regulator that feeds a required 4.16 kV bus.
 
The onsite standby power source to each 4.16 kV ESF bus is a dedicated DG. A DG starts automatically on an safety
 
injection actuation signal or on a 4.16 kV degraded or
 
undervoltage signal. If both 4.16 kV offsite source
 
breakers are open, the DG, after reaching rated voltage and
 
frequency, will automatically close onto the 4.16 kV bus.
In the event of a loss of offsite power to a 4.16 kV 1E bus, if required, the ESF electrical loads will be automatically sequenced onto the DG in sufficient time to provide for safe
 
shutdown for an anticipated operational occurrence (AOO) and
 
to ensure that the containment integrity and other vital
 
functions are maintained in the event of a design bases
 
accident.
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-3 Revision 2 Ratings for the No. 1A DG satisfies the requirements of Reference 3 and ratings for the Nos. 1B, 2A, and 2B DG s satisfy the requirements of Reference 4
. The continuous service rating for the No. 1A DG is 5400 kW and for the Nos. 1B, 2A, and 2B DGs are 3000 kW.
APPLICABLE The initial conditions of Design Basis Accident (DBA) and SAFETY ANALYSES transient analyses in Reference 1, Chapters 6 and 14, assume ESF systems are OPERABLE. The AC electrical power sources  
 
are designed to provide sufficient capacity, capability, redundancy, and reliability to ensure the availability of  
 
necessary power to ESF systems so that the fuel, RCS , and containment design limits are not exceeded. These limits  
 
are discussed in more detail in the Bases for Section s 3.2 , 3.4 , and 3.6.
The OPERABILITY of the AC electrical power sources is  
 
consistent with the initial assumptions of the accident  
 
analyses and is based upon meeting the design basis of the  
 
unit. This results in maintaining at least one train of the  
 
onsite or offsite AC sources OPERABLE
, during accident conditions in the event of:
: a. An assumed loss of all offsite power; and
: a. An assumed loss of all offsite power; and
: b. A single failure.
: b. A single failure.
The AC sources satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), Criterion 3.
The AC sources satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), Criterion 3.
LCO Two qualified circuits between the offsite transmission  
LCO               Two qualified circuits between the offsite transmission network and the onsite Class 1E Electrical Power Distribution System and separate and independent DGs for each train ensure availability of the required power to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe shutdown condition after an AOO or a postulated DBA.
 
Qualified offsite circuits are those that are described in the Updated Final Safety Analysis Report (UFSAR) and are part of the licensing basis for the unit.
network and the onsite Class 1E Electrical Power  
Each offsite circuit must be capable of maintaining rated frequency and voltage and accepting required loads during an accident, while connected to the ESF buses. Loads are immediately connected to the ESF buses when the buses are CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.1-3                        Revision 2
 
Distribution System and separate and independent DGs for  


each train ensure availability of the required power to shut
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES powered from the 500 kV offsite circuits and, when powered from the 69/13.8 kV SMECO offsite circuit after being manually connected, the loads are sequenced onto the ESF bus utilizing the same sequencer used to sequence the loads onto the DG. The SMECO offsite circuit will not be used to carry loads for an operating unit.
The Limiting Condition for Operation (LCO) requires operability of two out of three qualified circuits between the transmission network and the onsite Class 1E AC Electrical Power Distribution System circuits. These circuits consist of two 500 kV circuits via 500 kV/14 kV and 13.8 kV/4.16 kV transformers and the 69 kV SMECO dedicated source (described in Reference 5) via 69 kV/13.8 kV and 13.8 kV/4.16 kV transformers. In addition, each offsite circuit includes one of the two breakers to one 4.16 kV ESF bus. The required circuit breaker to each 4.16 kV ESF bus must be from different 13.8/4.16 unit service transformers for the two required offsite circuits. Thus, each unit is able to align one 4.16 kV bus to one required offsite circuit, and the other 4.16 kV bus to the other required offsite circuit.
Each DG must be capable of starting, accelerating to rated speed and voltage, and connecting to its respective ESF bus on detection of bus undervoltage. This will be accomplished within 10 seconds. Each DG must also be capable of accepting required loads within the assumed loading sequence intervals, and continue to operate until offsite power can be restored to the ESF buses. These capabilities are required to be met from a variety of initial conditions such as DG in standby with the engine hot and DG in standby with the engine at ambient conditions. Additional DG capabilities must be demonstrated to meet required Surveillances, e.g., capability of the DG to reject a load 500 hp without tripping.
Proper sequencing of loads, including shedding of non-essential loads, is a required function for DG OPERABILITY in MODEs 1, 2, and 3.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.1-4                      Revision 10


down the reactor and maintain it in a safe shutdown
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES The AC sources in one train must be separate and independent (to the extent possible) of the AC sources in the other train. For the DGs, separation and independence are complete.
The Control Room Emergency Ventilation System (CREVS) and Control Room Emergency Temperature System (CRETS) are shared systems with one train of each system connected to an onsite Class 1E AC electrical power distribution subsystem from each unit. Limiting Condition for Operation 3.8.1.c requires one qualified circuit between the offsite transmission network and the other unit's onsite Class 1E AC electrical power distribution subsystems needed to supply power to the CREVS and CRETS to be OPERABLE and one DG from the other unit capable of supplying power to the CREVS and CRETS to be OPERABLE. The qualified circuit in LCO 3.8.1.c must be separate and independent (to the extent possible) of the qualified circuit which provides power to the other train of the CREVS and CRETS. These requirements, in conjunction with the requirements for the unit AC electrical power sources in LCO 3.8.1.a and LCO 3.8.1.b, ensure that power is available to two trains of the CREVS and CRETS.
APPLICABILITY    The AC sources are required to be OPERABLE in MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 to ensure that:
: a. Acceptable fuel design limits and reactor coolant pressure boundary limits, are not exceeded as a result of AOOs or abnormal transients; and
: b. Adequate core cooling is provided and Containment OPERABILITY and other vital functions, are maintained in the event of a postulated DBA.
The AC power requirements for MODEs 5 and 6 are covered in LCO 3.8.2.
ACTIONS          A Note prohibits the application of LCO 3.0.4.b to an inoperable DG. There is an increased risk associated with entering a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with an inoperable DG and the provisions of LCO 3.0.4.b, which allow entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met after performance of a risk assessment addressing CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.1-5                        Revision 26


condition after an AOO or a postulated DBA.  
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES inoperable systems and components, should not be applied in this circumstance.
A.1 To ensure a highly reliable power source remains with the one required LCO 3.8.1.a offsite circuit inoperable, it is necessary to verify the OPERABILITY of the remaining required offsite circuits on a more frequent basis. Since the Required Action only specifies "perform," a failure of Surveillance Requirement (SR) 3.8.1.1 or SR 3.8.1.2 acceptance criteria does not result in a Required Action not met. However, if a second required circuit fails SR 3.8.1.1 or SR 3.8.1.2, the second offsite circuit is inoperable, and Condition D and/or G, as applicable, for the two offsite circuits inoperable, is entered.
A.2 Required Action A.2, which only applies if the train cannot be powered from an offsite source, is intended to provide assurance that an event coincident with a single failure of the associated DG will not result in a complete loss of safety function of critical redundant required features.
These features are powered from the redundant AC electrical power train(s). Single train systems may not be included.
The Completion Time for Required Action A.2 is intended to allow the operator time to evaluate and repair any discovered inoperabilities. This Completion Time also allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for beginning the allowed outage time "clock." In this Required Action, the Completion Time only begins on discovery that both:
: a. The train has no offsite power supplying its loads; and
: b. A required feature on another train is inoperable.
If at any time during the existence of Condition A (one required LCO 3.8.1.a offsite circuit inoperable) a redundant required feature subsequently becomes inoperable, this Completion Time begins to be tracked.
The Completion Time must be started if it is discovered that there is no offsite power to one train of the onsite CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.1-6                      Revision 26


Qualified offsite circuits are those that are described in the Updated Final Safety Analysis Report (UFSAR) and are part of the licensing basis for the unit.  
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES Class 1E Electrical Power Distribution System coincident with one or more inoperable required support or supported features (or both) that are associated with the other train that has offsite power. Twenty-four hours is acceptable because it minimizes risk while allowing time for restoration before subjecting the unit to transients associated with shutdown.
The remaining OPERABLE offsite circuits and DGs are adequate to supply electrical power to Train A and Train B of the onsite Class 1E Distribution System. The 24 hour Completion Time takes into account the component OPERABILITY of the redundant counterpart to the inoperable required feature.
Additionally, the 24 hour Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.
A.3 Consistent with Reference 6, operation may continue in Condition A for a period that should not exceed 72 hours.
With one offsite circuit inoperable, the reliability of the offsite system is degraded, and the potential for a loss of offsite power is increased, with attendant potential for a challenge to the unit safety systems. In this Condition, however, the remaining OPERABLE offsite circuit and DGs are adequate to supply electrical power to the onsite Class 1E Distribution System.
The 72 hour Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.
The second Completion Time for Required Action A.3 establishes a limit on the maximum time allowed for any combination of required AC power sources to be inoperable during any single contiguous occurrence of failing to meet LCO 3.8.1.a or LCO 3.8.1.b. If Condition A is entered while, for instance, an LCO 3.8.1.b DG is inoperable, and that DG is subsequently returned OPERABLE, the LCO may already have been not met for up to 72 hours. This could lead to a total of 17 days, since initial failure to meet CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.1-7                        Revision 26


Each offsite circuit must be capable of maintaining rated
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES LCO 3.8.1.a or LCO 3.8.1.b, to restore the offsite circuit.
At this time, a LCO 3.8.1.b DG could again become inoperable, the circuit restored OPERABLE, and an additional 72 hours (for a total of 20 days) allowed prior to complete restoration of LCOs 3.8.1.a and 3.8.1.b. The 17 day Completion Time provides a limit on the time allowed in a specified condition after discovery of failure to meet LCO 3.8.1.a or LCO 3.8.1.b. This limit is considered reasonable for situations in which Conditions A and B are entered concurrently. The "AND" connector between the 72 hour and 17 day Completion Time means that both Completion Times apply simultaneously, and the more restrictive Completion Time must be met.
As in Required Action A.2, the Completion Time allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for beginning the allowed outage time "clock." This will result in establishing the "time zero" at the time that LCO 3.8.1.a or LCO 3.8.1.b was initially not met, instead of at the time Condition A was entered.
B.1 The 14 day Completion Time for Required Action B.5 is based on the OPERABILITY of both opposite-unit DGs and the availability of the 0C DG. The 0C DG is available to power the inoperable DG bus loads in the event of a station blackout or loss-of-offsite power. It is required to administratively verify both opposite-unit DGs OPERABLE and the 0C DG available within one hour and to continue this action once per 24 hours thereafter until restoration of the required DG is accomplished. This verification provides assurance that both opposite-unit DGs and the 0C DG are capable of supplying the onsite Class 1E AC Electrical Power Distribution System.
B.2 To ensure a highly reliable power source remains with an inoperable LCO 3.8.1.b DG, it is necessary to verify the availability of the offsite circuits on a more frequent basis. Since the Required Action only specifies "perform,"
a failure of SR 3.8.1.1 or SR 3.8.1.2 acceptance criteria does not result in a Required Action being not met.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.1-8                        Revision 26


frequency and voltage and accepting required loads during an
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES However, if a circuit fails to pass SR 3.8.1.1 or SR 3.8.1.2, it is inoperable. Upon offsite circuit inoperability, additional Conditions and Required Actions must then be entered.
 
B.3 Required Action B.3 is intended to provide assurance that a loss of offsite power, during the period that a LCO 3.8.1.b DG is inoperable, does not result in a complete loss of safety function of critical systems. These features are designed with redundant safety-related trains. Single train systems are not included. Redundant required feature failures consist of inoperable features with a train, redundant to the train that has an inoperable LCO 3.8.1.b DG.
accident, while connected to the ESF buses. Loads are
The Completion Time for Required Action B.3 is intended to allow the operator time to evaluate and repair any discovered inoperabilities. This Completion Time also allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for beginning the allowed outage time "clock." In this Required Action, the Completion Time only begins on discovery that both:
 
: a. An inoperable LCO 3.8.1.b DG exists; and
immediately connected to the ESF buses when the buses are AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-4 Revision 10 powered from the 500 kV offsite circuits and, when powered from the 69/13.8 kV SMECO offsite circuit after being
: b. A required feature on another train is inoperable.
 
If at any time during the existence of this Condition (one LCO 3.8.1.b DG inoperable) a required feature subsequently becomes inoperable, this Completion Time begins to be tracked.
manually connected, the loads are sequenced onto the ESF bus
Discovering one required LCO 3.8.1.b DG inoperable coincident with one or more inoperable required support or supported features (or both) that are associated with the OPERABLE DGs, results in starting the Completion Time for the Required Action. Four hours from the discovery of these events existing concurrently, is acceptable because it minimizes risk while allowing time for restoration before subjecting the unit to transients associated with shutdown.
 
In this Condition, the remaining OPERABLE DGs and offsite circuits are adequate to supply electrical power to the CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2       B 3.8.1-9                        Revision 26
utilizing the same sequencer used to sequence the loads onto
 
the DG. The SMECO offsite circuit will not be used to carry
 
loads for an operating unit.
 
The Limiting Condition for Operation (LCO) requires
 
operability of two out of three qualified circuits between
 
the transmission network and the onsite Class 1E AC
 
Electrical Power Distribution System circuits. These
 
circuits consist of two 500 kV circuits via 500 kV/14 kV and
 
13.8 kV/4.16 kV transformers and the 69 kV SMECO dedicated
 
source (described in Reference 5) via 69 kV/13.8 kV and
 
13.8 kV/4.16 kV transformers. In addition, each offsite
 
circuit includes one of the two breakers to one 4.16 kV ESF
 
bus. The required circuit breaker to each 4.16 kV ESF bus
 
must be from different 13.8/4.16 unit service transformers
 
for the two required offsite circuits. Thus, each unit is
 
able to align one 4.16 kV bus to one required offsite
 
circuit, and the other 4.16 kV bus to the other required
 
offsite circuit.
 
Each DG must be capable of starting, accelerating to rated speed and voltage, and connecting to its respective ESF bus
 
on detection of bus undervoltage. This will be accomplished
 
within 10 seconds. Each DG must also be capable of
 
accepting required loads within the assumed loading sequence
 
intervals, and continue to operate until offsite power can
 
be restored to the ESF buses.
These capabilities are required to be met from a variety of initial conditions such
 
as DG in standby with the engine hot and DG in standby with
 
the engine at ambient conditions. Additional DG
 
capabilities must be demonstrated to meet required Surveillances, e.g., capability of the DG to reject a load  500 hp without tripping.
Proper sequencing of loads, including shedding of non-essential loads, is a required function for DG OPERABILITY
 
in MODEs 1, 2, and 3.
 
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-5 Revision 26 The AC sources in one train must be separate and independent (to the extent possible) of the AC sources in the other
 
train. For the DGs, separation and independence are
 
complete.
 
The Control Room Emergency Ventilation System (CREVS) and Control Room Emergency Temperature System (CRETS) are shared systems with one train of each system connected to an onsite
 
Class 1E AC electrical power distribution subsystem from
 
each unit. Limiting Condition for Operation 3.8.1.c
 
requires one qualified circuit between the offsite
 
transmission network and the other unit's onsite Class 1E AC
 
electrical power distribution subsystems needed to supply
 
power to the CREVS and CRETS to be OPERABLE and one DG from
 
the other unit capable of supplying power to the CREVS and
 
CRETS to be OPERABLE. The qualified circuit in LCO 3.8.1.c
 
must be separate and independent (to the extent possible) of
 
the qualified circuit which provides power to the other
 
train of the CREVS and CRETS. These requirements, in
 
conjunction with the requirements for the unit AC electrical
 
power sources in LCO 3.8.1.a and LCO 3.8.1.b, ensure that power is available to two trains of the CREVS and CRETS.
APPLICABILITY The AC sources are required to be OPERABLE in MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 to ensure that:
: a. Acceptable fuel design limits and reactor coolant pressure boundary limits, are not exceeded as a result
 
of AOOs or abnormal transients; and  b. Adequate core cooling is provided and Containment OPERABILITY and other vital functions, are maintained in the event of a postulated DBA.
The AC power requirements for MODEs 5 and 6 are covered in LCO 3.8.2.
 
ACTIONS A Note prohibits the application of LCO 3.0.4.b to an inoperable DG. There is an increased risk associated with entering a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with an inoperable DG and the provisions of LCO 3.0.4.b, which allow entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met after performance of a risk assessment addressing AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-6 Revision 26 inoperable systems and components, should not be applied in this circumstance.
A.1  To ensure a highly reliable power source remains with the
 
one required LCO 3.8.1.a offsite circuit inoperable, it is necessary to verify the OPERABILITY of the remaining required offsite circuits on a more frequent basis. Since
 
the Required Action only specifies "perform," a failure of
 
Surveillance Requirement (SR) 3.8.1.1 or SR 3.8.1.2
 
acceptance criteria does not result in a Required Action not
 
met. However, if a second required circuit fails SR 3.8.1.1
 
or SR 3.8.1.2, the second offsite circuit is inoperable, and
 
Condition D and/or G, as applicable, for the two offsite
 
circuits inoperable, is entered.
 
A.2  Required Action A.2, which only applies if the train cannot
 
be powered from an offsite source, is intended to provide
 
assurance that an event coincident with a single failure of
 
the associated DG will not result in a complete loss of
 
safety function of critical redundant required features. 
 
These features are powered from the redundant AC electrical
 
power train(s). Single train systems may not be included.
 
The Completion Time for Required Action A.2 is intended to allow the operator time to evaluate and repair any
 
discovered inoperabilities. This Completion Time also
 
allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for
 
beginning the allowed outage time "clock."  In this Required
 
Action, the Completion Time only begins on discovery that
 
both:  a. The train has no offsite power supplying its loads; and  b. A required feature on another train is inoperable.
If at any time during the existence of Condition A (one required LCO 3.8.1.a offsite circuit inoperable) a redundant
 
required feature subsequently becomes inoperable, this
 
Completion Time begins to be tracked.
 
The Completion Time must be started if it is discovered that there is no offsite power to one train of the onsite AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-7 Revision 26 Class 1E Electrical Power Distribution System coincident with one or more inoperable required support or supported
 
features (or both) that are associated with the other train
 
that has offsite power. Twenty-four hours is acceptable
 
because it minimizes risk while allowing time for
 
restoration before subjecting the unit to transients associated with shutdown.
The remaining OPERABLE offsite circuits and DGs are adequate
 
to supply electrical power to Train A and Train B of the
 
onsite Class 1E Distribution System. The 24 hour Completion
 
Time takes into account the component OPERABILITY of the
 
redundant counterpart to the inoperable required feature. 
 
Additionally, the 24 hour Completion Time takes into account
 
the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a
 
reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a
 
DBA occurring during this period.
 
A.3  Consistent with Reference 6, operation may continue in
 
Condition A for a period that should not exceed 72 hours. 
 
With one offsite circuit inoperable, the reliability of the
 
offsite system is degraded, and the potential for a loss of
 
offsite power is increased, with attendant potential for a
 
challenge to the unit safety systems. In this Condition, however, the remaining OPERABLE offsite circuit and DGs are
 
adequate to supply electrical power to the onsite Class 1E
 
Distribution System.
 
The 72 hour Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable
 
time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring
 
during this period.
The second Completion Time for Required Action A.3 establishes a limit on the maximum time allowed for any combination of required AC power sources to be inoperable
 
during any single contiguous occurrence of failing to meet
 
LCO 3.8.1.a or LCO 3.8.1.b. If Condition A is entered
 
while, for instance, an LCO 3.8.1.b DG is inoperable, and
 
that DG is subsequently returned OPERABLE, the LCO may
 
already have been not met for up to 72 hours. This could
 
lead to a total of 17 days, since initial failure to meet AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-8 Revision 26 LCO 3.8.1.a or LCO 3.8.1.b, to restore the offsite circuit.
At this time, a LCO 3.8.1.b DG could again become
 
inoperable, the circuit restored OPERABLE, and an additional
 
72 hours (for a total of 20 days) allowed prior to complete
 
restoration of LCOs 3.8.1.a and 3.8.1.b. The 17 day
 
Completion Time provides a limit on the time allowed in a specified condition after discovery of failure to meet LCO 3.8.1.a or LCO 3.8.1.b. This limit is considered
 
reasonable for situations in which Conditions A and B are
 
entered concurrently. The "AND" connector between the 72 hour and 17 day Completion Time means that both
 
Completion Times apply simultaneously, and the more
 
restrictive Completion Time must be met.
 
As in Required Action A.2, the Completion Time allows for an
 
exception to the normal "time zero" for beginning the
 
allowed outage time "clock."  This will result in
 
establishing the "time zero" at the time that LCO 3.8.1.a or
 
LCO 3.8.1.b was initially not met, instead of at the time
 
Condition A was entered.
 
B.1 The 14 day Completion Time for Required Action B.5 is based
 
on the OPERABILITY of both opposite-unit DGs and the
 
availability of the 0C DG. The 0C DG is available to power
 
the inoperable DG bus loads in the event of a station
 
blackout or loss-of-offsite power. It is required to
 
administratively verify both opposite-unit DGs OPERABLE and
 
the 0C DG available within one hour and to continue this
 
action once per 24 hours thereafter until restoration of the
 
required DG is accomplished. This verification provides
 
assurance that both opposite-unit DGs and the 0C DG are
 
capable of supplying the onsite Class 1E AC Electrical Power
 
Distribution System.
B.2  To ensure a highly reliable power source remains with an
 
inoperable LCO 3.8.1.b DG, it is necessary to verify the
 
availability of the offsite circuits on a more frequent
 
basis. Since the Required Action only specifies "perform,"
a failure of SR 3.8.1.1 or SR 3.8.1.2 acceptance criteria
 
does not result in a Required Action being not met.
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-9 Revision 26 However, if a circuit fails to pass SR 3.8.1.1 or SR 3.8.1.2, it is inoperable. Upon offsite circuit  
 
inoperability, additional Conditions and Required Actions  
 
must then be entered.  
 
B.3 Required Action B.3 is intended to provide assurance that a loss of offsite power, during the period that a LCO 3.8.1.b  
 
DG is inoperable, does not result in a complete loss of  
 
safety function of critical systems. These features are  
 
designed with redundant safety-related trains. Single train  
 
systems are not included. Redundant required feature  
 
failures consist of inoperable features with a train, redundant to the train that has an inoperable LCO 3.8.1.b  
 
DG.
The Completion Time for Required Action B.3 is intended to allow the operator time to evaluate and repair any  
 
discovered inoperabilities. This Completion Time also  
 
allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for  
 
beginning the allowed outage time "clock." In this Required  
 
Action, the Completion Time only begins on discovery that  
 
both: a. An inoperable LCO 3.8.1.b DG exists; and b. A required feature on another train is inoperable.  
 
If at any time during the existence of this Condition (one LCO 3.8.1.b DG inoperable) a required feature subsequently  
 
becomes inoperable, this Completion Time begins to be  
 
tracked.
Discovering one required LCO 3.8.1.b DG inoperable coincident with one or more inoperable required support or  
 
supported features (or both) that are associated with the OPERABLE DGs, results in starting the Completion Time for the Required Action. Four hours from the discovery of these  
 
events existing concurrently, is acceptable because it  
 
minimizes risk while allowing time for restoration before  
 
subjecting the unit to transients associated with shutdown.  
 
In this Condition, the remaining OPERABLE DGs and offsite circuits are adequate to supply electrical power to the AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-10 Revision 26 onsite Class 1E Distribution System. Thus, on a component basis, single failure protection for the required feature's
 
function may have been lost; however, function has not been
 
lost. The four hour Completion Time takes into account the
 
OPERABILITY of the redundant counterpart to the inoperable
 
required feature. Additionally, the four hour Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the
 
low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.
 
B.4.1 and B.4.2 Required Action B.4.1 provides an allowance to avoid
 
unnecessary testing of OPERABLE DGs. If it can be
 
determined that the cause of the inoperable DG does not
 
exist on the OPERABLE DG(s), SR 3.8.1.3 does not have to be
 
performed. If the cause of inoperability exists on other
 
DG(s), the other DG(s) would be declared inoperable upon
 
discovery and Condition E and/or I of LCO 3.8.1, as
 
applicable, would be entered. Once the failure is repaired, the common cause failure no longer exists and Required
 
Action B.4.1 is satisfied. If the cause of the initial
 
inoperable DG cannot be confirmed not to exist on the
 
remaining DG(s), performance of SR 3.8.1.3 suffices to
 
provide assurance of continued OPERABILITY of the DG(s).
 
In the event the inoperable DG is restored to OPERABLE status prior to completing either B.4.1 or B.4.2, the
 
corrective action program will continue to evaluate the
 
common cause possibility. This continued evaluation, however, is no longer under the 24 hour constraint imposed
 
while in Condition B.


AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES onsite Class 1E Distribution System. Thus, on a component basis, single failure protection for the required feature's function may have been lost; however, function has not been lost. The four hour Completion Time takes into account the OPERABILITY of the redundant counterpart to the inoperable required feature. Additionally, the four hour Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.
B.4.1 and B.4.2 Required Action B.4.1 provides an allowance to avoid unnecessary testing of OPERABLE DGs. If it can be determined that the cause of the inoperable DG does not exist on the OPERABLE DG(s), SR 3.8.1.3 does not have to be performed. If the cause of inoperability exists on other DG(s), the other DG(s) would be declared inoperable upon discovery and Condition E and/or I of LCO 3.8.1, as applicable, would be entered. Once the failure is repaired, the common cause failure no longer exists and Required Action B.4.1 is satisfied. If the cause of the initial inoperable DG cannot be confirmed not to exist on the remaining DG(s), performance of SR 3.8.1.3 suffices to provide assurance of continued OPERABILITY of the DG(s).
In the event the inoperable DG is restored to OPERABLE status prior to completing either B.4.1 or B.4.2, the corrective action program will continue to evaluate the common cause possibility. This continued evaluation, however, is no longer under the 24 hour constraint imposed while in Condition B.
Consistent with Reference 7, 24 hours is reasonable to confirm that the OPERABLE DG(s) is not affected by the same problem as the inoperable DG.
Consistent with Reference 7, 24 hours is reasonable to confirm that the OPERABLE DG(s) is not affected by the same problem as the inoperable DG.
These Conditions (B.4.1 and B.4.2) do not address the availability of the 0C DG.  
These Conditions (B.4.1 and B.4.2) do not address the availability of the 0C DG.
B.5 Operation may continue in Condition B for a period that should not exceed 14 days.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.1-10                      Revision 26


B.5  Operation may continue in Condition B for a period that  
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES Planned entry into this Required Action requires that a risk assessment be performed in accordance with a configuration risk management program (Reference 11). This ensures that a proceduralized probabilistic risk assessment-informed process is in place that assesses the overall impact of plant maintenance on plant risk prior to entering this Required Action for planned activities.
In Condition B, the remaining OPERABLE DGs, available 0C DG, and offsite circuits are adequate to supply electrical power to the onsite Class 1E Distribution System. The 14 day Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.
In addition to utilizing Calvert Cliffs Nuclear Power Plant's processes for evaluating risk, Reference 11, Calvert Cliffs will administratively limit DG OOS time to 72 hours for elective maintenance unless the following actions are completed:
: a. Weather conditions will be evaluated prior to entering the extended DG Completion Time for elective maintenance. An extended DG Completion Time will not be entered for elective maintenance purposes if official weather forecasts are predicting severe conditions (tornado or thunderstorm warnings).
: b. The condition of the offsite power supply will be evaluated prior to entering the extended DG Completion Time.
: c. No elective maintenance will be performed in the switchyard, on the 4 kV Distribution System, or on the 13 kV Distribution System.
: d. No maintenance or testing that affects the reliability of the train associated with the operable DG on the affected unit will be scheduled during the extended DG Completion Time. If any testing or maintenance activities, which affects the train reliability must be performed while the extended DG Completion Time is in effect, a 10 CFR 50.65(a)(4) evaluation will be performed.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.1-11                        Revision 26


should not exceed 14 days.
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-11 Revision 26 Planned entry into this Required Action requires that a risk assessment be performed in accordance with a configuration
: e. Elective maintenance will not be performed on the alternate AC power source (0C DG). Personnel will be made aware of the dedication of the alternate AC source to the affected Unit.
: f. Planned maintenance will not be performed on the Auxiliary Feedwater System.
: g. The system dispatcher (System Operations and Maintenance Department) will be contacted prior to removing the DG from service and after it has been returned to service.
: h. The operations crews will be briefed concerning the Unit activities, including compensatory measures established and the importance of promptly starting and aligning the alternate AC source (0C DG).
: i. The on-shift operations crew will discuss and review the appropriate normal and emergency operating procedures prior to or shortly after assuming the watch for the first time after having scheduled days off while the extended DG Completion Time is in effect.
: j. The condition of the grid will be evaluated prior to entering the extended DG 3.8.1 Condition B Completion Time for elective maintenance. An extended DG Completion Time will not be entered to perform elective maintenance when grid stress conditions are considered High per plant procedures. This will include conditions such as expected extreme summer temperatures and/or high demand.
The second Completion Time for Required Action B.5 establishes a limit on the maximum time allowed for any combination of required AC power sources to be inoperable during any single contiguous occurrence of failing to meet LCO 3.8.1.a or LCO 3.8.1.b. If Condition B is entered while, for instance, an LCO 3.8.1.a offsite circuit is inoperable and that circuit is subsequently returned OPERABLE, the LCO may already have not been met for up to 72 hours. This could lead to a total of 17 days, since initial failure to meet LCO 3.8.1.a or LCO 3.8.1.b, to restore the DG. At this time, a LCO 3.8.1.a offsite circuit could again become inoperable, the DG restored OPERABLE, and an additional 72 hours (for a total of 20 days) allowed CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2     B 3.8.1-12                        Revision 26


risk management program (Reference 11). This ensures that a  
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES prior to complete restoration of LCO 3.8.1.a and LCO 3.8.1.b. The 17 day Completion Time provides a limit on time allowed in a specified condition after discovery of failure to meet LCO 3.8.1.a or LCO 3.8.1.b. This limit is considered reasonable for situations in which Conditions A and B are entered concurrently. The "AND" connector between the 14 day and 17 day Completion Times means that both Completion Times apply simultaneously, and the more restrictive Completion Time must be met.
As in Required Action B.3, the Completion Time allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for beginning the allowed time "clock." This will result in establishing the "time zero" at the time that LCO 3.8.1.a or LCO 3.8.1.b was initially not met, instead of at the time Condition B was entered.
C.1.1 and C.1.2 In Condition C with an opposite-unit DG inoperable and/or the 0C DG unavailable, the remaining OPERABLE unit-specific DG and required qualified circuits are adequate to supply electrical power to the onsite Class 1E Distribution System.
Consistent with Reference 6, operation may continue in Condition C for a period that should not exceed 72 hours.
The 72 hour Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.
D.1 Pursuant to LCO 3.0.6, the Distribution System ACTIONS would not be entered even if all AC sources to it, were inoperable resulting in de-energization. Therefore, the Required Actions of Condition D are modified by a Note to indicate that when Condition D is entered with no AC source to any train, the Conditions and Required Actions for LCO 3.8.9, must be immediately entered. This allows Condition D to provide requirements for the loss of the LCO 3.8.1.c offsite circuit and DG without regard to whether a train is de-energized. Limiting Condition for Operation 3.8.9 provides the appropriate restrictions for a de-energized train.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.1-13                        Revision 26


proceduralized probabilistic risk assessment-informed
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES To ensure a highly reliable power source remains with the one required LCO 3.8.1.c offsite circuit inoperable, it is necessary to verify the OPERABILITY of the remaining required offsite circuits on a more frequent basis. Since the Required Action only specifies "perform," a failure of SR 3.8.1.1 or SR 3.8.1.2 acceptance criteria does not result in a Required Action not met. However, if a second required circuit fails SR 3.8.1.1 or SR 3.8.1.2, the second offsite circuit is inoperable, and Condition A and/or G, as applicable, for the two offsite circuits inoperable, is entered.
 
D.2 Required Action D.2, which only applies if the train cannot be powered from an offsite source, is intended to provide assurance that an event coincident with a single failure of the associated DG will not result in a complete loss of safety function for the CREVS or CRETS. The Completion Time for Required Action D.2 is intended to allow the operator time to evaluate and repair any discovered inoperabilities.
process is in place that assesses the overall impact of plant maintenance on plant risk prior to entering this Required Action for planned activities.
This Completion Time also allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for beginning the allowed outage time "clock." In this Required Action, the Completion Time only begins on discovery that both:
 
: a. The train has no offsite power supplying its loads; and
In Condition B, the remaining OPERABLE DGs, available 0C DG, and offsite circuits are adequate to supply electrical power
: b. A train of CREVS or CRETS on the other train is inoperable.
 
If at any time during the existence of Condition D (one required LCO 3.8.1.c offsite circuit inoperable) a train of CREVS or CRETS becomes inoperable, this Completion Time begins to be tracked.
to the onsite Class 1E Distribution System. The 14 day
Discovering no offsite power to one train of the onsite Class 1E Electrical Power Distribution System coincident with one train of CREVS or CRETS that is associated with the other train that has offsite power, results in starting the Completion Times for the Required Action. Twenty-four hours is acceptable because it minimizes risk while allowing time for restoration before subjecting the unit to transients associated with shutdown.
 
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2       B 3.8.1-14                      Revision 26
Completion Time takes into account the capacity and
 
capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time
 
for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring
 
during this period.
In addition to utilizing Calvert Cliffs Nuclear Power
 
Plant's processes for evaluating risk, Reference 11, Calvert
 
Cliffs will administratively limit DG OOS time to 72 hours
 
for elective maintenance unless the following actions are
 
completed: a. Weather conditions will be evaluated prior to entering the extended DG Completion Time for elective maintenance. An extended DG Completion Time will not
 
be entered for elective maintenance purposes if
 
official weather forecasts are predicting severe
 
conditions (tornado or thunderstorm warnings). b. The condition of the offsite power supply will be evaluated prior to entering the extended DG Completion
 
Time. c. No elective maintenance will be performed in the switchyard, on the 4 kV Distribution System, or on the
 
13 kV Distribution System. d. No maintenance or testing that affects the reliability of the train associated with the operable DG on the
 
affected unit will be scheduled during the extended DG
 
Completion Time. If any testing or maintenance
 
activities, which affects the train reliability must be
 
performed while the extended DG Completion Time is in
 
effect, a 10 CFR 50.65(a)(4) evaluation will be
 
performed.
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-12 Revision 26 e. Elective maintenance will not be performed on the alternate AC power source (0C DG). Personnel will be made aware of the dedication of the alternate AC source
 
to the affected Unit. f. Planned maintenance will not be performed on the Auxiliary Feedwater System. g. The system dispatcher (System Operations and Maintenance Department) will be contacted prior to
 
removing the DG from service and after it has been
 
returned to service. h. The operations crews will be briefed concerning the Unit activities, including compensatory measures
 
established and the importance of promptly starting and
 
aligning the alternate AC source (0C DG). i. The on-shift operations crew will discuss and review the appropriate normal and emergency operating
 
procedures prior to or shortly after assuming the watch
 
for the first time after having scheduled days off
 
while the extended DG Completion Time is in effect. j. The condition of the grid will be evaluated prior to entering the extended DG 3.8.1 Condition B Completion
 
Time for elective maintenance. An extended DG
 
Completion Time will not be entered to perform elective
 
maintenance when grid stress conditions are considered
 
"High" per plant procedures. This will include
 
conditions such as expected extreme summer temperatures
 
and/or high demand.
 
The second Completion Time for Required Action B.5 establishes a limit on the maximum time allowed for any
 
combination of required AC power sources to be inoperable
 
during any single contiguous occurrence of failing to meet
 
LCO 3.8.1.a or LCO 3.8.1.b. If Condition B is entered
 
while, for instance, an LCO 3.8.1.a offsite circuit is inoperable and that circuit is subsequently returned OPERABLE, the LCO may already have not been met for up to
 
72 hours. This could lead to a total of 17 days, since
 
initial failure to meet LCO 3.8.1.a or LCO 3.8.1.b, to
 
restore the DG. At this time, a LCO 3.8.1.a offsite circuit
 
could again become inoperable, the DG restored OPERABLE, and
 
an additional 72 hours (for a total of 20 days) allowed AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-13 Revision 26 prior to complete restoration of LCO 3.8.1.a and LCO 3.8.1.b. The 17 day Completion Time provides a limit on
 
time allowed in a specified condition after discovery of
 
failure to meet LCO 3.8.1.a or LCO 3.8.1.b. This limit is
 
considered reasonable for situations in which Conditions A
 
and B are entered concurrently. The "AND" connector between the 14 day and 17 day Completion Times means that both
 
Completion Times apply simultaneously, and the more
 
restrictive Completion Time must be met.
 
As in Required Action B.3, the Completion Time allows for an
 
exception to the normal "time zero" for beginning the
 
allowed time "clock."  This will result in establishing the "time zero" at the time that LCO 3.8.1.a or LCO 3.8.1.b was
 
initially not met, instead of at the time Condition B was
 
entered. C.1.1 and C.1.2 In Condition C with an opposite-unit DG inoperable and/or
 
the 0C DG unavailable, the remaining OPERABLE unit-specific
 
DG and required qualified circuits are adequate to supply
 
electrical power to the onsite Class 1E Distribution System. 
 
Consistent with Reference 6, operation may continue in
 
Condition C for a period that should not exceed 72 hours. 
 
The 72 hour Completion Time takes into account the capacity
 
and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable
 
time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring
 
during this period.
 
D.1  Pursuant to LCO 3.0.6, the Distribution System ACTIONS would
 
not be entered even if all AC sources to it, were inoperable
 
resulting in de-energization. Therefore, the Required
 
Actions of Condition D are modified by a Note to indicate that when Condition D is entered with no AC source to any train, the Conditions and Required Actions for LCO 3.8.9, must be immediately entered. This allows Condition D to
 
provide requirements for the loss of the LCO 3.8.1.c offsite
 
circuit and DG without regard to whether a train is de-
 
energized. Limiting Condition for Operation 3.8.9 provides
 
the appropriate restrictions for a de-energized train.
 
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-14 Revision 26 To ensure a highly reliable power source remains with the one required LCO 3.8.1.c offsite circuit inoperable, it is  
 
necessary to verify the OPERABILITY of the remaining  
 
required offsite circuits on a more frequent basis. Since  
 
the Required Action only specifies "perform," a failure of  
 
SR 3.8.1.1 or SR 3.8.1.2 acceptance criteria does not result in a Required Action not met. However, if a second required circuit fails SR 3.8.1.1 or SR 3.8.1.2, the second offsite  
 
circuit is inoperable, and Condition A and/or G, as  
 
applicable, for the two offsite circuits inoperable, is  
 
entered.
D.2 Required Action D.2, which only applies if the train cannot  
 
be powered from an offsite source, is intended to provide  
 
assurance that an event coincident with a single failure of  
 
the associated DG will not result in a complete loss of  
 
safety function for the CREVS or CRETS. The Completion Time  
 
for Required Action D.2 is intended to allow the operator  
 
time to evaluate and repair any discovered inoperabilities.
 
This Completion Time also allows for an exception to the  
 
normal "time zero" for beginning the allowed outage time "clock." In this Required Action, the Completion Time only  
 
begins on discovery that both: a. The train has no offsite power supplying its loads; and b. A train of CREVS or CRETS on the other train is inoperable.
If at any time during the existence of Condition D (one required LCO 3.8.1.c offsite circuit inoperable) a train of  
 
CREVS or CRETS becomes inoperable, this Completion Time  
 
begins to be tracked.  
 
Discovering no offsite power to one train of the onsite Class 1E Electrical Power Distribution System coincident  
 
with one train of CREVS or CRETS that is associated with the  
 
other train that has offsite power, results in starting the  
 
Completion Times for the Required Action. Twenty-four hours  
 
is acceptable because it minimizes risk while allowing time  
 
for restoration before subjecting the unit to transients  
 
associated with shutdown.  
 
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-15 Revision 26 The remaining OPERABLE offsite circuits and DGs are adequate to supply electrical power to Train A and Train B of the
 
onsite Class 1E Distribution System. The 24 hour Completion
 
Time takes into account the component OPERABILITY of the
 
redundant counterpart to the inoperable CREVS or CRETS. 
 
Additionally, the 24 hour Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a
 
DBA occurring during this period.
 
D.3  Consistent with the time provided in ACTION A, operation may
 
continue in Condition D for a period that should not exceed
 
72 hours. With one required LCO 3.8.1.c offsite circuit
 
inoperable, the reliability of the offsite system is
 
degraded, and the potential for a loss of offsite power is
 
increased, with attendant potential for a challenge to the
 
unit safety systems. In this Condition, however, the
 
remaining OPERABLE offsite circuits and DGs are adequate to
 
supply electrical power to the onsite Class 1E Distribution
 
System.
If the LCO 3.8.1.c required offsite circuit cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within 72 hours, the CREVS and
 
CRETS associated with the offsite circuit must be declared
 
inoperable. The ACTIONS associated with the CREVS and CRETS
 
will ensure the appropriate actions are taken. The 72 hour


Completion Time takes into account the capacity and  
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES The remaining OPERABLE offsite circuits and DGs are adequate to supply electrical power to Train A and Train B of the onsite Class 1E Distribution System. The 24 hour Completion Time takes into account the component OPERABILITY of the redundant counterpart to the inoperable CREVS or CRETS.
Additionally, the 24 hour Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.
D.3 Consistent with the time provided in ACTION A, operation may continue in Condition D for a period that should not exceed 72 hours. With one required LCO 3.8.1.c offsite circuit inoperable, the reliability of the offsite system is degraded, and the potential for a loss of offsite power is increased, with attendant potential for a challenge to the unit safety systems. In this Condition, however, the remaining OPERABLE offsite circuits and DGs are adequate to supply electrical power to the onsite Class 1E Distribution System.
If the LCO 3.8.1.c required offsite circuit cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within 72 hours, the CREVS and CRETS associated with the offsite circuit must be declared inoperable. The ACTIONS associated with the CREVS and CRETS will ensure the appropriate actions are taken. The 72 hour Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.
E.1 The 14 day Completion Time for Required Action E.5 is based on the OPERABILITY of the other three safety-related DGs and the availability of the 0C DG. The 0C DG is available to power the inoperable DG bus loads in the event of a station blackout or loss-of-offsite power. It is required to administratively verify the three safety-related DGs OPERABLE and the 0C DG available within one hour and to continue this action once per 24 hours thereafter until restoration of the required DG is accomplished. This CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.1-15                      Revision 26


capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES verification provides assurance that the three safety-related DGs and the 0C DG are capable of supplying the onsite Class 1E AC Electrical Power Distribution System.
 
E.2 Pursuant to LCO 3.0.6, the Distribution System ACTIONS would not be entered even if all AC sources to it, were inoperable resulting in de-energization. Therefore, the Required Actions of Condition E are modified by a Note to indicate that when Condition E is entered with no AC source to any train, the Conditions and Required Actions for LCO 3.8.9 must be immediately entered. This allows Condition E to provide requirements for the loss of the LCO 3.8.1.c offsite circuit and DG without regard to whether a train is de-energized. Limiting Condition for Operation 3.8.9 provides the appropriate restrictions for a de-energized train.
for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring
To ensure a highly reliable power source remains with the one required LCO 3.8.1.c DG inoperable, it is necessary to verify the availability of the required offsite circuits on a more frequency basis. Since the Required Action only specifies "perform," a failure of SR 3.8.1.1 or SR 3.8.1.2 acceptance criteria does not result in a Required Action not met. However, if a circuit fails to pass SR 3.8.1.1 or SR 3.8.1.2, it is inoperable. Upon offsite circuit inoperability additional Conditions and Required Actions must then be entered.
 
E.3 Required Action E.3 is intended to provide assurance that a loss of offsite power, during the period the LCO 3.8.1.c DG is inoperable, does not result in a complete loss of safety function for the CREVS or CRETS. The Completion Time is intended to allow the operator time to evaluate and repair any discovered inoperabilities. This Completion Time also allows for an exception to the normal time zero for beginning the allowed outage time clock. In this Required Action, the Completion Time only begins on discovery that both:
during this period.
: a. An inoperable LCO 3.8.1.c DG exists; and
 
E.1 The 14 day Completion Time for Required Action E.5 is based on the OPERABILITY of the other three safety-related DGs and the availability of the 0C DG. The 0C DG is available to
 
power the inoperable DG bus loads in the event of a station
 
blackout or loss-of-offsite power. It is required to
 
administratively verify the three safety-related DGs
 
OPERABLE and the 0C DG available within one hour and to
 
continue this action once per 24 hours thereafter until
 
restoration of the required DG is accomplished. This AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-16 Revision 26 verification provides assurance that the three safety-related DGs and the 0C DG are capable of supplying the  
 
onsite Class 1E AC Electrical Power Distribution System.
E.2 Pursuant to LCO 3.0.6, the Distribution System ACTIONS would not be entered even if all AC sources to it, were inoperable resulting in de-energization. Therefore, the Required  
 
Actions of Condition E are modified by a Note to indicate  
 
that when Condition E is entered with no AC source to any  
 
train, the Conditions and Required Actions for LCO 3.8.9  
 
must be immediately entered. This allows Condition E to  
 
provide requirements for the loss of the LCO 3.8.1.c offsite  
 
circuit and DG without regard to whether a train is de-
 
energized. Limiting Condition for Operation 3.8.9 provides  
 
the appropriate restrictions for a de-energized train.  
 
To ensure a highly reliable power source remains with the one required LCO 3.8.1.c DG inoperable, it is necessary to  
 
verify the availability of the required offsite circuits on  
 
a more frequency basis. Since the Required Action only  
 
specifies "perform," a failure of SR 3.8.1.1 or SR 3.8.1.2  
 
acceptance criteria does not result in a Required Action not  
 
met. However, if a circuit fails to pass SR 3.8.1.1 or  
 
SR 3.8.1.2, it is inoperable. Upon offsite circuit  
 
inoperability additional Conditions and Required Actions  
 
must then be entered.  
 
E.3 Required Action E.3 is intended to provide assurance that a  
 
loss of offsite power, during the period the LCO 3.8.1.c DG  
 
is inoperable, does not result in a complete loss of safety  
 
function for the CREVS or CRETS. The Completion Time is  
 
intended to allow the operator time to evaluate and repair any discovered inoperabilities. This Completion Time also allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for  
 
beginning the allowed outage time "clock.In this Required  
 
Action, the Completion Time only begins on discovery that  
 
both: a. An inoperable LCO 3.8.1.c DG exists; and
: b. A train of CREVS or CRETS on the other train is inoperable.
: b. A train of CREVS or CRETS on the other train is inoperable.
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-17 Revision 26 If at any time during the existence of this Condition (the
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2       B 3.8.1-16                      Revision 26
 
LCO 3.8.1.c DG inoperable) a train of CREVS or CRETS becomes
 
inoperable, this Completion Time begins to be tracked.
 
Discovering the LCO 3.8.1.c DG inoperable coincident with one train of CREVS or CRETS that is associated with the one LCO 3.8.1.b DG results in starting the Completion Time for
 
the Required Action. Four hours from the discovery of these
 
events existing concurrently, is acceptable because it
 
minimizes risk while allowing time for restoration before
 
subjecting the unit to transients associated with shutdown.
 
In this Condition, the remaining OPERABLE DGs and offsite
 
circuits are adequate to supply electrical power to the
 
onsite Class 1E Distribution System. Thus, on a component
 
basis, single failure protection for the CREVS or CRETS may
 
have been lost; however, function has not been lost. The
 
four hour Completion Time also takes into account the
 
capacity and capability of the remaining CREVS and CRETS
 
train, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low
 
probability of a DBA occurring during this period.
 
E.4.1 and E.4.2 Required Action E.4.1 provides an allowance to avoid
 
unnecessary testing of OPERABLE DGs. If it can be
 
determined that the cause of the inoperable DG does not
 
exist on the OPERABLE DG(s), SR 3.8.1.3 does not have to be
 
performed. If the cause of inoperability exists on other
 
DG(s), the other DG(s) would be declared inoperable upon


discovery and Condition B and/or I of LCO 3.8.1, as  
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES If at any time during the existence of this Condition (the LCO 3.8.1.c DG inoperable) a train of CREVS or CRETS becomes inoperable, this Completion Time begins to be tracked.
 
Discovering the LCO 3.8.1.c DG inoperable coincident with one train of CREVS or CRETS that is associated with the one LCO 3.8.1.b DG results in starting the Completion Time for the Required Action. Four hours from the discovery of these events existing concurrently, is acceptable because it minimizes risk while allowing time for restoration before subjecting the unit to transients associated with shutdown.
applicable, would be entered. Once the failure is repaired, the common cause failure no longer exists and Required  
In this Condition, the remaining OPERABLE DGs and offsite circuits are adequate to supply electrical power to the onsite Class 1E Distribution System. Thus, on a component basis, single failure protection for the CREVS or CRETS may have been lost; however, function has not been lost. The four hour Completion Time also takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining CREVS and CRETS train, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.
 
E.4.1 and E.4.2 Required Action E.4.1 provides an allowance to avoid unnecessary testing of OPERABLE DGs. If it can be determined that the cause of the inoperable DG does not exist on the OPERABLE DG(s), SR 3.8.1.3 does not have to be performed. If the cause of inoperability exists on other DG(s), the other DG(s) would be declared inoperable upon discovery and Condition B and/or I of LCO 3.8.1, as applicable, would be entered. Once the failure is repaired, the common cause failure no longer exists and Required Action E.4.1 is satisfied. If the cause of the initial inoperable DG cannot be confirmed not to exist on the remaining DG(s), performance of SR 3.8.1.3 suffices to provide assurance of continued OPERABILITY of the DG(s).
Action E.4.1 is satisfied. If the cause of the initial inoperable DG cannot be confirmed not to exist on the remaining DG(s), performance of SR 3.8.1.3 suffices to  
In the event the inoperable DG is restored to OPERABLE status prior to completing either E.4.1 or E.4.2, the corrective action program will continue to evaluate the common cause possibility. This continued evaluation, CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2     B 3.8.1-17                        Revision 26
 
provide assurance of continued OPERABILITY of the DG(s).  
 
In the event the inoperable DG is restored to OPERABLE status prior to completing either E.4.1 or E.4.2, the  
 
corrective action program will continue to evaluate the  
 
common cause possibility. This continued evaluation, AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-18 Revision 26 however, is no longer under the 24 hour constraint imposed while in Condition E.
 
Consistent with Reference 6, 24 hours is reasonable to
 
confirm that the OPERABLE DG(s) is not affected by the same
 
problem as the inoperable DG.
These Conditions (E.4.1 and E.4.2) do not address the
 
availability of the 0C DG.
 
E.5  Consistent with the time provided in ACTION B, operation may
 
continue in Condition E for a period that should not exceed
 
14 days. In Condition E, the remaining OPERABLE DGs, available 0C DG, and offsite power circuits are adequate to
 
supply electrical power to the Class 1E Distribution System.
 
If the LCO 3.8.1.c DG cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within 14 days the CREVS and CRETS associated with this DG
 
must be declared inoperable. The Actions associated with
 
the CREVS and CRETS will ensure the appropriate Actions are
 
taken.
The 14 day Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable
 
time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring
 
during this period.
F.1.1 and F.1.2 In Condition F, with an additional safety-related DG
 
inoperable or the 0C DG unavailable, the remaining OPERABLE
 
DG and required qualified circuits are adequate to supply
 
electrical power to the onsite Class 1E Distribution System. 


AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES however, is no longer under the 24 hour constraint imposed while in Condition E.
Consistent with Reference 6, 24 hours is reasonable to confirm that the OPERABLE DG(s) is not affected by the same problem as the inoperable DG.
These Conditions (E.4.1 and E.4.2) do not address the availability of the 0C DG.
E.5 Consistent with the time provided in ACTION B, operation may continue in Condition E for a period that should not exceed 14 days. In Condition E, the remaining OPERABLE DGs, available 0C DG, and offsite power circuits are adequate to supply electrical power to the Class 1E Distribution System.
If the LCO 3.8.1.c DG cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within 14 days the CREVS and CRETS associated with this DG must be declared inoperable. The Actions associated with the CREVS and CRETS will ensure the appropriate Actions are taken.
The 14 day Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.
F.1.1 and F.1.2 In Condition F, with an additional safety-related DG inoperable or the 0C DG unavailable, the remaining OPERABLE DG and required qualified circuits are adequate to supply electrical power to the onsite Class 1E Distribution System.
Consistent with Reference 6, operation may continue in Condition F for a period that should not exceed 72 hours.
Consistent with Reference 6, operation may continue in Condition F for a period that should not exceed 72 hours.
The 72 hour Completion Time takes into account the capacity  
The 72 hour Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.
 
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2     B 3.8.1-18                      Revision 26
and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable  
 
time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring  
 
during this period.  
 
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-19 Revision 26 F.1.3 If the LCO 3.8.1.c DG cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within 72 hours the CREVS and CRETS associated with this DG
 
must be declared inoperable. The Required Actions
 
associated with the CREVS and CRETS will ensure that the
 
appropriate actions are taken.
The 72 hour Completion Time takes into account the capacity
 
and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable
 
time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring
 
during this period.
 
G.1 and G.2 Condition G is entered when both offsite circuits required
 
by LCO 3.8.1.a are inoperable, or when the offsite circuit
 
required by LCO 3.8.1.c and one offsite circuit required by
 
LCO 3.8.1.a are concurrently inoperable, if the LCO 3.8.1.a
 
offsite circuit is credited with providing power to the
 
CREVS and CRETS.
 
Required Action G.1 is intended to provide assurance that an event with a coincident single failure will not result in a
 
complete loss of redundant required safety functions. The
 
Completion Time for this failure of redundant required
 
features is reduced to 12 hours from that allowed for one
 
train without offsite power (Required Action A.2). The
 
rationale for the reduction to 12 hours is that Reference 6
 
allows a Completion Time of 24 hours for two required


offsite circuits inoperable, based upon the assumption that  
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES F.1.3 If the LCO 3.8.1.c DG cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within 72 hours the CREVS and CRETS associated with this DG must be declared inoperable. The Required Actions associated with the CREVS and CRETS will ensure that the appropriate actions are taken.
The 72 hour Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.
G.1 and G.2 Condition G is entered when both offsite circuits required by LCO 3.8.1.a are inoperable, or when the offsite circuit required by LCO 3.8.1.c and one offsite circuit required by LCO 3.8.1.a are concurrently inoperable, if the LCO 3.8.1.a offsite circuit is credited with providing power to the CREVS and CRETS.
Required Action G.1 is intended to provide assurance that an event with a coincident single failure will not result in a complete loss of redundant required safety functions. The Completion Time for this failure of redundant required features is reduced to 12 hours from that allowed for one train without offsite power (Required Action A.2). The rationale for the reduction to 12 hours is that Reference 6 allows a Completion Time of 24 hours for two required offsite circuits inoperable, based upon the assumption that two complete safety trains are OPERABLE. When a concurrent redundant required feature failure exists, this assumption is not the case, and a shorter Completion Time of 12 hours is appropriate. These features are powered from redundant AC safety trains. Single train features are not included in the list.
The Completion Time for Required Action G.1 is intended to allow the operator time to evaluate and repair any discovered inoperabilities. This Completion Time also allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for beginning the allowed outage time "clock." In this Required CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.1-19                      Revision 26


two complete safety trains are OPERABLE. When a concurrent
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES Action, the Completion Time only begins on discovery that both:
: a. Two required offsite circuits are inoperable; and
: b. A required feature is inoperable.
If at any time during the existence of Condition G (e.g., two required LCO 3.8.1.a offsite circuits inoperable) and a required feature becomes inoperable, this Completion Time begins to be tracked.
Consistent with Reference 6, operation may continue in Condition G for a period that should not exceed 24 hours.
This level of degradation means that the offsite electrical power system does not have the capability to effect a safe shutdown and to mitigate the effects of an accident; however, the onsite AC sources have not been degraded. This level of degradation could correspond to a total loss of the immediately accessible offsite power sources.
Because of the normally high availability of the offsite sources, this level of degradation may appear to be more severe than other combinations of two AC sources inoperable that involve one or more DGs inoperable. However, two factors tend to decrease the severity of this level of degradation:
: a. The configuration of the redundant AC electrical power system that remains available is not susceptible to a single bus or switching failure; and
: b. The time required to detect and restore an unavailable offsite power source is generally much less than that required to detect and restore an unavailable onsite AC source.
With two of the required offsite circuits inoperable, sufficient onsite AC sources are available to maintain the unit in a safe shutdown condition in the event of a DBA or transient. In fact, a simultaneous loss of offsite AC sources, a loss of coolant accident, and a worst case single failure were postulated as a part of the design basis in the safety analysis. Thus, the 24 hour Completion Time provides a period of time to effect restoration of one of the offsite circuits commensurate with the importance of maintaining an CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.1-20                      Revision 26


redundant required feature failure exists, this assumption
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES AC electrical power system capable of meeting its design criteria.
Consistent with Reference 6, with the available offsite AC sources two less than required by the LCO, operation may continue for 24 hours. If two offsite sources are restored within 24 hours, unrestricted operation may continue. If only one offsite source is restored within 24 hours, power operation continues in accordance with Condition A or D, as applicable.
H.1 and H.2 Pursuant to LCO 3.0.6, the Distribution System ACTIONS would not be entered even if all AC sources to it were inoperable resulting in de-energization. Therefore, the Required Actions of Condition H are modified by a Note to indicate that when Condition H is entered with no AC source to any train, the Conditions and Required Actions for LCO 3.8.9, must be immediately entered. This allows Condition H to provide requirements for the loss of one required LCO 3.8.1.a offsite circuit and one LCO 3.8.1.b DG without regard to whether a train is de-energized. Limiting Condition for Operation 3.8.9 provides the appropriate restrictions for a de-energized train.
Consistent with Reference 6, operation may continue in Condition H for a period that should not exceed 12 hours.
In Condition H, individual redundancy is lost in both the offsite electrical power system and the onsite AC electrical power system. Since power system redundancy is provided by two diverse sources of power, however, the reliability of the power systems in this Condition may appear higher than that in Condition G (loss of two required offsite circuits).
This difference in reliability is offset by the susceptibility of this power system configuration to a single bus or switching failure. The 12 hour Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.1-21                        Revision 26


is not the case, and a shorter Completion Time of 12 hours  
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES I.1 With two LCO 3.8.1.b DGs inoperable, there are no remaining standby AC sources to provide power to most of the ESF systems. With one LCO 3.8.1.c DG inoperable and the LCO 3.8.1.b DG that provides power to the CREVS and CRETS inoperable, there are no remaining standby AC sources to the CREVS and CRETS. Thus, with an assumed loss of offsite electrical power, insufficient standby AC sources are available to power the minimum required ESF functions.
Since the offsite electrical power system is the only source of AC power for this level of degradation, the risk associated with continued operation for a short time could be less than that associated with an immediate controlled shutdown (the immediate shutdown could cause grid instability, which could result in a total loss of AC power). Since any inadvertent generator trip could also result in a total loss of offsite AC power, however, the time allowed for continued operation is severely restricted.
The intent here is to avoid the risk associated with an immediate controlled shutdown and to minimize the risk associated with this level of degradation.
Consistent with Reference 6, with both LCO 3.8.1.b DGs inoperable, or with the LCO 3.8.1.b DG that provides power to the CREVS and CRETS and the LCO 3.8.1.c DG inoperable, operation may continue for a period that should not exceed 2 hours.
J.1 and J.2 If any Required Action and associated Completion Time of Conditions A, B.2, B.3, B.4.1, B.4.2, B.5, C, E.2, E.3, E.4.1, E.4.2, E.5, F, G, H, or I are not met, the unit must be brought to a MODE in which the LCO does not apply. To achieve this status, the unit must be brought to at least MODE 3 within six hours and to MODE 5 within 36 hours. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required unit conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.1-22                        Revision 26


is appropriate. These features are powered from redundant
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES K.1 Condition K corresponds to a level of degradation in which all redundancy in LCO 3.8.1.a and LCO 3.8.1.b AC electrical power supplies has been lost. At this severely degraded level, any further losses in the AC electrical power system will cause a loss of function. Therefore, no additional time is justified for continued operation. The unit is required by LCO 3.0.3 to commence a controlled shutdown.
SURVEILLANCE      The AC sources are designed to permit inspection and REQUIREMENTS      testing of all important areas and features, especially those that have a standby function, in accordance with Reference 1, GDC 18. Periodic component tests are supplemented by extensive functional tests during refueling outages (under simulated accident conditions). The SRs for demonstrating the OPERABILITY of the DGs are consistent with the recommendations of Reference 3, or Reference 4, and Reference 8.
When the SRs discussed herein specify voltage and frequency tolerances, the following is applicable. The minimum transient output voltage of 3740 V is 90% of the nominal 4160 V output voltage. This value allows for voltage drop to the terminals of 4000 V motors whose minimum operating voltage is specified as 90% or 3600 V. The specified maximum output voltage of 4400 V is equal to the maximum operating voltage specified for 4000 V motors. It ensures that for a lightly loaded distribution system, the voltage at the terminals of 4000 V is no more than the maximum rated operating voltages. The specified minimum and maximum frequencies of the DG are 58.8 Hz and 61.2 Hz, respectively.
These values are equal to +/- 2% of the 60 Hz nominal frequency and are the recommendations given in Reference 3.
The SRs are modified by a Note which states that SR 3.8.1.1 through SR 3.8.1.15 are applicable to LCO 3.8.1.a and LCO 3.8.1.b AC Sources. The Note also states that SR 3.8.1.16 is applicable to LCO 3.8.1.c AC sources. This Note clarifies that not all of the SRs are applicable to all the components described in the LCO.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.1-23                      Revision 26


AC safety trains. Single train features are not included in the list.
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES SR 3.8.1.1 and SR 3.8.1.2 These SRs assure proper circuit continuity for the offsite AC electrical power supply to the onsite distribution network and availability of offsite AC electrical power.
The Completion Time for Required Action G.1 is intended to allow the operator time to evaluate and repair any
The breaker alignment verifies that each breaker is in its correct position to ensure that distribution buses and loads are connected to their preferred power source, and that appropriate independence of offsite circuits is maintained.
The Frequency of once within one hour after substitution for a 500 kV circuit and every eight hours thereafter, for SR 3.8.1.1 was established to ensure that the breaker alignment for the SMECO circuit (which does not have Control Room indication) is in its correct position although breaker position is unlikely to change. The seven day Frequency for SR 3.8.1.2 is adequate since the 500 kV circuit breaker position is not likely to change without the operator being aware of it and because its status is displayed in the Control Room.
Surveillance Requirement 3.8.1.1 is modified by a Note which states that this SR is only required when SMECO is being credited for an offsite source. This SR will prevent unnecessary testing on an uncredited circuit.
SR 3.8.1.3 and SR 3.8.1.9 These SRs help to ensure the availability of the standby electrical power supply to mitigate DBAs and transients and to maintain the unit in a safe shutdown condition.
To minimize the wear on moving parts that do not get lubricated when the engine is not running, these SRs are modified by a Note (Note 2 for SR 3.8.1.3) to indicate that all DG starts for these surveillance tests may be preceded by an engine prelube period and followed by a warmup period prior to loading by an engine prelube period.
For the purposes of SR 3.8.1.9 testing, the DGs are required to start from standby conditions only for SR 3.8.1.9.
Standby conditions for a DG mean the diesel engine coolant and oil are being continuously circulated and temperature is being maintained consistent with manufacturer recommendations.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.1-24                      Revision 26


discovered inoperabilities. This Completion Time also
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES In order to reduce stress and mechanical wear on diesel engines, the DG manufacturers recommend a modified start in which the starting speed of DGs is limited, warmup is limited to this lower speed, and the DGs are gradually accelerated to synchronous speed prior to loading. This is the intent of Note 3, which is only applicable when such modified start procedures are recommended by the manufacturer.
Surveillance Requirement 3.8.1.9 requires that, at a 184 day Frequency, the DG starts from standby conditions and achieves required voltage and frequency within 10 seconds.
The minimum voltage and frequency stated in the SR are those necessary to ensure the DG can accept DBA loading while maintaining acceptable voltage and frequency levels. The 10 second start requirement supports the assumptions of the design basis loss of coolant accident analysis in Reference 2, Chapter 14.
Since SR 3.8.1.9 requires a 10 second start, it is more restrictive than SR 3.8.1.3, and it may be performed in lieu of SR 3.8.1.3.
The 31 day Frequency for SR 3.8.1.3 is consistent with Reference 4 and Reference 3. The 184 day Frequency for SR 3.8.1.9 is a reduction in cold testing consistent with Reference 7. This Frequency provides adequate assurance of DG OPERABILITY, while minimizing degradation resulting from testing.
SR 3.8.1.4 This SR verifies that the DGs are capable of synchronizing with the offsite electrical system and accepting loads greater than or equal to 4000 kW for No. 1A DG and greater than or equal to 90% of the continuous duty rating for the remaining DGs. The 90% minimum load limit is consistent with Reference 3 and is acceptable because testing of these DGs at post-accident load values is performed by SR 3.8.1.11. A minimum run time of 60 minutes is required to stabilize engine temperatures, while minimizing the time that the DG is connected to the offsite source.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.1-25                        Revision 26


allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for  
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES Although no power factor requirements are established by this SR, the DG is normally operated at a power factor between 0.8 lagging and 1.0. The 0.8 value is the design rating of the machine, while 1.0 is an operational limitation. The 31-day Frequency for this SR is consistent with Reference 3.
This SR is modified by four Notes. Note 1 indicates that the diesel engine runs for this surveillance test may include gradual loading, as recommended by the manufacturer, so that mechanical stress and wear on the diesel engine are minimized. Note 2 states that momentary transients because of changing bus loads do not invalidate this test. Note 3 indicates that this surveillance test shall be conducted on only one DG at a time in order to prevent routinely paralleling multiple DGs and to minimize the potential for effects from offsite circuit or grid perturbations. Note 4 stipulates a prerequisite requirement for performance of this SR. A successful DG start must precede this test to credit satisfactory performance.
SR 3.8.1.5 This SR provides verification that the level of fuel oil in the day tank is at or above the level at which fuel oil is automatically added. The level required by the SR is expressed as an equivalent volume in gallons, and is selected to ensure adequate fuel oil for a minimum of one hour of DG operation at full load plus 10%.
The 31-day Frequency is adequate to assure that a sufficient supply of fuel oil is available, since low level alarms are provided, and unit operators would be aware of any large uses of fuel oil during this period.
SR 3.8.1.6 Microbiological fouling is a major cause of fuel oil degradation. There are numerous bacteria that can grow in fuel oil and cause fouling, but all must have a water environment in order to survive. Removal of water from the fuel oil day tanks once every 31 days eliminates the necessary environment for bacterial survival. This is the most effective means of controlling microbiological fouling.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.1-26                      Revision 26


beginning the allowed outage time "clock."  In this Required AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-20 Revision 26 Action, the Completion Time only begins on discovery that both:  a. Two required offsite circuits are inoperable; and
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES In addition, it eliminates the potential for water entrainment in the fuel oil during DG operation. Water may come from any of several sources, including condensation, ground water, rain water, contaminated fuel oil, and from breakdown of the fuel oil by bacteria. Frequent checking for and removal of accumulated water minimizes fouling and provides data regarding the watertight integrity of the fuel oil system. The SR Frequencies are consistent with Reference 8. This SR is for preventive maintenance. The presence of water does not necessarily represent failure of this SR provided the accumulated water is removed during the performance of this surveillance test.
: b. A required feature is inoperable.
SR 3.8.1.7 This SR demonstrates that one fuel oil transfer pump operates and transfers fuel oil from its associated storage tank to its associated day tank. This is required to support continuous operation of standby power sources. This SR provides assurance that the fuel oil transfer pump is OPERABLE, the fuel oil piping system is intact, the fuel delivery piping is not obstructed, and the controls and control systems for automatic fuel transfer systems are OPERABLE.
The Frequency for this SR is 31 days. The 31-day Frequency corresponds to the design of the fuel transfer system. The design of fuel transfer systems is such that pumps will operate automatically or must be started manually in order to maintain an adequate volume of fuel oil in the day tanks during or following DG testing. In such a case, a 31-day Frequency is appropriate.
SR 3.8.1.8 Under accident and loss of offsite power conditions loads are sequentially connected to the bus by the automatic load sequencer (this SR verifies steps 1 through 5). The sequencing logic controls the permissive and closing signals to breakers to prevent overloading of the DGs due to high motor starting currents. The 10% load sequence time interval tolerance ensures that sufficient time exists for the DG to restore frequency and voltage prior to applying the next load, and that safety analysis assumptions CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2     B 3.8.1-27                      Revision 26


If at any time during the existence of Condition G (e.g., two required LCO 3.8.1.a offsite circuits inoperable) and a required feature becomes inoperable, this Completion
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES regarding ESF equipment time delays are not violated. The UFSAR provides a summary of the automatic loading of ESF buses.
The Frequency of 31 days is consistent with DG monthly testing and is sufficient to ensure the load sequencer operation as required.
SR 3.8.1.9 See SR 3.8.1.3.
SR 3.8.1.10 Transfer of each 4.16 kV ESF bus power supply from the normal offsite circuit to the alternate offsite circuit demonstrates the OPERABILITY of the alternate circuit distribution network to power the shutdown loads. The 24 month Frequency of the Surveillance is based on engineering judgment, taking into consideration the unit conditions required to perform the Surveillance, and is intended to be consistent with expected fuel cycle lengths.
Operating experience has shown that these components usually pass the SR when performed at the 24 month Frequency.
Therefore, the Frequency was concluded to be acceptable from a reliability standpoint.
SR 3.8.1.11 This SR provides verification that the DG can be operated at a load greater than predicted accident loads for at least 60 minutes once per 24 months. Operation at the greater than calculated accident loads will clearly demonstrate the ability of the DGs to perform their safety function. In order to ensure that the DG is tested under load conditions that are as close to design conditions as possible, testing must be performed using a DG load greater than or equal to calculated accident load and using a power factor  0.85.
This power factor is chosen to be representative of the actual design basis inductive loading that the DG could experience. In addition, the post-accident load for No. 1A DG is significantly lower than the continuous rating of No. 1A DG. To ensure No. 1A DG performance is not degraded, routine monitoring of engine parameters should be performed CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.1-28                      Revision 26


Time begins to be tracked.  
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES during the performance of this SR for No. 1A DG (Reference 9).
This SR is modified by a Note which states that momentary transients due to changing bus loads do not invalidate this test. Similarly, momentary power factor transients above the limit will not invalidate the test. The 24 month Frequency is adequate to ensure DG OPERABILITY and it is consistent with the refueling interval.
SR 3.8.1.12 Each DG is provided with an engine overspeed trip to prevent damage to the engine. Recovery from the transient caused by the loss of a large load could cause diesel engine overspeed, which, if excessive, might result in a trip of the engine. This SR demonstrates the DG load response characteristics. This SR is accomplished by tripping the DG output breaker with the DG carrying greater than or equal to its associated single largest post-accident load while paralleled to offsite power.
Consistent with References 10, 3, and 4, the load rejection test is acceptable if the increase in diesel speed does not exceed 75% of the difference between synchronous speed and the overspeed trip setpoint, or 15% above synchronous speed, whichever is lower.
The 24 month Frequency is consistent with the Reference 2, Chapter 8.
SR 3.8.1.13 This SR demonstrates that DG non-critical protective functions are bypassed on a required actuation signal. This SR is accomplished by verifying the bypass contact changes to the correct state which prevents actuation of the non-critical function. The non-critical protective functions are consistent with References 3 and 4, and Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)-387 and are listed in Reference 2, Chapter 8. Verifying the non-critical trips are bypassed will ensure DG operation during a required actuation. The non-critical trips are bypassed during DBAs and provide an alarm on an abnormal engine CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.1-29                      Revision 26


Consistent with Reference 6, operation may continue in  
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES condition. A failure of the electronic governor results in the diesel generator operating in hydraulic mode. This alarm provides the operator with sufficient time to react appropriately. The DG availability to mitigate the DBA is more critical than protecting the engine against minor problems that are not immediately detrimental to emergency operation of the DG.
The 24 month Frequency is based on engineering judgment, taking into consideration unit conditions required to perform the surveillance test, and is intended to be consistent with expected fuel cycle lengths. Operating experience has shown that these components usually pass the SR when performed at the 24 month Frequency. Therefore, the Frequency was concluded to be acceptable from a reliability standpoint. This Frequency is consistent with Reference 2, Chapter 8.
SR 3.8.1.14 This SR ensures that the manual synchronization and load transfer from the DG to the offsite source can be made and that the DG can be returned to ready-to-load status when offsite power is restored. The DG is considered to be in ready-to-load status when the DG is at rated speed and voltage, the output breaker is open and can receive an auto-close signal on bus undervoltage, and the load sequence timers are reset.
The Frequency of 24 months takes into consideration unit conditions required to perform the surveillance test.
SR 3.8.1.15 In the event of a DBA coincident with a loss of offsite power, the DGs are required to supply the necessary power to ESF systems so that the fuel, RCS, and containment design limits are not exceeded.
This SR demonstrates the DG operation during a loss of offsite power actuation test signal in conjunction with an ESF (i.e., safety injection) actuation signal. In lieu of actual demonstration of connection and loading of loads, testing that adequately shows the capability of the DG CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.1-30                      Revision 26


Condition G for a period that should not exceed 24 hours.
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES system to perform these functions is acceptable. This testing may include any series of sequential, overlapping, or total steps so that the entire connection and loading sequence is verified.
It is not necessary to energize loads which are dependent on temperature to load (i.e., heat tracing, switchgear HVAC compressor, computer room HVAC compressor). Also, it is acceptable to transfer the instrument AC bus to the non tested train to maintain safe operation of the plant during testing. Loads (both permanent and auto connect) < 15 kW do not require loading onto the diesel since these are insignificant loads for the DG.
Permanently- and auto-connected loads to the emergency diesel generators are defined as follows:
Permanently-Connected Load - Equipment that is not shed by an undervoltage or safety injection actuation signal and is normally operating, i.e., loads that are manually started, selected, or process signal controlled are not considered permanently-connected loads.
Auto-Connected Loads - Emergency equipment required for mitigating the events described in UFSAR Chapter 14 that are energized by loss-of-coolant incident sequencer actions after step zero and within the first minute of emergency diesel generator operation after the initiation of an undervoltage signal.
The Frequency of 24 months takes into consideration unit conditions required to perform the surveillance test and is intended to be consistent with an expected fuel cycle length of 24 months.
This SR is modified by a Note. The reason for the Note is to minimize mechanical wear and stress on the DGs during testing. For the purpose of this testing, the DGs must be started from standby conditions, that is, with the engine coolant and oil continuously circulated and temperature maintained consistent with manufacturer recommendations for DGs.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.1-31                      Revision 26


This level of degradation means that the offsite electrical
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES SR 3.8.1.16 This SR lists the SRs that are applicable to the LCO 3.8.1.c (SRs 3.8.1.1, 3.8.1.2, 3.8.1.3, 3.8.1.5, 3.8.1.6, and 3.8.1.7). Performance of any SR for the LCO 3.8.1.c will satisfy both Unit 1 and Unit 2 requirements for those SRs.
Surveillance Requirements 3.8.1.4, 3.8.1.8, 3.8.1.9, 3.8.1.10, 3.8.1.11, 3.8.1.12, 3.8.1.13, 3.8.1.14, and 3.8.1.15, are not required to be performed for the LCO 3.8.1.c. Surveillance Requirement 3.8.1.10 is not required because this SR verifies manual transfer of AC power sources from the normal offsite circuit to the alternate offsite circuit, but only one qualified offsite circuit is necessary for the LCO 3.8.1.c. Surveillance Requirements 3.8.1.4, 3.8.1.11, and 3.1.8.12 are not required because they are tests that deal with loads.
Surveillance Requirement 3.8.1.8 verifies the interval between sequenced loads. Surveillance Requirement 3.8.1.14 verifies the proper sequencing with offsite power.
Surveillance Requirement 3.8.1.9 verifies that the DG starts within 10 seconds. These SRs are not required because they do not support the function of the LCO 3.8.1.c to provide power to the CREVS and CRETS. Surveillance Requirements 3.8.1.13 and 3.8.1.15 are not required to be performed because these SRs verify the emergency loads are actuated on an ESFAS signal for the Unit in which the test is being performed. The LCO 3.8.1.c DG will not start on an ESFAS signal for this Unit.
REFERENCES        1. 10 CFR Part 50, Appendix A, "General Design Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants"
: 2. UFSAR
: 3. Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 3, "Selection, Design, Qualification, and Testing of Emergency Diesel Generator Units Used as Class 1E Onsite Electric Power Systems at Nuclear Power Plants," July 1993
: 4. Safety Guide 9, Revision 0, March 1971
: 5. NRC Safety Evaluation for Amendment Nos. 19 and 5 for Calvert Cliffs Nuclear Power Plant Unit Nos. 1 and 2, dated January 14, 1977
: 6. Regulatory Guide 1.93, Revision 0, "Availability of Electric Power Sources," December 1974 CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.1-32                      Revision 26


power system does not have the capability to effect a safe
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES
 
shutdown and to mitigate the effects of an accident;
 
however, the onsite AC sources have not been degraded. This
 
level of degradation could correspond to a total loss of the
 
immediately accessible offsite power sources.
 
Because of the normally high availability of the offsite sources, this level of degradation may appear to be more
 
severe than other combinations of two AC sources inoperable
 
that involve one or more DGs inoperable. However, two
 
factors tend to decrease the severity of this level of
 
degradation:  a. The configuration of the redundant AC electrical power system that remains available is not susceptible to a
 
single bus or switching failure; and  b. The time required to detect and restore an unavailable offsite power source is generally much less than that
 
required to detect and restore an unavailable onsite AC
 
source.
With two of the required offsite circuits inoperable, sufficient onsite AC sources are available to maintain the
 
unit in a safe shutdown condition in the event of a DBA or
 
transient. In fact, a simultaneous loss of offsite AC
 
sources, a loss of coolant accident, and a worst case single
 
failure were postulated as a part of the design basis in the
 
safety analysis. Thus, the 24 hour Completion Time provides
 
a period of time to effect restoration of one of the offsite
 
circuits commensurate with the importance of maintaining an AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-21 Revision 26 AC electrical power system capable of meeting its design criteria.
 
Consistent with Reference 6, with the available offsite AC
 
sources two less than required by the LCO, operation may
 
continue for 24 hours. If two offsite sources are restored within 24 hours, unrestricted operation may continue. If only one offsite source is restored within 24 hours, power
 
operation continues in accordance with Condition A or D, as
 
applicable.
 
H.1 and H.2 Pursuant to LCO 3.0.6, the Distribution System ACTIONS would
 
not be entered even if all AC sources to it were inoperable
 
resulting in de-energization. Therefore, the Required
 
Actions of Condition H are modified by a Note to indicate
 
that when Condition H is entered with no AC source to any
 
train, the Conditions and Required Actions for LCO 3.8.9, must be immediately entered. This allows Condition H to
 
provide requirements for the loss of one required
 
LCO 3.8.1.a offsite circuit and one LCO 3.8.1.b DG without
 
regard to whether a train is de-energized. Limiting
 
Condition for Operation 3.8.9 provides the appropriate
 
restrictions for a de-energized train.
 
Consistent with Reference 6, operation may continue in Condition H for a period that should not exceed 12 hours.
 
In Condition H, individual redundancy is lost in both the offsite electrical power system and the onsite AC electrical
 
power system. Since power system redundancy is provided by
 
two diverse sources of power, however, the reliability of
 
the power systems in this Condition may appear higher than
 
that in Condition G (loss of two required offsite circuits).
This difference in reliability is offset by the susceptibility of this power system configuration to a
 
single bus or switching failure. The 12 hour Completion
 
Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the
 
remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the
 
low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.
 
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-22 Revision 26 I.1  With two LCO 3.8.1.b DGs inoperable, there are no remaining standby AC sources to provide power to most of the ESF
 
systems. With one LCO 3.8.1.c DG inoperable and the
 
LCO 3.8.1.b DG that provides power to the CREVS and CRETS
 
inoperable, there are no remaining standby AC sources to the CREVS and CRETS. Thus, with an assumed loss of offsite electrical power, insufficient standby AC sources are
 
available to power the minimum required ESF functions. 
 
Since the offsite electrical power system is the only source
 
of AC power for this level of degradation, the risk
 
associated with continued operation for a short time could
 
be less than that associated with an immediate controlled
 
shutdown (the immediate shutdown could cause grid
 
instability, which could result in a total loss of AC
 
power). Since any inadvertent generator trip could also
 
result in a total loss of offsite AC power, however, the
 
time allowed for continued operation is severely restricted. 
 
The intent here is to avoid the risk associated with an
 
immediate controlled shutdown and to minimize the risk
 
associated with this level of degradation.
 
Consistent with Reference 6, with both LCO 3.8.1.b DGs inoperable, or with the LCO 3.8.1.b DG that provides power
 
to the CREVS and CRETS and the LCO 3.8.1.c DG inoperable, operation may continue for a period that should not exceed
 
2 hours.
J.1 and J.2 If any Required Action and associated Completion Time of
 
Conditions A, B.2, B.3, B.4.1, B.4.2, B.5, C, E.2, E.3, E.4.1, E.4.2, E.5, F, G, H, or I are not met, the unit must
 
be brought to a MODE in which the LCO does not apply. To
 
achieve this status, the unit must be brought to at least MODE 3 within six hours and to MODE 5 within 36 hours. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating
 
experience, to reach the required unit conditions from full
 
power conditions in an orderly manner and without
 
challenging unit systems.
 
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-23 Revision 26 K.1  Condition K corresponds to a level of degradation in which all redundancy in LCO 3.8.1.a and LCO 3.8.1.b AC electrical
 
power supplies has been lost. At this severely degraded
 
level, any further losses in the AC electrical power system
 
will cause a loss of function. Therefore, no additional time is justified for continued operation. The unit is
 
required by LCO 3.0.3 to commence a controlled shutdown.
SURVEILLANCE The AC sources are designed to permit inspection and REQUIREMENTS testing of all important areas and features, especially those that have a standby function, in accordance with
 
Reference 1, GDC 18. Periodic component tests are
 
supplemented by extensive functional tests during refueling
 
outages (under simulated accident conditions). The SRs for
 
demonstrating the OPERABILITY of the DGs are consistent with
 
the recommendations of Reference 3, or Reference 4, and
 
Reference 8.
 
When the SRs discussed herein specify voltage and frequency tolerances, the following is applicable. The minimum
 
transient output voltage of 3740 V is 90% of the nominal
 
4160 V output voltage. This value allows for voltage drop
 
to the terminals of 4000 V motors whose minimum operating
 
voltage is specified as 90% or 3600 V. The specified
 
maximum output voltage of 4400 V is equal to the maximum
 
operating voltage specified for 4000 V motors. It ensures
 
that for a lightly loaded distribution system, the voltage
 
at the terminals of 4000 V is no more than the maximum rated
 
operating voltages. The specified minimum and maximum frequencies of the DG are 58.8 Hz and 61.2 Hz, respectively.
These values are equal to +/- 2% of the 60 Hz nominal
 
frequency and are the recommendations given in Reference 3.
 
The SRs are modified by a Note which states that SR 3.8.1.1 through SR 3.8.1.15 are applicable to LCO 3.8.1.a and
 
LCO 3.8.1.b AC Sources. The Note also states that
 
SR 3.8.1.16 is applicable to LCO 3.8.1.c AC sources. This
 
Note clarifies that not all of the SRs are applicable to all
 
the components described in the LCO.
 
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-24 Revision 26 SR 3.8.1.1 and SR 3.8.1.2 These SRs assure proper circuit continuity for the offsite AC electrical power supply to the onsite distribution
 
network and availability of offsite AC electrical power. 
 
The breaker alignment verifies that each breaker is in its
 
correct position to ensure that distribution buses and loads are connected to their preferred power source, and that appropriate independence of offsite circuits is maintained. 
 
The Frequency of once within one hour after substitution for
 
a 500 kV circuit and every eight hours thereafter, for
 
SR 3.8.1.1 was established to ensure that the breaker
 
alignment for the SMECO circuit (which does not have Control
 
Room indication) is in its correct position although breaker
 
position is unlikely to change. The seven day Frequency for
 
SR 3.8.1.2 is adequate since the 500 kV circuit breaker
 
position is not likely to change without the operator being
 
aware of it and because its status is displayed in the
 
Control Room.
 
Surveillance Requirement 3.8.1.1 is modified by a Note which states that this SR is only required when SMECO is being
 
credited for an offsite source. This SR will prevent
 
unnecessary testing on an uncredited circuit.
 
SR 3.8.1.3 and SR 3.8.1.9 These SRs help to ensure the availability of the standby
 
electrical power supply to mitigate DBAs and transients and
 
to maintain the unit in a safe shutdown condition.
 
To minimize the wear on moving parts that do not get
 
lubricated when the engine is not running, these SRs are
 
modified by a Note (Note 2 for SR 3.8.1.3) to indicate that
 
all DG starts for these surveillance tests may be preceded
 
by an engine prelube period and followed by a warmup period prior to loading by an engine prelube period.
For the purposes of SR 3.8.1.9 testing, the DGs are required to start from standby conditions only for SR 3.8.1.9. 
 
Standby conditions for a DG mean the diesel engine coolant
 
and oil are being continuously circulated and temperature is
 
being maintained consistent with manufacturer
 
recommendations.
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-25 Revision 26 In order to reduce stress and mechanical wear on diesel
 
engines, the DG manufacturers recommend a modified start in
 
which the starting speed of DGs is limited, warmup is
 
limited to this lower speed, and the DGs are gradually
 
accelerated to synchronous speed prior to loading. This is the intent of Note 3, which is only applicable when such modified start procedures are recommended by the
 
manufacturer.
 
Surveillance Requirement 3.8.1.9 requires that, at a 184 day
 
Frequency, the DG starts from standby conditions and
 
achieves required voltage and frequency within 10 seconds. 
 
The minimum voltage and frequency stated in the SR are those
 
necessary to ensure the DG can accept DBA loading while
 
maintaining acceptable voltage and frequency levels. The
 
10 second start requirement supports the assumptions of the
 
design basis loss of coolant accident analysis in
 
Reference 2, Chapter 14.
 
Since SR 3.8.1.9 requires a 10 second start, it is more restrictive than SR 3.8.1.3, and it may be performed in lieu
 
of SR 3.8.1.3.
 
The 31 day Frequency for SR 3.8.1.3 is consistent with Reference 4 and Reference 3. The 184 day Frequency for
 
SR 3.8.1.9 is a reduction in cold testing consistent with
 
Reference 7. This Frequency provides adequate assurance of
 
DG OPERABILITY, while minimizing degradation resulting from
 
testing.
SR 3.8.1.4 This SR verifies that the DGs are capable of synchronizing
 
with the offsite electrical system and accepting loads greater than or equal to 4000 kW for No. 1A DG and greater than or equal to 90% of the continuous duty rating for the
 
remaining DGs. The 90% minimum load limit is consistent
 
with Reference 3 and is acceptable because testing of these
 
DGs at post-accident load values is performed by
 
SR 3.8.1.11. A minimum run time of 60 minutes is required
 
to stabilize engine temperatures, while minimizing the time
 
that the DG is connected to the offsite source.
 
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-26 Revision 26 Although no power factor requirements are established by this SR, the DG is normally operated at a power factor
 
between 0.8 lagging and 1.0. The 0.8 value is the design
 
rating of the machine, while 1.0 is an operational
 
limitation. The 31-day Frequency for this SR is consistent
 
with Reference 3.
 
This SR is modified by four Notes. Note 1 indicates that
 
the diesel engine runs for this surveillance test may
 
include gradual loading, as recommended by the manufacturer, so that mechanical stress and wear on the diesel engine are
 
minimized. Note 2 states that momentary transients because
 
of changing bus loads do not invalidate this test. Note 3
 
indicates that this surveillance test shall be conducted on
 
only one DG at a time in order to prevent routinely
 
paralleling multiple DGs and to minimize the potential for
 
effects from offsite circuit or grid perturbations. Note 4
 
stipulates a prerequisite requirement for performance of
 
this SR. A successful DG start must precede this test to
 
credit satisfactory performance.
 
SR 3.8.1.5 This SR provides verification that the level of fuel oil in
 
the day tank is at or above the level at which fuel oil is
 
automatically added. The level required by the SR is
 
expressed as an equivalent volume in gallons, and is
 
selected to ensure adequate fuel oil for a minimum of
 
one hour of DG operation at full load plus 10%.
 
The 31-day Frequency is adequate to assure that a sufficient supply of fuel oil is available, since low level alarms are
 
provided, and unit operators would be aware of any large
 
uses of fuel oil during this period.
SR 3.8.1.6 Microbiological fouling is a major cause of fuel oil degradation. There are numerous bacteria that can grow in
 
fuel oil and cause fouling, but all must have a water
 
environment in order to survive. Removal of water from the
 
fuel oil day tanks once every 31 days eliminates the
 
necessary environment for bacterial survival. This is the
 
most effective means of controlling microbiological fouling.
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-27 Revision 26 In addition, it eliminates the potential for water entrainment in the fuel oil during DG operation. Water may
 
come from any of several sources, including condensation, ground water, rain water, contaminated fuel oil, and from
 
breakdown of the fuel oil by bacteria. Frequent checking
 
for and removal of accumulated water minimizes fouling and provides data regarding the watertight integrity of the fuel oil system. The SR Frequencies are consistent with
 
Reference 8. This SR is for preventive maintenance. The
 
presence of water does not necessarily represent failure of
 
this SR provided the accumulated water is removed during the
 
performance of this surveillance test.
 
SR 3.8.1.7  This SR demonstrates that one fuel oil transfer pump
 
operates and transfers fuel oil from its associated storage
 
tank to its associated day tank. This is required to
 
support continuous operation of standby power sources. This
 
SR provides assurance that the fuel oil transfer pump is
 
OPERABLE, the fuel oil piping system is intact, the fuel
 
delivery piping is not obstructed, and the controls and
 
control systems for automatic fuel transfer systems are
 
OPERABLE.
 
The Frequency for this SR is 31 days. The 31-day Frequency corresponds to the design of the fuel transfer system. The
 
design of fuel transfer systems is such that pumps will
 
operate automatically or must be started manually in order
 
to maintain an adequate volume of fuel oil in the day tanks
 
during or following DG testing. In such a case, a 31-day
 
Frequency is appropriate.
 
SR 3.8.1.8 Under accident and loss of offsite power conditions loads are sequentially connected to the bus by the automatic load sequencer (this SR verifies steps 1 through 5). The
 
sequencing logic controls the permissive and closing signals
 
to breakers to prevent overloading of the DGs due to high
 
motor starting currents. The 10% load sequence time
 
interval tolerance ensures that sufficient time exists for
 
the DG to restore frequency and voltage prior to applying
 
the next load, and that safety analysis assumptions AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-28 Revision 26 regarding ESF equipment time delays are not violated. The UFSAR provides a summary of the automatic loading of ESF
 
buses.
The Frequency of 31 days is consistent with DG monthly
 
testing and is sufficient to ensure the load sequencer operation as required.
SR 3.8.1.9  See SR 3.8.1.3.
 
SR 3.8.1.10  Transfer of each 4.16 kV ESF bus power supply from the
 
normal offsite circuit to the alternate offsite circuit
 
demonstrates the OPERABILITY of the alternate circuit
 
distribution network to power the shutdown loads. The
 
24 month Frequency of the Surveillance is based on
 
engineering judgment, taking into consideration the unit
 
conditions required to perform the Surveillance, and is
 
intended to be consistent with expected fuel cycle lengths. 
 
Operating experience has shown that these components usually
 
pass the SR when performed at the 24 month Frequency. 
 
Therefore, the Frequency was concluded to be acceptable from
 
a reliability standpoint.
 
SR 3.8.1.11 This SR provides verification that the DG can be operated at
 
a load greater than predicted accident loads for at least
 
60 minutes once per 24 months. Operation at the greater
 
than calculated accident loads will clearly demonstrate the
 
ability of the DGs to perform their safety function. In
 
order to ensure that the DG is tested under load conditions
 
that are as close to design conditions as possible, testing
 
must be performed using a DG load greater than or equal to calculated accident load and using a power factor  0.85. This power factor is chosen to be representative of the actual design basis inductive loading that the DG could
 
experience. In addition, the post-accident load for No. 1A
 
DG is significantly lower than the continuous rating of
 
No. 1A DG. To ensure No. 1A DG performance is not degraded, routine monitoring of engine parameters should be performed AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-29 Revision 26 during the performance of this SR for No. 1A DG (Reference 9).
 
This SR is modified by a Note which states that momentary
 
transients due to changing bus loads do not invalidate this
 
test. Similarly, momentary power factor transients above the limit will not invalidate the test. The 24 month Frequency is adequate to ensure DG OPERABILITY and it is
 
consistent with the refueling interval.
 
SR 3.8.1.12  Each DG is provided with an engine overspeed trip to prevent
 
damage to the engine. Recovery from the transient caused by
 
the loss of a large load could cause diesel engine
 
overspeed, which, if excessive, might result in a trip of
 
the engine. This SR demonstrates the DG load response
 
characteristics. This SR is accomplished by tripping the DG
 
output breaker with the DG carrying greater than or equal to
 
its associated single largest post-accident load while
 
paralleled to offsite power.
 
Consistent with References 10, 3, and 4, the load rejection test is acceptable if the increase in diesel speed does not
 
exceed 75% of the difference between synchronous speed and
 
the overspeed trip setpoint, or 15% above synchronous speed, whichever is lower.
 
The 24 month Frequency is consistent with the Reference 2, Chapter 8.
 
SR 3.8.1.13 This SR demonstrates that DG non-critical protective
 
functions are bypassed on a required actuation signal. This
 
SR is accomplished by verifying the bypass contact changes to the correct state which prevents actuation of the non-critical function. The non-critical protective functions
 
are consistent with References 3 and 4, and Institute of
 
Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)-387 and are
 
listed in Reference 2, Chapter 8. Verifying the non-
 
critical trips are bypassed will ensure DG operation during
 
a required actuation. The non-critical trips are bypassed
 
during DBAs and provide an alarm on an abnormal engine AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-30 Revision 26 condition. A failure of the electronic governor results in the diesel generator operating in hydraulic mode. This
 
alarm provides the operator with sufficient time to react
 
appropriately. The DG availability to mitigate the DBA is
 
more critical than protecting the engine against minor
 
problems that are not immediately detrimental to emergency operation of the DG.
The 24 month Frequency is based on engineering judgment, taking into consideration unit conditions required to
 
perform the surveillance test, and is intended to be
 
consistent with expected fuel cycle lengths. Operating
 
experience has shown that these components usually pass the
 
SR when performed at the 24 month Frequency. Therefore, the
 
Frequency was concluded to be acceptable from a reliability
 
standpoint. This Frequency is consistent with Reference 2, Chapter 8.
 
SR 3.8.1.14 This SR ensures that the manual synchronization and load
 
transfer from the DG to the offsite source can be made and
 
that the DG can be returned to ready-to-load status when
 
offsite power is restored. The DG is considered to be in
 
ready-to-load status when the DG is at rated speed and
 
voltage, the output breaker is open and can receive an auto-
 
close signal on bus undervoltage, and the load sequence
 
timers are reset.
 
The Frequency of 24 months takes into consideration unit conditions required to perform the surveillance test.
 
SR 3.8.1.15 In the event of a DBA coincident with a loss of offsite
 
power, the DGs are required to supply the necessary power to ESF systems so that the fuel, RCS, and containment design limits are not exceeded.
 
This SR demonstrates the DG operation during a loss of offsite power actuation test signal in conjunction with an
 
ESF (i.e., safety injection) actuation signal. In lieu of
 
actual demonstration of connection and loading of loads, testing that adequately shows the capability of the DG AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-31 Revision 26 system to perform these functions is acceptable. This testing may include any series of sequential, overlapping, or total steps so that the entire connection and loading
 
sequence is verified.
 
It is not necessary to energize loads which are dependent on temperature to load (i.e., heat tracing, switchgear HVAC compressor, computer room HVAC compressor). Also, it is
 
acceptable to transfer the instrument AC bus to the non
 
tested train to maintain safe operation of the plant during
 
testing. Loads (both permanent and auto connect) < 15 kW do
 
not require loading onto the diesel since these are
 
insignificant loads for the DG.
 
Permanently- and auto-connected loads to the emergency diesel generators are defined as follows:
 
Permanently-Connected Load - Equipment that is not shed by an undervoltage or safety injection actuation signal and is
 
normally operating, i.e., loads that are manually started, selected, or process signal controlled are not considered
 
permanently-connected loads.
 
Auto-Connected Loads - Emergency equipment required for mitigating the events described in UFSAR Chapter 14 that are
 
energized by loss-of-coolant incident sequencer actions
 
after step zero and within the first minute of emergency
 
diesel generator operation after the initiation of an
 
undervoltage signal.
 
The Frequency of 24 months takes into consideration unit conditions required to perform the surveillance test and is
 
intended to be consistent with an expected fuel cycle length
 
of 24 months.
 
This SR is modified by a Note. The reason for the Note is to minimize mechanical wear and stress on the DGs during
 
testing. For the purpose of this testing, the DGs must be
 
started from standby conditions, that is, with the engine
 
coolant and oil continuously circulated and temperature
 
maintained consistent with manufacturer recommendations for
 
DGs.
AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-32 Revision 26 SR 3.8.1.16  This SR lists the SRs that are applicable to the LCO 3.8.1.c (SRs 3.8.1.1, 3.8.1.2, 3.8.1.3, 3.8.1.5, 3.8.1.6, and
 
3.8.1.7). Performance of any SR for the LCO 3.8.1.c will
 
satisfy both Unit 1 and Unit 2 requirements for those SRs. 
 
Surveillance Requirements 3.8.1.4, 3.8.1.8, 3.8.1.9, 3.8.1.10, 3.8.1.11, 3.8.1.12, 3.8.1.13, 3.8.1.14, and 3.8.1.15, are not required to be performed for the
 
LCO 3.8.1.c. Surveillance Requirement 3.8.1.10 is not
 
required because this SR verifies manual transfer of AC
 
power sources from the normal offsite circuit to the
 
alternate offsite circuit, but only one qualified offsite
 
circuit is necessary for the LCO 3.8.1.c. Surveillance
 
Requirements 3.8.1.4, 3.8.1.11, and 3.1.8.12 are not
 
required because they are tests that deal with loads. 
 
Surveillance Requirement 3.8.1.8 verifies the interval
 
between sequenced loads. Surveillance Requirement 3.8.1.14
 
verifies the proper sequencing with offsite power. 
 
Surveillance Requirement 3.8.1.9 verifies that the DG starts
 
within 10 seconds. These SRs are not required because they
 
do not support the function of the LCO 3.8.1.c to provide
 
power to the CREVS and CRETS. Surveillance Requirements
 
3.8.1.13 and 3.8.1.15 are not required to be performed
 
because these SRs verify the emergency loads are actuated on
 
an ESFAS signal for the Unit in which the test is being
 
performed. The LCO 3.8.1.c DG will not start on an ESFAS signal for this Unit.
REFERENCES 1. 10 CFR Part 50, Appendix A, "General Design Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants"  2. UFSAR  3. Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 3, "Selection, Design, Qualification, and Testing of Emergency Diesel Generator Units Used as Class 1E Onsite Electric Power
 
Systems at Nuclear Power Plants," July 1993  4. Safety Guide 9, Revision 0, March 1971  5. NRC Safety Evaluation for Amendment Nos. 19 and 5 for Calvert Cliffs Nuclear Power Plant Unit Nos. 1 and 2, dated January 14, 1977  6. Regulatory Guide 1.93, Revision 0, "Availability of Electric Power Sources," December 1974 AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-33 Revision 26
: 7. Generic Letter 84-15, Proposed Staff Actions to Improve and Maintain Diesel Generator Reliability, July 2, 1984
: 7. Generic Letter 84-15, Proposed Staff Actions to Improve and Maintain Diesel Generator Reliability, July 2, 1984
: 8. Regulatory Guide 1.137, Revision 1, "Fuel-Oil Systems for Standby Diesel Generators," October 1979
: 8. Regulatory Guide 1.137, Revision 1, "Fuel-Oil Systems for Standby Diesel Generators," October 1979
: 9. Letter from Mr. D. G. McDonald, Jr. (NRC) to Mr. C. H. Cruse (BGE), dated April 2, 1996, Issuance of Amendments for Calvert Cliffs Nuclear Power Plant, Unit 1 (TAC No. M94030) and Unit 2 (TAC No. M94031)
: 9. Letter from Mr. D. G. McDonald, Jr. (NRC) to Mr. C. H. Cruse (BGE), dated April 2, 1996, Issuance of Amendments for Calvert Cliffs Nuclear Power Plant, Unit 1 (TAC No. M94030) and Unit 2 (TAC No. M94031)
: 10. IEEE Standard 308-1991, "IEEE Standard Criteria for Class 1E Power Systems for Nuclear Power Generating  
: 10. IEEE Standard 308-1991, "IEEE Standard Criteria for Class 1E Power Systems for Nuclear Power Generating Stations"
 
: 11. NO-1-117, Integrated Risk Management CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2     B 3.8.1-33                        Revision 26
Stations" 11. NO-1-117, Integrated Risk Management  
 
AC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.2 B 3.8  ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.2  AC Sources-Shutdown


BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.2-1 Revision 2 BACKGROUND A description of the AC sources is provided in the Bases for LCO 3.8.1. APPLICABLE The OPERABILITY of the minimum AC sources during MODE s 5 SAFETY ANALYSES and 6 and during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies ensures that:
AC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.2 B 3.8  ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.2   AC Sources-Shutdown BASES BACKGROUND         A description of the AC sources is provided in the Bases for LCO 3.8.1.
APPLICABLE         The OPERABILITY of the minimum AC sources during MODEs 5 SAFETY ANALYSES   and 6 and during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies ensures that:
: a. The unit can be maintained in the shutdown or refueling condition for extended periods;
: a. The unit can be maintained in the shutdown or refueling condition for extended periods;
: b. Sufficient instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit  
: b. Sufficient instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit status; and
: c. Adequate AC electrical power is provided to mitigate events postulated during shutdown, such as a fuel handling accident.
In general, when the unit is shut down, the Technical Specifications requirements ensure that the unit has the capability to mitigate the consequences of postulated accidents. However, assuming a single failure and concurrent loss of all offsite or all onsite power is not required. The rationale for this is based on the fact that many DBAs that are analyzed in MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 have no specific analyses in MODEs 5 and 6. Worst case bounding events are deemed not credible in MODEs 5 and 6 because the energy contained within the reactor pressure boundary, reactor coolant temperature and pressure, and the corresponding stresses result in the probabilities of occurrence being significantly reduced or eliminated, and in minimal consequences. These deviations from DBA analysis assumptions and design requirements during shutdown conditions are allowed by the LCO for required systems.
During MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4, various deviations from the analysis assumptions and design requirements are allowed within the Required Actions. This allowance is in recognition that certain testing and maintenance activities must be conducted provided an acceptable level of risk is not exceeded. During MODEs 5 and 6, performance of a significant number of required testing and maintenance CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2        B 3.8.2-1                        Revision 2


status; and c. Adequate AC electrical power is provided to mitigate events postulated during shutdown, such as a fuel
AC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.2 BASES activities is also required. In MODEs 5 and 6, the activities are generally planned and administratively controlled. Relaxations from MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 LCO requirements are acceptable during shutdown MODEs based on:
 
: a. The fact that time in an outage is limited. This is a risk prudent goal as well as a utility economic consideration.
handling accident.  
: b. Requiring appropriate compensatory measures for certain conditions. These may include administrative controls, reliance on systems that do not necessarily meet typical design requirements applied to systems credited in operating MODE analyses, or both.
 
: c. Prudent utility consideration of the risk associated with multiple activities that could affect multiple systems.
In general, when the unit is shut down, the Technical Specifications requirements ensure that the unit has the  
: d. Maintaining, to the extent practical, the ability to perform required functions (even if not meeting MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 OPERABILITY requirements) with systems assumed to function during an event.
 
In the event of an accident during shutdown, this LCO ensures the capability to support systems necessary to avoid immediate difficulty, assuming either a loss of all offsite power or a loss of all onsite DG power.
capability to mitigate the consequences of postulated
The AC sources satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), Criterion 3.
 
LCO              One offsite circuit capable of supplying the onsite Class 1E power distribution subsystem(s) of LCO 3.8.10, ensures that all required loads are powered from offsite power. An OPERABLE DG, associated with a distribution system train required to be OPERABLE by LCO 3.8.10, ensures a diverse power source is available to provide electrical power support, assuming a loss of the offsite circuit. Together, OPERABILITY of the required offsite circuit and DG ensures the availability of sufficient AC sources to operate the unit in a safe manner and to mitigate the consequences of postulated events during shutdown (e.g., fuel handling accidents).
accidents. However, assuming a single failure and
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2       B 3.8.2-2                        Revision 2
 
concurrent loss of all offsite or all onsite power is not
 
required. The rationale for this is based on the fact that
 
many DBAs that are analyzed in MODE s 1, 2, 3, and 4 have no specific analyses in MODE s 5 and 6. Worst case bounding events are deemed not credible in MODE s 5 and 6 because the energy contained within the reactor pressure boundary, reactor coolant temperature and pressure, and the  
 
corresponding stresses result in the probabilities of  
 
occurrence being significantly reduced or eliminated, and in minimal consequences. These deviations from DBA analysis assumptions and design requirements during shutdown  
 
conditions are allowed by the LCO for required systems.  
 
During MODE s 1, 2, 3, and 4, various deviations from the analysis assumptions and design requirements are allowed
 
within the Required Actions. This allowance is in
 
recognition that certain testing and maintenance activities


must be conducted provided an acceptable level of risk is  
AC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.2 BASES The qualified offsite circuit must be capable of maintaining rated frequency and voltage, and accepting required loads during an accident, while connected to the ESF bus(es).
Qualified offsite circuits are those that are described in the UFSAR and are part of the licensing basis for the unit.
The DG must be capable of starting, accelerating to rated speed and voltage, connecting to its respective ESF bus, and accepting required loads. The DG must continue to operate until offsite power can be restored to the ESF buses. These capabilities are required to be met from a variety of initial conditions such as DG in standby with the engine hot and DG in standby at ambient conditions.
It is acceptable for trains to be cross-tied during shutdown conditions, allowing a single offsite power circuit to supply all required trains.
The CREVS and CRETS are shared systems with one train of each system connected to an onsite Class 1E AC electrical power distribution subsystem from each unit. Limiting Condition for Operation 3.8.2.c requires one qualified circuit between the offsite transmission network and the other unit's onsite Class 1E AC electrical power distribution subsystems needed to supply power to the CREVS and CRETS to be OPERABLE. Limiting Condition for Operation 3.8.2.d requires one DG from the other unit capable of supplying power to the required CREVS and CRETS to be OPERABLE, if the DG required by LCO 3.8.2.b is not capable of supplying power to the required CREVS and CRETS.
These requirements, in conjunction with the requirements for the unit AC electrical power sources in LCO 3.8.2.a and LCO 3.8.2.b, ensure that offsite power is available to both trains and onsite power is available to one train of the CREVS and CRETS, when they are required to be OPERABLE by their respective LCOs (LCOs 3.7.8 and 3.7.9).
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.2-3                      Revision 10


not exceeded. During MODE s 5 and 6, performance of a significant number of required testing and maintenance AC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.2 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.2-2 Revision 2 activities is also required. In MODE s 5 and 6, the activities are generally planned and administratively controlled. Relaxations from MODE s 1, 2, 3, and 4 LCO requirements are acceptable during shutdown MODE s based on:
AC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.2 BASES APPLICABILITY     The AC sources required to be OPERABLE in MODEs 5 and 6 and during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies provide assurance that:
: a. The fact that time in an outage is limited. This is a risk prudent goal as well as a utility economic consideration. b. Requiring appropriate compensatory measures for certain conditions. These may include administrative controls, reliance on systems that do not necessarily meet
 
typical design requirements applied to systems credited
 
in operating MODE analyses, or both. c. Prudent utility consideration of the risk associated with multiple activities that could affect multiple
 
systems. d. Maintaining, to the extent practical, the ability to perform required functions (even if not meeting
 
MODE s 1, 2, 3, and 4 OPERABILITY requirements) with systems assumed to function during an event.
 
In the event of an accident during shutdown, this LCO
 
ensures the capability to support systems necessary to avoid
 
immediate difficulty, assuming either a loss of all offsite
 
power or a loss of all onsite DG power. The AC sources satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), Criterion 3.
LCO One offsite circuit capable of supplying the onsite Class 1E
 
power distribution subsystem(s) of LCO 3.8.10 , ensures that all required loads are powered from offsite power. An OPERABLE DG, associated with a distribution system train required to be OPERABLE by LCO 3.8.10, ensures a diverse
 
power source is available to provide electrical power
 
support, assuming a loss of the offsite circuit. Together, OPERABILITY of the required offsite circuit and DG ensures
 
the availability of sufficient AC sources to operate the
 
unit in a safe manner and to mitigate the consequences of
 
postulated events during shutdown (e.g., fuel handling
 
accidents).
 
AC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.2 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.2-3 Revision 10 The qualified offsite circuit must be capable of maintaining rated frequency and voltage, and accepting required loads
 
during an accident, while connected to the ESF bus(es). 
 
Qualified offsite circuits are those that are described in
 
the UFSAR and are part of the licensing basis for the unit.
The DG must be capable of starting, accelerating to rated speed and voltage, connecting to its respective ESF bus, and
 
accepting required loads. The DG must continue to operate
 
until offsite power can be restored to the ESF buses.
These capabilities are required to be met from a variety of
 
initial conditions such as DG in standby with the engine hot
 
and DG in standby at ambient conditions.
 
It is acceptable for trains to be cross-tied during shutdown
 
conditions, allowing a single offsite power circuit to
 
supply all required trains.
 
The CREVS and CRETS are shared systems with one train of each system connected to an onsite Class 1E AC electrical
 
power distribution subsystem from each unit. Limiting
 
Condition for Operation 3.8.2.c requires one qualified
 
circuit between the offsite transmission network and the
 
other unit's onsite Class 1E AC electrical power
 
distribution subsystems needed to supply power to the CREVS
 
and CRETS to be OPERABLE. Limiting Condition for
 
Operation 3.8.2.d requires one DG from the other unit
 
capable of supplying power to the required CREVS and CRETS
 
to be OPERABLE, if the DG required by LCO 3.8.2.b is not
 
capable of supplying power to the required CREVS and CRETS. 
 
These requirements, in conjunction with the requirements for
 
the unit AC electrical power sources in LCO 3.8.2.a and
 
LCO 3.8.2.b, ensure that offsite power is available to both
 
trains and onsite power is available to one train of the CREVS and CRETS, when they are required to be OPERABLE by
 
their respective LCOs (LCOs 3.7.8 and 3.7.9).
 
AC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.2 BASES CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.2-4 Revision 5 APPLICABILITY The AC sources required to be OPERABLE in MODEs 5 and 6 and during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies provide assurance that:
: a. Systems to provide adequate coolant inventory makeup are available for the irradiated fuel assemblies;
: a. Systems to provide adequate coolant inventory makeup are available for the irradiated fuel assemblies;
: b. Systems needed to mitigate a fuel handling accident are available;
: b. Systems needed to mitigate a fuel handling accident are available;
: c. Systems necessary to mitigate the effects of events that can lead to core damage during shutdown are  
: c. Systems necessary to mitigate the effects of events that can lead to core damage during shutdown are available; and
 
: d. Instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit in a cold shutdown condition or refueling condition.
available; and
The AC power requirements for MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 are covered in LCO 3.8.1.
: d. Instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit in a cold shutdown  
ACTIONS           Limiting Condition for Operation 3.0.3 is not applicable while in MODEs 5 or 6. However, since irradiated fuel assembly movement can occur in MODEs 1, 2, 3, or 4, the ACTIONS have been modified by a Note stating that LCO 3.0.3 is not applicable. If moving irradiated fuel assemblies while in MODEs 5 or 6, LCO 3.0.3 would not specify any action. If moving irradiated fuel assemblies while in MODEs 1, 2, 3, or 4, the fuel movement is independent of reactor operations. Therefore, in either case, inability to suspend movement of irradiated fuel assemblies would not be sufficient reason to require a reactor shutdown.
 
The ACTIONS have been modified by a second Note stating that performance of Required Actions shall not preclude completion of actions to establish a safe conservative position. This clarification is provided to avoid stopping movement of irradiated fuel assemblies while in a non-conservative position based on compliance with the Required Actions.
condition or refueling condition.  
A.1 An offsite circuit would be considered inoperable, if it was unavailable to one required ESF train. Although two trains may be required by LCO 3.8.10, the remaining train with CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.2-4                        Revision 5
 
The AC power requirements for MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 are covered in LCO 3.8.1.  
 
ACTIONS Limiting Condition for Operation 3.0.3 is not applicable while in MODEs 5 or 6. However, since irradiated fuel  
 
assembly movement can occur in MODEs 1, 2, 3, or 4, the  
 
ACTIONS have been modified by a Note stating that LCO 3.0.3  
 
is not applicable. If moving irradiated fuel assemblies  
 
while in MODEs 5 or 6, LCO 3.0.3 would not specify any  
 
action. If moving irradiated fuel assemblies while in  
 
MODEs 1, 2, 3, or 4, the fuel movement is independent of  
 
reactor operations. Therefore, in either case, inability to  
 
suspend movement of irradiated fuel assemblies would not be  
 
sufficient reason to require a reactor shutdown.  
 
The ACTIONS have been modified by a second Note stating that performance of Required Actions shall not preclude  


completion of actions to establish a safe conservative
AC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.2 BASES offsite power available may be capable of supporting sufficient required features to allow continuation of fuel movement. By the allowance of the option to declare required features inoperable, with no offsite power available, appropriate restrictions will be implemented in accordance with the affected required features LCO's ACTIONS.
 
A.2.1, A.2.2, A.2.3, B.1, B.2, and B.3 With the offsite circuit not available to all required trains, the option would still exist to declare all required features inoperable. Since this option may involve undesired administrative efforts, the allowance for sufficiently conservative actions is made. With the required DG inoperable, the minimum required diversity of AC power sources is not available. It is, therefore, required to suspend movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, and operations involving positive reactivity additions that could result in loss of the required SHUTDOWN MARGIN (SDM)
position. This clarification is provided to avoid stopping
(MODE 5) or boron concentration (MODE 6). Suspending positive reactivity additions that could result in failure to meet the minimum SDM or boron concentration limit is required to assure continued safe operation. Introduction of coolant inventory must be from sources that have a boron concentration greater than that required in the RCS for the minimum SDM or refueling boron concentration. This may result in an overall reduction in RCS boron concentration, but provides an acceptable margin to maintaining subcritical operation. Introduction of temperature changes including temperature increases when operating with a positive moderator temperature coefficient (MTC) must also be evaluated to ensure they do not result in a loss of the required SDM.
 
movement of irradiated fuel assemblies while in a non-
 
conservative position based on compliance with the Required
 
Actions.
A.1  An offsite circuit would be considered inoperable, if it was
 
unavailable to one required ESF train. Although two trains
 
may be required by LCO 3.8.10, the remaining train with AC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.2 BASES CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.2-5 Revision 29 offsite power available may be capable of supporting sufficient required features to allow continuation of fuel movement. By the allowance of the option to declare  
 
required features inoperable, with no offsite power  
 
available, appropriate restrictions will be implemented in  
 
accordance with the affected required features LCO's ACTIONS. A.2.1, A.2.2, A.2.3, B.1, B.2, and B.3 With the offsite circuit not available to all required  
 
trains, the option would still exist to declare all required  
 
features inoperable. Since this option may involve  
 
undesired administrative efforts, the allowance for  
 
sufficiently conservative actions is made. With the  
 
required DG inoperable, the minimum required diversity of AC  
 
power sources is not available. It is, therefore, required  
 
to suspend movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, and operations involving positive reactivity additions that  
 
could result in loss of the required SHUTDOWN MARGIN (SDM)
(MODE 5) or boron concentration (MODE 6). Suspending  
 
positive reactivity additions that could result in failure  
 
to meet the minimum SDM or boron concentration limit is  
 
required to assure continued safe operation. Introduction  
 
of coolant inventory must be from sources that have a boron  
 
concentration greater than that required in the RCS for the  
 
minimum SDM or refueling boron concentration. This may  
 
result in an overall reduction in RCS boron concentration, but provides an acceptable margin to maintaining subcritical  
 
operation. Introduction of temperature changes including  
 
temperature increases when operating with a positive  
 
moderator temperature coefficient (MTC) must also be  
 
evaluated to ensure they do not result in a loss of the  
 
required SDM.
Suspension of these activities does not preclude completion of actions to establish a safe conservative condition.
Suspension of these activities does not preclude completion of actions to establish a safe conservative condition.
These actions minimize the probability or the occurrence of  
These actions minimize the probability or the occurrence of postulated events. It is further required, to immediately initiate action to restore the required AC sources and to continue this action until restoration is accomplished in order to provide the necessary AC power to the unit safety systems.
 
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2       B 3.8.2-5                      Revision 29
postulated events. It is further required, to immediately  
 
initiate action to restore the required AC sources and to  
 
continue this action until restoration is accomplished in  
 
order to provide the necessary AC power to the unit safety  
 
systems.
AC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.2 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.2-6 Revision 19 The Completion Time of immediately is consistent with the required times for actions requiring prompt attention. The
 
restoration of the required AC electrical power sources
 
should be completed as quickly as possible in order to
 
minimize the time during which the unit safety systems may
 
be without sufficient power.
 
Pursuant to LCO 3.0.6, the Electrical Distribution System's
 
ACTIONS are not entered even if all AC sources to it are
 
inoperable, resulting in de-energization. Therefore, the
 
Required Actions of Condition A are modified by a Note to
 
indicate that when Condition A is entered with no AC power
 
to any required ESF bus, the ACTIONS for LCO 3.8.10 must be
 
immediately entered. This Note allows Condition A to
 
provide requirements for the loss of the offsite circuit, whether or not a train is de-energized. Limiting Condition


for Operation 3.8.10 provides the appropriate restrictions for the situation involving a de-energized train.
AC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.2 BASES The Completion Time of immediately is consistent with the required times for actions requiring prompt attention. The restoration of the required AC electrical power sources should be completed as quickly as possible in order to minimize the time during which the unit safety systems may be without sufficient power.
SURVEILLANCE SR 3.8.2.1 and SR 3.8.2.2 REQUIREMENTS  
Pursuant to LCO 3.0.6, the Electrical Distribution System's ACTIONS are not entered even if all AC sources to it are inoperable, resulting in de-energization. Therefore, the Required Actions of Condition A are modified by a Note to indicate that when Condition A is entered with no AC power to any required ESF bus, the ACTIONS for LCO 3.8.10 must be immediately entered. This Note allows Condition A to provide requirements for the loss of the offsite circuit, whether or not a train is de-energized. Limiting Condition for Operation 3.8.10 provides the appropriate restrictions for the situation involving a de-energized train.
SURVEILLANCE     SR 3.8.2.1 and SR 3.8.2.2 REQUIREMENTS Surveillance Requirements 3.8.2.1 and 3.8.2.2 require the performance of SRs from LCO 3.8.1 that are necessary for ensuring the OPERABILITY of the AC sources in other than MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4. Surveillance Requirement 3.8.1.10 is not required to be met, since only one offsite circuit is required to be OPERABLE. Surveillance Requirements 3.8.1.4, 3.8.1.8, 3.8.1.13, and 3.8.1.15 are related to automatic starting of the DGs for an operating unit, which is not applicable for a shutdown unit. Surveillance Requirement 3.8.1.16 is related to LCO 3.8.2.c and 3.8.2.d AC sources, and is addressed by SR 3.8.2.2.
Surveillance Requirement 3.8.2.1 is modified by a Note. The Note lists SRs not required to be performed in order to preclude de-energizing a required 4.16 kV ESF bus or disconnecting a required offsite circuit during performance of SRs. With limited AC Sources available, a single event could compromise both the required circuit and the DG. It is the intent that these SRs must still be capable of being met, but actual performance is not required during periods when the DG and offsite circuit are required to be OPERABLE.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.2-6                        Revision 19


Surveillance Requirements 3.8.2.1 and 3.8.2.2 require the
AC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.2 BASES Refer to the corresponding Bases for LCO 3.8.1 for a discussion of each SR.
REFERENCES        None CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.2-7                      Revision 19


performance of SRs from LCO 3.8.1 that are necessary for
Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 B 3.8  ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.3  Diesel Fuel Oil BASES BACKGROUND        The fuel oil storage tanks (FOSTs) contain sufficient capability for the DGs to operate one unit on accident loads and one unit on shutdown loads for seven days. This is discussed in Reference 1, Chapter 8. This onsite fuel oil capacity is sufficient to operate the DGs for longer than the time to replenish the onsite supply from outside sources.
Fuel oil is transferred from the storage tanks to the day tank by transfer pumps associated with each DG.
For proper operation of the standby DGs, it is necessary to ensure the proper quality of the fuel oil. Testing to check for water and sediment content, the kinematic viscosity, specific gravity (or API gravity), and impurity level (i.e., total particulates) ensures this quality.
The DG fuel oil system design at Calvert Cliffs supports four emergency DGs and other non-safety DGs. Three of the four emergency DGs, i.e., Nos. 1B, 2A, and 2B, are fueled from two FOSTs, i.e., FOST Nos. 11 and 21, and DG No. 1A is fueled from FOST No. 1A. Fuel Oil Storage Tank Nos. 1A and 21 are enclosed such as to be considered "tornado protected" but FOST No. 11 is not protected. As such, FOST No. 11 is not used as the primary source for the emergency DGs, but rather is used as a backup to support FOST No. 21, if it or the fuel oil it contains becomes degraded.
The operability of FOST Nos. 21 and 11 ensure that at least seven days of fuel oil will be reserved below the internal tank standpipes for operation of one DG on each unit, assuming one unit under accident conditions with a DG load of 3500 kW, and the opposite unit under normal shutdown conditions with a DG load of 3000 kW. Additionally, the operability of FOST No. 21 ensures that in the event of a loss of offsite power, concurrent with a loss of the non-bunkered FOST (tornado/missile event), at least seven days of fuel oil will be available for operation of one DG on each unit, assuming both DGs are loaded to 3000 kW. The operability of the FOST No. 1A ensures that at least CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2        B 3.8.3-1                       Revision 2


ensuring the OPERABILITY of the AC sources in other than
Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 BASES seven days of fuel oil is available to support operation of DG No. 1A at 4000 kW.
The operability of the fuel oil day tanks ensures that at least one hour of DG operation is available without makeup to the day tanks, assuming DG No. 1A is loaded to 4000 kW and DG Nos. 1B, 2A, and 2B are loaded to 3500 kW.
APPLICABLE        The initial conditions of DBA and transient analyses in SAFETY ANALYSES  Reference 1, and Chapters 6 and 14, assume ESF systems are OPERABLE. The DGs are designed to provide sufficient capacity, capability, redundancy, and reliability to ensure the availability of necessary power to ESF systems so that fuel, RCS, and containment design limits are not exceeded.
These limits are discussed in more detail in the Bases for LCO Section 3.2, 3.4, and 3.6.
Since diesel fuel oil supports the operation of the standby AC power sources, they satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii),
Criterion 3.
LCO              Fuel Oil Storage Tank No. 1A is required to contain a minimum of 49,500 gallons of available diesel fuel oil which is a sufficient supply to operate DG No. 1A with accident loads for seven days. Fuel Oil Storage Tank No. 21 is required to contain a minimum of 85,000 gallons of available diesel fuel oil which is a sufficient supply to operate one unit with accident loads and one unit with shutdown loads for seven days. It is also required to meet specific standards for quality. This requirement, in conjunction with an ability to obtain replacement supplies within seven days, supports the availability of DGs required to shut down the reactor and to maintain it in a safe condition for an AOO or a postulated DBA with loss of offsite power.
Diesel generator day tank fuel requirements, as well as transfer capability from the FOST to the day tank, are addressed in LCO 3.8.1 and LCO 3.8.2.
APPLICABILITY    The AC sources (LCO 3.8.1 and LCO 3.8.2) are required to ensure the availability of the required power to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe shutdown condition after an AOO or a postulated DBA. Since stored diesel fuel oil supports LCO 3.8.1 and LCO 3.8.2, stored diesel fuel oil CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.3-2                        Revision 2


MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4. Surveillance Requirement 3.8.1.10 is
Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 BASES is required to be within limits when the associated DG is required to be OPERABLE.
For both Unit 1 and Unit 2, the FOST No. 1A associated DG is only DG No. 1A. For Unit 1, the FOST No. 21 associated DGs are DG Nos. 1B and 2B. For Unit 2, the FOST No. 21 associated DGs are DG Nos. 2A and 2B. Alignment does not affect the association of DG and FOST since the individual DG fuel oil day tank provides sufficient volume for the DG to perform its safety function while re-alignment is accomplished, if necessary.
ACTIONS          The ACTIONS Table is modified by a Note indicating that separate Condition entry is allowed for each DG. This is acceptable, since the Required Actions for each Condition provide appropriate compensatory actions for each inoperable DG subsystem. Complying with the Required Actions for one inoperable DG subsystem may allow for continued operation, and subsequent inoperable DG subsystem(s) are governed by separate Condition entry and application of associated Required Actions.
A.1, B.1, B.2, C.1, C.2, and C.3 In this Condition, the seven day fuel oil supply for a DG is not available. However, fuel oil volume reduction is limited to 6/7 of the required volume which will provide sufficient capacity to operate one DG on one unit on accident loads, and one DG on the other unit on shutdown loads for approximately six days. These circumstances may be caused by events such as full load operation required after an inadvertent start while at minimum required level; or feed and bleed operations, which may be necessitated by increasing particulate levels or any number of other oil quality degradations. This restriction allows sufficient time for obtaining the requisite replacement volume and performing the analyses required prior to addition of fuel oil to the tank. A period of 48 hours is considered sufficient to complete restoration of the required level prior to declaring the DG inoperable. This period is acceptable based on the remaining capacity (approximately six days), the fact that procedures will be initiated to CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.3-3                        Revision 2


not required to be met, since only one offsite circuit is  
Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 BASES obtain replenishment, and the low probability of an event during this brief period.
Condition A addresses only FOST No. 1A which is tornado protected and which contains sufficient fuel for seven days of required operation of DG No. 1A. It supports both Unit 1 and Unit 2 equipment since DG No. 1A provides power for equipment which is shared by both units, e.g., the CREVS.
Condition B addresses only FOST No. 21 which is tornado protected and which contains sufficient fuel for seven days of required operation of two DGs. Fuel Oil Storage Tank No. 21 supports both Unit 1 and Unit 2 equipment, but Condition B is written for Unit 1 only to reflect the Unit 1 requirements for DG Nos. 1B and 2B. For an accident, Unit 1 requires either DG No. 1A or both DG Nos. 1B and 2B (since DG No. 2B powers equipment which is redundant to some equipment powered by DG No. 1A, e.g., CREVS). Since DG No. 1A is supported by FOST No. 1A and the redundant required equipment is powered by DG Nos. 1B and 2B which are supported by FOST No. 21, at least one full train of required equipment is supported by a tornado protected FOST even with an inoperable FOST or DG. Therefore, low fuel oil volume in FOST No. 21 can be supplemented by the fuel oil volume of an OPERABLE FOST No. 11 to assure the necessary volume. Required Action B.1 requires the combined volume of FOST No. 21 and an OPERABLE FOST No. 11 to be verified to be greater than 6/7 of the required volume within one hour. The Completion Time of one hour is consistent with the time needed to verify through administrative means that the backup FOST is OPERABLE.
Required Action B.2 requires the combined volume of FOST No. 21 and an OPERABLE FOST No. 11 to be  85,000 gallons within 48 hours. In addition, if FOST No. 21 is not restored and FOST No. 11 continues to be relied upon, Required Action B.2 must be repeated every 31 days. This effectively replaces the SR 3.8.3.1 periodic surveillance of available DG fuel oil volume for the inoperable FOST No. 21.
Since FOST No. 11 is not required by the LCO, FOST No. 11 may be considered OPERABLE only when the stored fuel oil meets SR 3.8.3.2 and SR 3.8.3.3, and is capable of being delivered to the required DG, i.e., the necessary piping and valves are capable of performing their safety function.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.3-4                        Revision 2


required to be OPERABLE. Surveillance Requirements 3.8.1.4, 3.8.1.8, 3.8.1.13, and 3.8.1.15 are related to automatic
Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 BASES Specific alignment to a particular FOST is not required since the individual DG fuel oil day tank provides sufficient volume for the DG to perform its safety function while re-alignment is accomplished, if necessary. Further, if any fuel oil in FOST No. 11 above the 33,000 gallons reserved for emergency DG use is credited for DG use, appropriate administrative controls must be in place to assure its retention for this purpose.
Condition C also addresses only FOST No. 21 which is tornado protected and which contains sufficient fuel for seven days of required operation of two DGs. Fuel Oil Storage Tank No. 21 supports both Unit 1 and Unit 2 equipment, but Condition C is written for Unit 2 only to reflect the Unit 2 requirements for DG Nos. 2A and 2B. For an accident, Unit 2 requires either DG No. 2B or both DG Nos. 1A and 2A (since DG No. 1A powers equipment which is redundant to some equipment powered by DG No. 2B, e.g., CREVS). Unlike Unit 1, at least one full train of required equipment is not supported by a tornado protected FOST with an inoperable FOST or DG since most of the redundant required equipment is powered by DG Nos. 2A and 2B which are both supported by FOST No. 21. Therefore, low fuel oil volume in FOST No. 21 can only be supplemented by the fuel oil volume of an OPERABLE FOST No. 11 to assure the necessary volume when the probability for a tornado is sufficiently low. This is reflected in Note 2 for Required Action C.2 which addresses the inoperability of FOST No. 21 from April 1 to September 30. During the time of low tornado probability, the Unit 2 requirements for the inoperability of FOST No. 21 are very similar to the Unit 1 requirements for inoperability of FOST No. 21. It is acceptable for the combined volume of FOST No. 11 and FOST No. 21 to be considered in providing 6/7 of the required volume for the 48 hours allowed by Required Action C.3.
Required Action C.1 requires the combined volume of FOST No. 21 and an OPERABLE FOST No. 11 to be verified to be greater than 6/7 of the required volume within one hour.
Required Action C.3 then requires the volume of FOST No. 21 to be restored to within volume limits within 48 hours.
However, during tornado season, i.e., from April 1 to September 30, the fuel oil volume of FOST No. 11 is not allowed to be credited and the fuel oil seven day volume of CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.3-5                        Revision 2


starting of the DGs for an operating unit, which is not  
Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 BASES FOST No. 21 must be restored within two hours as indicated in Required Action C.2. Required Action C.2 is also modified by a Note such that it is only required during the operation of Unit 2 in MODEs 1, 2, 3, or 4 since the unit is already shutdown if it is in another MODE or condition. An OPERABLE FOST No. 11 is determined as described above in the discussion for Condition B.
D.1 This Condition is entered as a result of a failure to meet the acceptance criterion of SR 3.8.3.2. Normally, trending of particulate levels allows sufficient time to correct high particulate levels prior to reaching the limit of acceptability. Poor sample procedures (bottom sampling),
contaminated sampling equipment, and errors in laboratory analysis can produce failures that do not follow a trend.
Since the presence of particulates does not mean failure of the fuel oil to burn properly in the diesel engine, and particulate concentration is unlikely to change significantly between SR Frequency intervals, and proper engine performance has been recently demonstrated (within 31 days), it is prudent to allow a brief period prior to declaring the associated DG inoperable. The seven day Completion Time allows for further evaluation, resampling, and re-analysis of the DG fuel oil.
E.1 With the new fuel oil properties defined in the Bases for SR 3.8.3.2 not within the required limits, a period of 30 days is allowed for restoring the stored fuel oil properties to within the new fuel oil limits. This period provides sufficient time to test the stored fuel oil to determine that the new fuel oil, when mixed with previously stored fuel oil, remains acceptable, or restore the stored fuel oil properties to within the new fuel oil limits. This restoration may involve feed and bleed procedures, filtering, or combinations of these procedures. Even if a DG start and load was required during this time interval, and the fuel oil properties were outside limits, there is a high likelihood that the DG would still be capable of performing its intended function.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.3-6                        Revision 2


applicable for a shutdown unit. Surveillance Requirement 3.8.1.16 is related to LCO 3.8.2.c and 3.8.2.d AC sources, and is addressed by SR 3.8.2.2.
Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 BASES F.1 With a Required Action and associated Completion Time not met, or one or more DGs with diesel fuel oil not within limits for reasons other than addressed by Conditions A through E, the associated DG may be incapable of performing its intended function and must be immediately declared inoperable. "Associated DG(s)" are identified in the Applicability Bases.
SURVEILLANCE      SR 3.8.3.1 REQUIREMENTS This SR provides verification that there is an adequate inventory of fuel oil in the DG FOSTs to support one unit on accident loads and one unit on shutdown loads for seven days. The seven day period is sufficient time to place the unit in a safe shutdown condition and to bring in replenishment fuel from an offsite location.
The 31 day Frequency is adequate to ensure that a sufficient supply of fuel oil is available, since low level alarms are provided and unit operators would be aware of any large uses of fuel oil during this period.
SR 3.8.3.2 The tests listed below are a means of determining whether new fuel oil is of the appropriate grade (i.e., 2D and 2D low sulfur) and has not been contaminated with substances that would have an immediate, detrimental impact on diesel engine combustion. Note that further references to American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) 2D fuel oil include both 2D and 2D low sulfur. If results from these tests are within acceptable limits, the fuel oil may be added to the storage tanks without concern for contaminating the entire volume of fuel oil in the storage tanks. These tests are to be conducted prior to adding the new fuel to the storage tank(s), but in no case is the time between receipt of new fuel and conducting the tests to exceed 31 days. The tests, limits, and applicable ASTM Standards are as follows:
: a. Sample the new fuel oil in accordance with Reference 3, ASTM D4057-1995; CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.3-7                        Revision 2


Surveillance Requirement 3.8.2.1 is modified by a Note. The Note lists SRs not required to be performed in order to  
Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 BASES
: b. Verify in accordance with the tests specified in Reference 3, ASTM D975-1996, that the sample has an absolute specific gravity at 60/60&deg;F of  0.8155 and 0.8871, or an American Petroleum Institute gravity at 60&deg;F of  28&deg; and  42&deg;, a kinematic viscosity at 40&deg;C of  1.9 centistokes and  4.1 centistokes, and a flash point  125&deg;F; and
: c. Verify that the new fuel oil has  0.05% water and sediment (Reference 3, ASTM D975-1996).
Failure to meet any of the above limits is cause for rejecting the new fuel oil, but does not represent a failure to meet the LCO concern since the fuel oil is not added to the storage tanks.
Within 31 days following the initial new fuel oil sample, the fuel oil is analyzed to establish that the other properties specified in Reference 2, ASTM D975-1996, Table 1, are met for new fuel oil. The 31 day period is acceptable because the fuel oil properties of interest, even if they were not within stated limits, would not have an immediate effect on DG operation. This SR ensures the availability of high quality fuel oil for the DGs.
Fuel oil degradation during long-term storage shows up as an increase in particulate, due mostly to oxidation. The presence of particulate does not mean the fuel oil will not burn properly in a diesel engine. The particulate can cause fouling of filters and fuel oil injection equipment, however, that can cause engine failure.
Particulate concentrations should be determined by gravimetric analysis (based on ASTM D2276-1989) of total particulate concentration in the fuel oil and has a limit of 10 mg/l. It is acceptable to obtain a field sample for subsequent laboratory testing in lieu of field testing.
Because the total stored fuel oil volume for DG Nos. 1B, 2A, and 2B is contained in two interconnected tanks, each tank must be considered and tested separately. There is a separate FOST for DG No. 1A.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.3-8                        Revision 3


preclude de-energizing a required 4.16 kV ESF bus or
Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 BASES The Frequency of this test takes into consideration fuel oil degradation trends that indicate that particulate concentration is unlikely to change significantly between Frequency intervals.
 
SR 3.8.3.3 Microbiological fouling is a major cause of fuel oil degradation. There are numerous bacteria that can grow in fuel oil and cause fouling, but all must have a water environment in order to survive. Removal of water from the fuel storage tanks once every 92 days eliminates the necessary environment for bacterial survival. This is the most effective means of controlling microbiological fouling.
disconnecting a required offsite circuit during performance
In addition, it eliminates the potential for water entrainment in the fuel oil during DG operation. Water may come from any of several sources, including condensation, ground water, rain water, and contaminated fuel oil, and from breakdown of the fuel oil by bacteria. Frequent checking for and removal of accumulated water minimizes fouling and provides data regarding the watertight integrity of the fuel oil system. The SR Frequencies are established by Reference 3. This SR is for preventative maintenance.
 
The presence of water does not necessarily represent failure of this SR provided the accumulated water is removed during performance of the surveillance test.
of SRs. With limited AC Sources available, a single event
REFERENCES       1. UFSAR
 
could compromise both the required circuit and the DG. It
 
is the intent that these SRs must still be capable of being
 
met, but actual performance is not required during periods
 
when the DG and offsite circuit are required to be OPERABLE.
AC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.2 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.2-7 Revision 19 Refer to the corresponding Bases for LCO 3.8.1 for a discussion of each SR.
REFERENCES None
 
Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 B 3.8  ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.3  Diesel Fuel Oil
 
BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.3-1 Revision 2 BACKGROUND The fuel oil storage tanks (FOSTs) contain sufficient capability for the DGs to operate one unit on accident loads and one unit on shutdown loads for seven days. This is discussed in Reference 1 , Chapter 8. This onsite fuel oil capacity is sufficient to operate the DGs for longer than the time to replenish the onsite supply from outside
 
sources.
Fuel oil is transferred from the storage tanks to the day
 
tank by transfer pumps associated with each DG.
 
For proper operation of the standby DGs, it is necessary to ensure the proper quality of the fuel oil. Testing to check
 
for water and sediment content, the kinematic viscosity, specific gravity (or API gravity), and impurity level (i.e., total particulates) ensures this quality.
 
The DG fuel oil system design at Calvert Cliffs supports four emergency DGs and other non-safety DGs. Three of the
 
four emergency DGs, i.e., Nos. 1B, 2A, and 2B, are fueled
 
from two FOSTs , i.e., FOST Nos. 11 and 21, and DG No. 1A is fueled from FOST No. 1A. F uel O il S torage T ank Nos. 1A and 21 are enclosed such as to be considered "tornado protected" but FOST No. 11 is not protected. As such, FOST No. 11 is not used as the primary source for the emergency DGs, but
 
rather is used as a backup to support FOST No. 21 , if it or the fuel oil it contains becomes degraded.
 
The operability of FOST Nos. 21 and 11 ensure that at least
 
seven days of fuel oil will be reserved below the internal tank standpipes for operation of one DG on each unit, assuming one unit under accident conditions with a DG load of 3500 kW, and the opposite unit under normal shutdown conditions with a DG load of 3000 kW. Additionally, the
 
operability of FOST No. 21 ensures that in the event of a loss of offsite power, concurrent with a loss of the non-
 
bunkered FOST (tornado/missile event), at least seven days of fuel oil will be available for operation of one DG on
 
each unit, assuming both DGs are loaded to 3000 kW. The
 
operability of the FOST No. 1A ensures that at least Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.3-2 Revision 2 seven days of fuel oil is available to support operation of DG No. 1A at 4000 kW.
The operability of the fuel oil day tanks ensures that at
 
least one hour of DG operation is available without makeup to the day tanks, assuming DG No. 1A is loaded to 4000 kW and DG No s. 1B, 2A, and 2B are loaded to 3500 kW.
 
APPLICABLE The initial conditions of DBA and transient analyses in SAFETY ANALYSES Reference 1, and Chapter s 6 and 14 , assume ESF systems are OPERABLE. The DGs are designed to provide sufficient
 
capacity, capability, redundancy, and reliability to ensure
 
the availability of necessary power to ESF systems so that
 
fuel, RCS, and containment design limits are not exceeded.
These limits are discussed in more detail in the Bases for
 
LCO Section 3.2 , 3.4 , and 3.6.
Since diesel fuel oil supports the operation of the standby
 
AC power sources, they satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), Criterion 3.
LCO F uel O il S torage T ank No. 1A is required to contain a minimum of 49,500 gallons of available diesel fuel oil which
 
is a sufficient supply to operate DG No. 1A with accident loads for seven days. F uel O il S torage T ank No. 21 is required to contain a minimum of 85,000 gallons of available
 
diesel fuel oil which is a sufficient supply to operate one unit with accident loads and one unit with shutdown loads for seven days. It is also required to meet specific standards for quality. This requirement, in conjunction
 
with an ability to obtain replacement supplies within
 
seven days, supports the availability of DGs required to shut down the reactor and to maintain it in a safe condition
 
for an AOO or a postulated DBA with loss of offsite power.
Diesel generator day tank fuel requirements, as well as
 
transfer capability from the FOST to the day tank, are addressed in LCO 3.8.1 and LCO 3.8.2
. APPLICABILITY The AC sources (LCO 3.8.1 and LCO 3.8.2) are required to ensure the availability of the required power to shut down
 
the reactor and maintain it in a safe shutdown condition
 
after an AOO or a postulated DBA. Since stored diesel fuel
 
oil supports LCO 3.8.1 and LCO 3.8.2, stored diesel fuel oil Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.3-3 Revision 2 is required to be within limits when the associated DG is required to be OPERABLE.
 
For both Unit 1 and Unit 2, the FOST No. 1A associated DG is only DG No. 1A. For Unit 1, the FOST No. 21 associated DGs are DG Nos. 1B and 2B. For Unit 2, the FOST No. 21 associated DGs are DG Nos. 2A and 2B. Alignment does not affect the association of DG and FOST since the individual
 
DG fuel oil day tank provides sufficient volume for the DG
 
to perform its safety function while re-alignment is accomplished, if necessary.
ACTIONS The ACTIONS Table is modified by a Note indicating that separate Condition entry is allowed for each DG. This is
 
acceptable, since the Required Actions for each Condition
 
provide appropriate compensatory actions for each inoperable
 
DG subsystem. Complying with the Required Actions for one
 
inoperable DG subsystem may allow for continued operation, and subsequent inoperable DG subsystem(s) are governed by 
 
separate Condition entry and application of associated
 
Required Actions.
 
A.1, B.1, B.2, C.1, C.2, and C.3 In this Condition, the seven day fuel oil supply for a DG is not available. However, fuel oil volume reduction is
 
limited to 6/7 of the required volume which will provide
 
sufficient capacity to operate one DG on one unit on
 
accident loads
, and one DG on the other unit on shutdown loads for approximately six days. These circumstances may be caused by events such as full load operation required after an inadvertent start while at minimum required level; or feed and bleed operations, which may be necessitated by
 
increasing particulate levels or any number of other oil
 
quality degradations. This restriction allows sufficient
 
time for obtaining the requisite replacement volume and
 
performing the analyses required prior to addition of fuel
 
oil to the tank. A period of 48 hours is considered
 
sufficient to complete restoration of the required level
 
prior to declaring the DG inoperable. This period is
 
acceptable based on the remaining capacity (approximately
 
six days), the fact that procedures will be initiated to Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.3-4 Revision 2 obtain replenishment, and the low probability of an event during this brief period.
 
Condition A addresses only FOST No. 1A which is "tornado protected" and which contains sufficient fuel for seven days of required operation of DG No. 1A. It supports both Unit 1 and Unit 2 equipment since DG No. 1A provides power for equipment which is shared by both units, e.g., the CREVS.
Condition B addresses only FOST No. 21 which is "tornado protected" and which contains sufficient fuel for seven days of required operation of two DGs. F uel O il S torage T ank No. 21 supports both Unit 1 and Unit 2 equipment, but Condition B is written for Unit 1 only to reflect the Unit 1
 
requirements for DG Nos. 1B and 2B. For an accident, Unit 1 requires either DG No. 1A or both DG Nos. 1B and 2B (since DG No. 2B powers equipment which is redundant to some equipment powered by DG No. 1A, e.g., CREVS). Since DG No. 1A is supported by FOST No. 1A and the redundant required equipment is powered by DG Nos. 1B and 2B which are supported by FOST No. 21, at least one full train of required equipment is supported by a "tornado protected"
 
FOST even with an inoperable FOST or DG. Therefore, low
 
fuel oil volume in FOST No. 21 can be supplemented by the fuel oil volume of an OPERABLE FOST No. 11 to assure the necessary volume. Required Action B.1 requires the combined
 
volume of FOST No. 21 and an OPERABLE FOST No. 11 to be verified to be greater than 6/7 of the required volume
 
within one hour. The Completion Time of one hour is consistent with the time needed to verify through
 
administrative means that the backup FOST is OPERABLE. 
 
Required Action B.2 requires the combined volume of FOST No. 21 and an OPERABLE FOST No. 11 to be  85,000 gallons within 48 hours. In addition, if FOST No. 21 is not restored and FOST No. 11 continues to be relied upon, Required Action B.2 must be repeated every 31 days. This effectively replaces the SR 3.8.3.1 periodic surveillance of
 
available DG fuel oil volume for the inoperable FOST No. 21. Since FOST No. 11 is not required by the LCO, FOST No. 11 may be considered OPERABLE only when the stored fuel oil
 
meets SR 3.8.3.2 and SR 3.8.3.3, and is capable of being
 
delivered to the required DG, i.e., the necessary piping and
 
valves are capable of performing their safety function.
Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 BASES CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.3-5 Revision 2 Specific alignment to a particular FOST is not required since the individual DG fuel oil day tank provides
 
sufficient volume for the DG to perform its safety function
 
while re-alignment is accomplished, if necessary. Further, if any fuel oil in FOST No. 11 above the 33,000 gallons reserved for emergency DG use is credited for DG use, appropriate administrative controls must be in place to assure its retention for this purpose.
 
Condition C also addresses only FOST No. 21 which is "tornado protected" and which contains sufficient fuel for
 
seven days of required operation of two DGs. F uel O il S torage T ank No. 21 supports both Unit 1 and Unit 2 equipment, but Condition C is written for Unit 2 only to
 
reflect the Unit 2 requirements for DG Nos. 2A and 2B. For an accident, Unit 2 requires either DG No. 2B or both DG Nos. 1A and 2A (since DG No. 1A powers equipment which is redundant to some equipment powered by DG No. 2B, e.g., CREVS). Unlike Unit 1, at least one full train of
 
required equipment is not supported by a "tornado protected"
 
FOST with an inoperable FOST or DG since most of the
 
redundant required equipment is powered by DG Nos. 2A and 2B which are both supported by FOST No. 21. Therefore, low fuel oil volume in FOST No. 21 can only be supplemented by the fuel oil volume of an OPERABLE FOST No. 11 to assure the necessary volume when the probability for a tornado is
 
sufficiently low. This is reflected in Note 2 for Required
 
Action C.2 which addresses the inoperability of FOST No. 21 from April 1 to September 30. During the time of low
 
tornado probability, the Unit 2 requirements for the
 
inoperability of FOST No. 21 are very similar to the Unit 1 requirements for inoperability of FOST No. 21. It is acceptable for the combined volume of FOST No. 11 and FOST No. 21 to be considered in providing 6/7 of the required volume for the 48 hours allowed by Required Action C.3. 
 
Required Action C.1 requires the combined volume of FOST
 
No. 21 and an OPERABLE FOST No. 11 to be verified to be greater than 6/7 of the required volume within one hour. Required Action C.3 then requires the volume of FOST No. 21 to be restored to within volume limits within 48 hours. 
 
However, during tornado season, i.e., from April 1 to
 
September 30, the fuel oil volume of FOST No. 11 is not allowed to be credited and the fuel oil seven day volume of Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.3-6 Revision 2 FOST No. 21 must be restored within two hours as indicated in Required Action C.2. Required Action C.2 is also modified by a Note such that it is only required during the
 
operation of Unit 2 in MODE s 1, 2, 3, or 4 since the unit is already shutdown if it is in another MODE or condition. An
 
OPERABLE FOST No. 11 is determined as described above in the discussion for Condition B.
 
D.1  This Condition is entered as a result of a failure to meet
 
the acceptance criterion of SR 3.8.3.2. Normally, trending
 
of particulate levels allows sufficient time to correct high
 
particulate levels prior to reaching the limit of
 
acceptability. Poor sample procedures (bottom sampling),
contaminated sampling equipment, and errors in laboratory
 
analysis can produce failures that do not follow a trend. 
 
Since the presence of particulates does not mean failure of
 
the fuel oil to burn properly in the diesel engine, and
 
particulate concentration is unlikely to change
 
significantly between S R Frequency intervals, and proper engine performance has been recently demonstrated (within
 
31 days), it is prudent to allow a brief period prior to
 
declaring the associated DG inoperable. The seven day Completion Time allows for further evaluation, resampling, and re-analysis of the DG fuel oil.
 
E.1  With the new fuel oil properties defined in the Bases for
 
SR 3.8.3.2 not within the required limits, a period of
 
30 days is allowed for restoring the stored fuel oil
 
properties to within the new fuel oil limits. This period
 
provides sufficient time to test the stored fuel oil to
 
determine that the new fuel oil, when mixed with previously
 
stored fuel oil, remains acceptable, or restore the stored fuel oil properties to within the new fuel oil limits. This restoration may involve feed and bleed procedures, filtering, or combinations of these procedures. Even if a
 
DG start and load was required during this time interval
, and the fuel oil properties were outside limits, there is a
 
high likelihood that the DG would still be capable of
 
performing its intended function.
 
Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.3-7 Revision 2 F.1  With a Required Action and associated Completion Time not met, or one or more DGs with diesel fuel oil not within
 
limits for reasons other than addressed by Conditions A
 
through E, the associated DG may be incapable of performing
 
its intended function and must be immediately declared inoperable.  "Associated DG(s)" are identified in the
 
Applicability Bases.
SURVEILLANCE SR 3.8.3.1 REQUIREMENTS
 
This SR provides verification that there is an adequate
 
inventory of fuel oil in the DG FOSTs to support one unit on accident loads and one unit on shutdown loads for
 
seven days. The seven day period is sufficient time to place the unit in a safe shutdown condition and to bring in
 
replenishment fuel from an offsite location.
 
The 31 day Frequency is adequate to ensure that a sufficient
 
supply of fuel oil is available, since low level alarms are
 
provided and unit operators would be aware of any large uses
 
of fuel oil during this period.
 
SR 3.8.3.2 The tests listed below are a means of determining whether
 
new fuel oil is of the appropriate grade (i.e., 2D and 2D
 
low sulfur) and has not been contaminated with substances
 
that would have an immediate, detrimental impact on diesel
 
engine combustion. Note that further references to American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) 2D fuel oil include both 2D and 2D low sulfur. If results from these tests are
 
within acceptable limits, the fuel oil may be added to the
 
storage tanks without concern for contaminating the entire
 
volume of fuel oil in the storage tanks. These tests are to
 
be conducted prior to adding the new fuel to the storage
 
tank(s), but in no case is the time between receipt of new
 
fuel and conducting the tests to exceed 31 days. The tests, limits, and applicable ASTM Standards are as follows:
: a. Sample the new fuel oil in accordance with Reference 3, ASTM D4057-1995;
 
Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.3-8 Revision 3
: b. Verify in accordance with the tests specified in Reference 3, ASTM D975-1996, that the sample has an absolute specific gravity at 60/60&deg;F of  0.8155 and  0.8871, or an American Petroleum Institute gravity at 60&deg;F of  28&deg; and  42&deg;, a kinematic viscosity at 40&deg;C of  1.9 centistokes and  4.1 centistokes, and a flash point  125&deg;F; and  c. Verify that the new fuel oil has  0.05% water and sediment (Reference 3, ASTM D975-1996).
Failure to meet any of the above limits is cause for
 
rejecting the new fuel oil, but does not represent a failure
 
to meet the LCO concern since the fuel oil is not added to
 
the storage tanks.
 
Within 31 days following the initial new fuel oil sample, the fuel oil is analyzed to establish that the other
 
properties specified in Reference 2, ASTM D975-1996, Table 1, are met for new fuel oil. The 31 day period is
 
acceptable because the fuel oil properties of interest, even
 
if they were not within stated limits, would not have an
 
immediate effect on DG operation. This SR ensures the
 
availability of high quality fuel oil for the DGs.
 
Fuel oil degradation during long-term storage shows up as an increase in particulate, due mostly to oxidation. The
 
presence of particulate does not mean the fuel oil will not
 
burn properly in a diesel engine. The particulate can cause
 
fouling of filters and fuel oil injection equipment, however, that can cause engine failure.
 
Particulate concentrations should be determined by gravimetric analysis (based on ASTM D2276-1989) of total
 
particulate concentration in the fuel oil and has a limit of
 
10 mg/l. It is acceptable to obtain a field sample for subsequent laboratory testing in lieu of field testing.
Because the total stored fuel oil volume for DG Nos. 1B, 2A, and 2B is contained in two interconnected tanks, each tank
 
must be considered and tested separately. There is a
 
separate FOST for DG No. 1A.
 
Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.3-9 Revision 2 The Frequency of this test takes into consideration fuel oil degradation trends that indicate that particulate  
 
concentration is unlikely to change significantly between  
 
Frequency intervals.  
 
SR 3.8.3.3 Microbiological fouling is a major cause of fuel oil degradation. There are numerous bacteria that can grow in  
 
fuel oil and cause fouling, but all must have a water  
 
environment in order to survive. Removal of water from the  
 
fuel storage tanks once every 92 days eliminates the  
 
necessary environment for bacterial survival. This is the  
 
most effective means of controlling microbiological fouling.
 
In addition, it eliminates the potential for water  
 
entrainment in the fuel oil during DG operation. Water may  
 
come from any of several sources, including condensation, ground water, rain water, and contaminated fuel oil, and  
 
from breakdown of the fuel oil by bacteria. Frequent  
 
checking for and removal of accumulated water minimizes  
 
fouling and provides data regarding the watertight integrity  
 
of the fuel oil system. The S R Frequencies are established by Reference
: 3. This SR is for preventative maintenance.
The presence of water does not necessarily represent failure  
 
of this SR provided the accumulated water is removed during performance of the s urveillance test. REFERENCES 1. UFSAR
: 2. ASTM Standards
: 2. ASTM Standards
: 3. Regulatory Guide 1.137 , "Fuel-Oil Systems for Standby Diesel Generators," January 1978
: 3. Regulatory Guide 1.137, "Fuel-Oil Systems for Standby Diesel Generators," January 1978 CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2       B 3.8.3-9                        Revision 2
 
DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 B 3.8  ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.4  DC Sources-Operating
 
BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.4-1 Revision 2 BACKGROUND The station DC sources provide the AC emergency power system with control power. It also provides both motive and control power to selected safety related equipment and
 
preferred AC vital bus power (via inverters). As required by Reference 1 , Appendix 1C, Criterion 39 , the DC electrical power sources are designed to have sufficient independence, redundancy, and testability to perform their safety
 
functions, assuming a single failure. The DC sources also
 
conform to the recommendations of Reference s 2 and 3.
The 125 VDC electrical power sources consist of four independent and redundant safety related Class 1E DC
 
channels. Each channel consists of one 125 VDC battery, the
 
associated battery charger for each battery, and all the
 
associated control equipment and interconnecting cabling.
 
During normal operation, the 125 VDC load is powered from the battery chargers with the batteries floating on the
 
system. In cases where momentary loads are greater than the


charger capability, or a loss of normal power to the battery  
DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 B 3.8  ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.4  DC Sources-Operating BASES BACKGROUND        The station DC sources provide the AC emergency power system with control power. It also provides both motive and control power to selected safety related equipment and preferred AC vital bus power (via inverters). As required by Reference 1, Appendix 1C, Criterion 39, the DC electrical power sources are designed to have sufficient independence, redundancy, and testability to perform their safety functions, assuming a single failure. The DC sources also conform to the recommendations of References 2 and 3.
 
The 125 VDC electrical power sources consist of four independent and redundant safety related Class 1E DC channels. Each channel consists of one 125 VDC battery, the associated battery charger for each battery, and all the associated control equipment and interconnecting cabling.
charger, the DC load is automatically powered from the  
During normal operation, the 125 VDC load is powered from the battery chargers with the batteries floating on the system. In cases where momentary loads are greater than the charger capability, or a loss of normal power to the battery charger, the DC load is automatically powered from the station batteries.
 
The DC channels provide the control power for its associated Class 1E AC power load group, 4.16 kV switchgear, and 480 V load centers. The DC channels also provide a DC source to the inverters, which in turn power the AC vital buses.
station batteries.  
The DC sources are described in more detail in the Bases for LCO 3.8.9 and for LCO 3.8.10.
 
Each battery has adequate storage capacity to carry the required load continuously for at least 2 hours and to carry load duty cycle as discussed in Reference 1, Chapter 8.
The DC channels provide the control power for its associated Class 1E AC power load group, 4.16 kV switchgear, and 480 V  
Each 125 VDC battery is separately housed in a ventilated room apart from its charger and distribution centers. Each channel is separated physically and electrically from the other channel to ensure that a single failure in one channel does not cause a failure in a redundant channel. There is CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2       B 3.8.4-1                        Revision 2
 
load centers. The DC channels also provide a DC source to  
 
the inverters, which in turn power the AC vital buses.  
 
The DC sources are described in more detail in the Bases for LCO 3.8.9 and for LCO 3.8.10
.
Each battery has adequate storage capacity to carry the required load continuously for at least 2 hours and to carry  
 
load duty cycle as discussed in Reference 1, Chapter 8.
Each 125 VDC battery is separately housed in a ventilated room apart from its charger and distribution centers. Each  
 
channel is separated physically and electrically from the  
 
other channel to ensure that a single failure in one channel  
 
does not cause a failure in a redundant channel. There is DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.4-2 Revision 2 no sharing between redundant Class 1E channels, such as batteries, battery chargers, or distribution panels.
 
The batteries for DC channels are sized to produce required capacity at 80% of nameplate rating, corresponding to
 
warranted capacity at end of life cycles and the 100% design demand. Battery size is based on 125% of required capacity.
An average voltage of 2.13 V per cell, corresponds to a
 
total minimum voltage output of 125 V per battery (128 V for
 
the reserve battery) as discussed in Reference 1, Chapter 8. The criteria for sizing large lead storage batteries are
 
defined in Reference
: 4.
Each DC channel has ample power output capacity for the steady state operation of connected loads required during
 
normal operation, while at the same time maintaining its
 
battery bank fully charged. Each battery charger also has
 
sufficient capacity to restore the battery from the design
 
minimum charge to 95% of its fully charged state within
 
24 hours while supplying normal steady state loads discussed in Reference 1, Chapter 8. APPLICABLE The initial conditions of DBA and transient analyses in SAFETY ANALYSES Reference 1, Chapters 6 and 14 , assume that ESF systems are OPERABLE. The DC channels provide a normal and emergency DC
 
sources for the DGs, emergency auxiliaries, and control and
 
switching during all MODE s of operation.
 
The OPERABILITY of the DC sources is consistent with the initial assumptions of the accident analyses and is based upon meeting the design basis of the unit. This includes maintaining the DC sources OPERABLE during accident
 
conditions in the event of:  a. An assumed loss of all offsite AC power or all onsite AC power; and  b. A worst case single failure.


DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 BASES no sharing between redundant Class 1E channels, such as batteries, battery chargers, or distribution panels.
The batteries for DC channels are sized to produce required capacity at 80% of nameplate rating, corresponding to warranted capacity at end of life cycles and the 100% design demand. Battery size is based on 125% of required capacity.
An average voltage of 2.13 V per cell, corresponds to a total minimum voltage output of 125 V per battery (128 V for the reserve battery) as discussed in Reference 1, Chapter 8.
The criteria for sizing large lead storage batteries are defined in Reference 4.
Each DC channel has ample power output capacity for the steady state operation of connected loads required during normal operation, while at the same time maintaining its battery bank fully charged. Each battery charger also has sufficient capacity to restore the battery from the design minimum charge to 95% of its fully charged state within 24 hours while supplying normal steady state loads discussed in Reference 1, Chapter 8.
APPLICABLE        The initial conditions of DBA and transient  analyses in SAFETY ANALYSES  Reference 1, Chapters 6 and 14, assume that  ESF systems are OPERABLE. The DC channels provide a normal  and emergency DC sources for the DGs, emergency auxiliaries,  and control and switching during all MODEs of operation.
The OPERABILITY of the DC sources is consistent with the initial assumptions of the accident analyses and is based upon meeting the design basis of the unit. This includes maintaining the DC sources OPERABLE during accident conditions in the event of:
: a. An assumed loss of all offsite AC power or all onsite AC power; and
: b. A worst case single failure.
The DC sources satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), Criterion 3.
The DC sources satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), Criterion 3.
LCO The DC channels, each channel consisting of one battery, one battery charger, and the corresponding control equipment and  
LCO               The DC channels, each channel consisting of one battery, one battery charger, and the corresponding control equipment and interconnecting cabling supplying power to the associated CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2       B 3.8.4-2                         Revision 2
 
interconnecting cabling supplying power to the associated DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.4-3 Revision 45 bus, are required to be OPERABLE to ensure the availability of the required power to shut down the reactor and maintain
 
it in a safe condition after an AOO or a postulated DBA. 
 
Loss of any DC channel does not prevent the minimum safety
 
function from being performed (Reference 1, Chapter 8).
An OPERABLE DC channel requires the battery and one OPERABLE charger to be operating and connected to the associated DC
 
bus(es). APPLICABILITY The DC sources are required to be OPERABLE in MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 to ensure safe unit operation and to ensure that:  a. Acceptable fuel design limits and reactor coolant pressure boundary limits are not exceeded as a result
 
of AOOs or abnormal transients; and  b. Adequate core cooling is provided, and containment integrity and other vital functions are maintained in
 
the event of a postulated DBA.
 
The DC sources requirement for MODEs 5 and 6 are addressed in the Bases for LCO 3.8.5.
 
ACTIONS A.1 Required Action A.1 requires the inoperable battery to be
 
replaced by the reserve battery within four hours when one
 
DC channel is inoperable due to an inoperable battery and
 
the reserve battery is available. The reserve battery is a
 
qualified battery that can replace and perform the required
 
function of any inoperable battery. The four hour
 
Completion Time is acceptable based on the capability of the reserve battery and the time it takes to replace the inoperable battery with the reserve battery while minimizing
 
the time in this degraded condition.
 
B.1  Condition B represents one channel with a loss of ability to
 
completely respond to an event, and a potential loss of
 
ability to remain energized during normal operation. 
 
Therefore, it is imperative that the operator's attention
 
focus on stabilizing the unit, minimizing the potential for
 
complete loss of DC power to the affected channel. The DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.4-4 Revision 45 2 hour limit is consistent with the allowed time for an inoperable DC channel.
 
If one of the required DC channels is inoperable for reasons other than Condition A (e.g., inoperable battery, inoperable
 
battery charger(s), or inoperable battery charger and associated inoperable battery), the remaining DC channels have the capacity to support a safe shutdown and to mitigate
 
an accident condition. Since a subsequent worst case single
 
failure would, however, result in the further loss of the
 
125 VDC channels with attendant loss of ESF functions, continued power operation should not exceed 2 hours. The
 
2 hour Completion Time is based on Reference 5 and reflects
 
a reasonable time to assess unit status as a function of the
 
inoperable DC channel and, if the DC channel is not restored
 
to OPERABLE status, to prepare to effect an orderly and safe
 
unit shutdown.
 
C.1 and C.2 If the inoperable DC channel cannot be restored to OPERABLE


status within the required Completion Time, the unit must be
DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 BASES bus, are required to be OPERABLE to ensure the availability of the required power to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe condition after an AOO or a postulated DBA.
Loss of any DC channel does not prevent the minimum safety function from being performed (Reference 1, Chapter 8).
An OPERABLE DC channel requires the battery and one OPERABLE charger to be operating and connected to the associated DC bus(es).
APPLICABILITY    The DC sources are required to be OPERABLE in MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 to ensure safe unit operation and to ensure that:
: a. Acceptable fuel design limits and reactor coolant pressure boundary limits are not exceeded as a result of AOOs or abnormal transients; and
: b. Adequate core cooling is provided, and containment integrity and other vital functions are maintained in the event of a postulated DBA.
The DC sources requirement for MODEs 5 and 6 are addressed in the Bases for LCO 3.8.5.
ACTIONS          A.1 Required Action A.1 requires the inoperable battery to be replaced by the reserve battery within four hours when one DC channel is inoperable due to an inoperable battery and the reserve battery is available. The reserve battery is a qualified battery that can replace and perform the required function of any inoperable battery. The four hour Completion Time is acceptable based on the capability of the reserve battery and the time it takes to replace the inoperable battery with the reserve battery while minimizing the time in this degraded condition.
B.1 Condition B represents one channel with a loss of ability to completely respond to an event, and a potential loss of ability to remain energized during normal operation.
Therefore, it is imperative that the operator's attention focus on stabilizing the unit, minimizing the potential for complete loss of DC power to the affected channel. The CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.4-3                        Revision 45


brought to a MODE in which the LCO does not apply. To  
DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 BASES 2 hour limit is consistent with the allowed time for an inoperable DC channel.
 
If one of the required DC channels is inoperable for reasons other than Condition A (e.g., inoperable battery, inoperable battery charger(s), or inoperable battery charger and associated inoperable battery), the remaining DC channels have the capacity to support a safe shutdown and to mitigate an accident condition. Since a subsequent worst case single failure would, however, result in the further loss of the 125 VDC channels with attendant loss of ESF functions, continued power operation should not exceed 2 hours. The 2 hour Completion Time is based on Reference 5 and reflects a reasonable time to assess unit status as a function of the inoperable DC channel and, if the DC channel is not restored to OPERABLE status, to prepare to effect an orderly and safe unit shutdown.
achieve this status, the unit must be brought to at least  
C.1 and C.2 If the inoperable DC channel cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the required Completion Time, the unit must be brought to a MODE in which the LCO does not apply. To achieve this status, the unit must be brought to at least MODE 3 within 6 hours and to MODE 5 within 36 hours. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required unit conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems. The Completion Time to bring the unit to MODE 5 is consistent with the time required in Reference 5.
 
SURVEILLANCE     SR 3.8.4.1 REQUIREMENTS Verifying battery terminal voltage while on float charge helps to ensure the effectiveness of the charging system and the ability of the batteries to perform their intended function. Float charge is the condition in which the charger is supplying connected loads and the continuous charge required to overcome the internal losses of a battery and maintain the battery in a fully charged state. The voltage requirements are based on the nominal design voltage of the battery (2.13 V per cell average) and are consistent with Reference 6 and the initial state of charge conditions CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2       B 3.8.4-4                        Revision 45
MODE 3 within 6 hours and to MODE 5 within 36 hours. The  
 
allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating  
 
experience, to reach the required unit conditions from full  
 
power conditions in an orderly manner and without  
 
challenging unit systems. The Completion Time to bring the  
 
unit to MODE 5 is consistent with the time required in Reference 5.
SURVEILLANCE SR 3.8.4.1 REQUIREMENTS Verifying battery terminal voltage while on float charge helps to ensure the effectiveness of the charging system and  
 
the ability of the batteries to perform their intended  
 
function. Float charge is the condition in which the  
 
charger is supplying connected loads and the continuous  
 
charge required to overcome the internal losses of a battery  
 
and maintain the battery in a fully charged state. The  
 
voltage requirements are based on the nominal design voltage  
 
of the battery (2.13 V per cell average) and are consistent  
 
with Reference 6 and the initial state of charge conditions DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.4-5 Revision 45 assumed in the battery sizing calculations. The 7 day Frequency is conservative when compared with manufacturer
 
recommendations and Reference 6.
 
SR 3.8.4.2 Visual inspection to detect corrosion of the battery cells and connections, or measurement of the resistance of each cell to cell and terminal connection, provides an indication
 
of physical damage or abnormal deterioration that could
 
potentially degrade battery performance.


DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 BASES assumed in the battery sizing calculations. The 7 day Frequency is conservative when compared with manufacturer recommendations and Reference 6.
SR 3.8.4.2 Visual inspection to detect corrosion of the battery cells and connections, or measurement of the resistance of each cell to cell and terminal connection, provides an indication of physical damage or abnormal deterioration that could potentially degrade battery performance.
The limits established for this SR must be no more than 20%
The limits established for this SR must be no more than 20%
above the resistance as measured during installation or not  
above the resistance as measured during installation or not above the ceiling value established by the manufacturer.
 
The SR Frequency for these inspections, which can detect conditions that can cause power losses due to resistance heating, is 92 days. This Frequency is considered acceptable based on operating experience related to detecting corrosion trends.
above the ceiling value established by the manufacturer.  
SR 3.8.4.3 Visual inspection of the battery cells, cell plates, and battery racks provides an indication of physical damage or abnormal deterioration that could potentially degrade battery performance.
 
The presence of physical damage or deterioration does not necessarily represent a failure of this SR, provided an evaluation determines that the physical damage or deterioration does not affect the OPERABILITY of the battery (its ability to perform its design function).
The SR Frequency for these inspections, which can detect conditions that can cause power losses due to resistance  
 
heating, is 92 days. This Frequency is considered  
 
acceptable based on operating experience related to  
 
detecting corrosion trends.  
 
SR 3.8.4.3 Visual inspection of the battery cells, cell plates, and  
 
battery racks provides an indication of physical damage or  
 
abnormal deterioration that could potentially degrade  
 
battery performance.  
 
The presence of physical damage or deterioration does not necessarily represent a failure of this SR, provided an  
 
evaluation determines that the physical damage or  
 
deterioration does not affect the OPERABILITY of the  
 
battery (its ability to perform its design function).  
 
The 18 month Frequency is based on engineering judgment.
The 18 month Frequency is based on engineering judgment.
Operating experience has shown that these components usually  
Operating experience has shown that these components usually pass the SR when performed at the 18 month Frequency.
 
Therefore, the Frequency was concluded to be acceptable from a reliability standpoint.
pass the SR when performed at the 18 month Frequency.
SR 3.8.4.4 and SR 3.8.4.5 Visual inspection and resistance measurements of cell to cell and terminal connections provide an indication of CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2       B 3.8.4-5                        Revision 45
 
Therefore, the Frequency was concluded to be acceptable from  
 
a reliability standpoint.  
 
SR 3.8.4.4 and SR 3.8.4.5 Visual inspection and resistance measurements of cell to  
 
cell and terminal connections provide an indication of DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.4-6 Revision 45 physical damage or abnormal deterioration that could indicate degraded battery condition. The anti-corrosion
 
material is used to help ensure good electrical connections
 
and to reduce terminal deterioration. The visual inspection
 
for corrosion is not intended to require removal of and
 
inspection under each terminal connection. The removal of visible corrosion is a preventive maintenance SR. The presence of visible corrosion does not necessarily represent
 
a failure of this SR provided visible corrosion is removed
 
during performance of SR 3.8.4.4.
 
The connection resistance limits for SR 3.8.4.5 shall be no more than 20% above the resistance as measured during
 
installation, or not above the ceiling value established by
 
the manufacturer.
 
The 18 month Frequency for these SRs is based on engineering judgment. Operating experience has shown that these
 
components usually pass the SRs when performed at the
 
18 month Frequency. Therefore, the Frequency was concluded
 
to be acceptable from a reliability standpoint.
 
SR 3.8.4.6 This SR requires that each battery charger be capable of supplying 400 amps and 125 V for  30 minutes. These requirements are based on the output rating of the chargers (Reference 1, Chapter 8). According to Reference 7, the
 
battery charger supply is required to be based on the
 
largest combined demands of the various steady state loads
 
and the charging capacity to restore the battery from the
 
design minimum charge state to the fully charged state, irrespective of the status of the unit during these demand
 
occurrences. The minimum required amperes and duration


ensures that these requirements can be satisfied. The test  
DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 BASES physical damage or abnormal deterioration that could indicate degraded battery condition. The anti-corrosion material is used to help ensure good electrical connections and to reduce terminal deterioration. The visual inspection for corrosion is not intended to require removal of and inspection under each terminal connection. The removal of visible corrosion is a preventive maintenance SR. The presence of visible corrosion does not necessarily represent a failure of this SR provided visible corrosion is removed during performance of SR 3.8.4.4.
The connection resistance limits for SR 3.8.4.5 shall be no more than 20% above the resistance as measured during installation, or not above the ceiling value established by the manufacturer.
The 18 month Frequency for these SRs is based on engineering judgment. Operating experience has shown that these components usually pass the SRs when performed at the 18 month Frequency. Therefore, the Frequency was concluded to be acceptable from a reliability standpoint.
SR 3.8.4.6 This SR requires that each battery charger be capable of supplying 400 amps and 125 V for  30 minutes. These requirements are based on the output rating of the chargers (Reference 1, Chapter 8). According to Reference 7, the battery charger supply is required to be based on the largest combined demands of the various steady state loads and the charging capacity to restore the battery from the design minimum charge state to the fully charged state, irrespective of the status of the unit during these demand occurrences. The minimum required amperes and duration ensures that these requirements can be satisfied. The test is performed while supplying normal DC loads or an equivalent or greater dummy load.
The SR Frequency is acceptable, given the unit conditions required to perform the test and the other administrative controls existing to ensure adequate charger performance during these 24 month intervals. In addition, this Frequency is intended to be consistent with expected fuel cycle lengths.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.4-6                      Revision 45


is performed while supplying normal DC loads or an equivalent or greater dummy load.
DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 BASES SR 3.8.4.7 A battery service test is a special test of battery capability, as found and with the associated battery charger disconnected, to satisfy the design requirements (battery duty cycle) of the DC source. The test duration must be 2 hours and battery terminal voltage must be maintained 105 volts during the test. The discharge rate and test length should correspond to the design accident load (duty) cycle requirements as specified in Reference 1, Chapter 8.
The SR Frequency is acceptable, given the unit conditions required to perform the test and the other administrative
A dummy load simulating the emergency loads of the design duty cycle may be used in lieu of the actual emergency loads.
The SR Frequency of 24 months is consistent with expected fuel cycle lengths.
This SR is modified by a Note. The Note allows the performance of a modified performance discharge test in lieu of a service test. This substitution is acceptable because a modified performance discharge test represents a more severe test of battery capacity than SR 3.8.4.7.
SR 3.8.4.8 A battery performance discharge test is a test of constant current capacity of a battery after having been in service, to detect any change in the capacity determined by the acceptance test. The test is intended to determine overall battery degradation due to age and usage.
A battery modified performance discharge test is a simulated duty cycle consisting of just two rates; the one minute rate published for the battery or the largest current load of the duty cycle, followed by the test rate employed for the performance discharge test, both of which envelope the duty cycle of the service test. Since the ampere-hours removed by a rated one minute discharge represents a very small portion of the battery capacity, the test rate can be changed to that for the performance test without compromising the results of the performance discharge test.
The battery terminal voltage for the modified performance discharge test should remain above the minimum battery CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.4-7                      Revision 45


controls existing to ensure adequate charger performance  
DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 BASES terminal voltage specified in the battery performance discharge test for the duration of time equal to that of the performance discharge test.
A modified performance discharge test is a test of the battery capacity and its ability to provide a high rate, short duration load (usually the highest rate of the duty cycle). This will often confirm the battery's ability to meet the critical period of the load duty cycle, in addition to determining its percentage of rated capacity. Initial conditions for the modified performance discharge test should be identical to those specified for a service test.
Either the battery performance discharge test or the modified performance discharge test is acceptable for satisfying SR 3.8.4.8; however, only the modified performance discharge test may be used to satisfy SR 3.8.4.8 while satisfying the requirements of SR 3.8.4.7 at the same time.
The acceptance criteria for this SR are consistent with References 6 and 4. These references recommend that the battery be replaced if its capacity is below 80% of the manufacturer rating. A capacity of 80% shows that the battery rate of deterioration is increasing, even if there is ample capacity to meet the load requirements.
The SR Frequency for this test is normally 60 months. If the battery shows degradation, or if the battery has reached 85% of its expected life and capacity is < 100% of the manufacturer's rating, the SR Frequency is reduced to 12 months. However, if the battery shows no degradation but has reached 85% of its expected life, the SR Frequency is only reduced to 24 months for batteries that retain capacity 100% of the manufacturer's rating. Degradation is indicated, according to Reference 6, when the battery capacity drops by more than 10% relative to its capacity on the previous performance test or when it is  10% below the manufacturer's rating. These Frequencies are consistent with the recommendations in Reference 6.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.4-8                        Revision 45


during these 24 month intervals. In addition, this
DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 BASES REFERENCES       1. UFSAR
 
Frequency is intended to be consistent with expected fuel
 
cycle lengths.
DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 BASES CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.4-7 Revision 45 SR 3.8.4.7 A battery service test is a special test of battery
 
capability, as found and with the associated battery charger
 
disconnected, to satisfy the design requirements (battery
 
duty cycle) of the DC source. The test duration must be  2 hours and battery terminal voltage must be maintained  105 volts during the test. The discharge rate and test length should correspond to the design accident load (duty) cycle requirements as specified in Reference 1, Chapter 8. 
 
A dummy load simulating the emergency loads of the design
 
duty cycle may be used in lieu of the actual emergency
 
loads.
The SR Frequency of 24 months is consistent with expected fuel cycle lengths.
 
This SR is modified by a Note. The Note allows the performance of a modified performance discharge test in lieu
 
of a service test. This substitution is acceptable because
 
a modified performance discharge test represents a more
 
severe test of battery capacity than SR 3.8.4.7.
 
SR 3.8.4.8 A battery performance discharge test is a test of constant
 
current capacity of a battery after having been in service, to detect any change in the capacity determined by the
 
acceptance test. The test is intended to determine overall
 
battery degradation due to age and usage.
 
A battery modified performance discharge test is a simulated duty cycle consisting of just two rates; the one minute rate
 
published for the battery or the largest current load of the
 
duty cycle, followed by the test rate employed for the
 
performance discharge test, both of which envelope the duty cycle of the service test. Since the ampere-hours removed by a rated one minute discharge represents a very small
 
portion of the battery capacity, the test rate can be
 
changed to that for the performance test without
 
compromising the results of the performance discharge test. 
 
The battery terminal voltage for the modified performance
 
discharge test should remain above the minimum battery DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.4-8 Revision 45 terminal voltage specified in the battery performance discharge test for the duration of time equal to that of the
 
performance discharge test.
 
A modified performance discharge test is a test of the battery capacity and its ability to provide a high rate, short duration load (usually the highest rate of the duty cycle). This will often confirm the battery's ability to
 
meet the critical period of the load duty cycle, in addition
 
to determining its percentage of rated capacity. Initial
 
conditions for the modified performance discharge test
 
should be identical to those specified for a service test. 
 
Either the battery performance discharge test or the
 
modified performance discharge test is acceptable for
 
satisfying SR 3.8.4.8; however, only the modified
 
performance discharge test may be used to satisfy SR 3.8.4.8
 
while satisfying the requirements of SR 3.8.4.7 at the same
 
time.
The acceptance criteria for this SR are consistent with References 6 and 4. These references recommend that the
 
battery be replaced if its capacity is below 80% of the
 
manufacturer rating. A capacity of 80% shows that the
 
battery rate of deterioration is increasing, even if there
 
is ample capacity to meet the load requirements.
 
The SR Frequency for this test is normally 60 months. If the battery shows degradation, or if the battery has reached
 
85% of its expected life and capacity is < 100% of the
 
manufacturer's rating, the SR Frequency is reduced to
 
12 months. However, if the battery shows no degradation but
 
has reached 85% of its expected life, the SR Frequency is
 
only reduced to 24 months for batteries that retain capacity  100% of the manufacturer's rating. Degradation is indicated, according to Reference 6, when the battery capacity drops by more than 10% relative to its capacity on the previous performance test or when it is  10% below the manufacturer's rating. These Frequencies are consistent with the recommendations in Reference 6.
 
DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.4-9 Revision 45 REFERENCES 1. UFSAR
: 2. Safety Guide 6, Revision 0, "Assumptions Used for Evaluating the Potential Radiological Consequences of a Steam Line Break Accident for Boiling Water Reactors,"
: 2. Safety Guide 6, Revision 0, "Assumptions Used for Evaluating the Potential Radiological Consequences of a Steam Line Break Accident for Boiling Water Reactors,"
March 1971
March 1971
: 3. IEEE Standard 308-1978, "IEEE Standard Criteria for Class 1E Power Systems for Nuclear Power Generating  
: 3. IEEE Standard 308-1978, "IEEE Standard Criteria for Class 1E Power Systems for Nuclear Power Generating Stations"
 
: 4. IEEE Standard 485-1983, "Recommended Practice for Sizing Large Lead Storage Batteries for Generating Stations and Substations (ANSI)," June 1983
Stations" 4. IEEE Standard 485-1983, "Recommended Practice for Sizing Large Lead Storage Batteries for Generating  
: 5. Regulatory Guide 1.93, "Availability of Electric Power Sources," December 1974
 
: 6. IEEE Standard 450-1995, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Vented Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary Applications," May 1995
Stations and Substations (ANSI)," June 1983
: 7. Regulatory Guide 1.32, Revision 2, "Criteria for Safety-Related Electric Power Systems for Nuclear Power Plants," February 1977 CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2       B 3.8.4-9                      Revision 45
: 5. Regulatory Guide 1.93, "Availability of Electric Power Sources," December 1974 6. IEEE Standard 450-1995, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Vented Lead-
 
Acid Batteries for Stationary Applications," May 1995 7. Regulatory Guide 1.32, Revision 2, "Criteria for Safety-Related Electric Power Systems for Nuclear Power Plants," February 1977 DC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.5 B 3.8  ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.5  DC Sources-Shutdown
 
BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.5-1 Revision 2 BACKGROUND A description of the DC sources is provided in the Bases for LCO 3.8.4. APPLICABLE The initial conditions of DBA; and transient analyses in SAFETY ANALYSES Reference 1 , Chapters 6 and 14, assume that ESF systems are OPERABLE. The DC sources provide normal and emergency DC
 
for the DG s, emergency auxiliaries, and control and switching during all MODE s of operation.
 
The OPERABILITY of the DC subsystems is consistent with the
 
initial assumptions of the accident analyses and the
 
requirements for the supported systems' OPERABILITY.
 
The OPERABILITY of the minimum DC sources during MODE s 5 and 6 and during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies


ensures that:
DC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.5 B 3.8  ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.5  DC Sources-Shutdown BASES BACKGROUND        A description of the DC sources is provided in the Bases for LCO 3.8.4.
APPLICABLE        The initial conditions of DBA; and transient analyses in SAFETY ANALYSES    Reference 1, Chapters 6 and 14, assume that ESF systems are OPERABLE. The DC sources provide normal and emergency DC for the DGs, emergency auxiliaries, and control and switching during all MODEs of operation.
The OPERABILITY of the DC subsystems is consistent with the initial assumptions of the accident analyses and the requirements for the supported systems' OPERABILITY.
The OPERABILITY of the minimum DC sources during MODEs 5 and 6 and during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies ensures that:
: a. The unit can be maintained in the shutdown or refueling condition for extended periods;
: a. The unit can be maintained in the shutdown or refueling condition for extended periods;
: b. Sufficient instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit  
: b. Sufficient instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit status; and
 
: c. Adequate DC sources are provided to mitigate events postulated during shutdown, such as a fuel handling accident.
status; and   c. Adequate DC sources are provided to mitigate events postulated during shutdown, such as a fuel handling  
 
accident.
The DC sources satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), Criterion 3.
The DC sources satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), Criterion 3.
LCO The DC channels, each channel consisting of one battery, one  
LCO               The DC channels, each channel consisting of one battery, one battery charger, and the corresponding control equipment and interconnecting cabling within the channel, are required to be OPERABLE to support required trains of distribution systems required OPERABLE by LCO 3.8.10. This ensures the availability of sufficient DC sources to operate the unit in a safe manner and to mitigate the consequences of postulated events during shutdown (e.g., fuel handling accidents).
 
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2        B 3.8.5-1                        Revision 2
battery charger, and the corresponding control equipment and  
 
interconnecting cabling within the channel, are required to  


be OPERABLE to support required trains of distribution
DC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.5 BASES APPLICABILITY     The DC sources required to be OPERABLE in MODEs 5 and 6, and during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies provide assurance that:
 
systems required OPERABLE by LCO 3.8.10
. This ensures the availability of sufficient DC sources to operate the unit in
 
a safe manner and to mitigate the consequences of postulated events during shutdown (e.g., fuel handling accidents).
 
DC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.5 BASES CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.5-2 Revision 29 APPLICABILITY The DC sources required to be OPERABLE in MODEs 5 and 6, and during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies provide assurance that:
: a. Required features needed to mitigate a fuel handling accident are available;
: a. Required features needed to mitigate a fuel handling accident are available;
: b. Required features necessary to mitigate the effects of events that can lead to core damage during shutdown are  
: b. Required features necessary to mitigate the effects of events that can lead to core damage during shutdown are available; and
 
: c. Instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit in a cold shutdown condition or refueling condition.
available; and
: c. Instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit in a cold shutdown  
 
condition or refueling condition.  
 
The DC channel requirements for MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 are covered in LCO 3.8.4.
The DC channel requirements for MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 are covered in LCO 3.8.4.
ACTIONS Limiting Condition for Operation 3.0.3 is not applicable while in MODE 5 or 6. However, since irradiated fuel  
ACTIONS           Limiting Condition for Operation 3.0.3 is not applicable while in MODE 5 or 6. However, since irradiated fuel assembly movement can occur in MODE 1, 2, 3, or 4, the ACTIONS have been modified by a Note stating that LCO 3.0.3 is not applicable. If moving irradiated fuel assemblies while in MODE 5 or 6, LCO 3.0.3 would not specify any action. If moving irradiated fuel assemblies while in MODE 1, 2, 3, or 4, the fuel movement is independent of reactor operations. Therefore, in either case, the inability to suspend movement of irradiated fuel assemblies would not be sufficient reason to require a reactor shutdown.
 
The ACTIONS have been modified by a second Note stating that performance of REQUIRED ACTIONS shall not preclude completion of actions to establish a safe conservative position. This clarification is provided to avoid stopping movement of irradiated fuel assemblies while in a non-conservative position based on compliance with the REQUIRED ACTIONS.
assembly movement can occur in MODE 1, 2, 3, or 4, the  
A.1, A.2.1, A.2.2, and A.2.3 If two trains are required per LCO 3.8.10, the remaining train with DC power available may be capable of supporting sufficient systems to allow continuation of movement of irradiated fuel assemblies. By allowing the option to declare required features inoperable with the associated DC CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2       B 3.8.5-2                      Revision 29
 
ACTIONS have been modified by a Note stating that LCO 3.0.3  
 
is not applicable. If moving irradiated fuel assemblies  
 
while in MODE 5 or 6, LCO 3.0.3 would not specify any  
 
action. If moving irradiated fuel assemblies while in MODE  
 
1, 2, 3, or 4, the fuel movement is independent of reactor  
 
operations. Therefore, in either case, the inability to  
 
suspend movement of irradiated fuel assemblies would not be  
 
sufficient reason to require a reactor shutdown.  
 
The ACTIONS have been modified by a second Note stating that performance of REQUIRED ACTIONS shall not preclude  
 
completion of actions to establish a safe conservative position. This clarification is provided to avoid stopping movement of irradiated fuel assemblies while in a non-
 
conservative position based on compliance with the REQUIRED  
 
ACTIONS.
A.1, A.2.1, A.2.2, and A.2.3 If two trains are required per LCO 3.8.10, the remaining  
 
train with DC power available may be capable of supporting  
 
sufficient systems to allow continuation of movement of irradiated fuel assemblies. By allowing the option to declare required features inoperable with the associated DC DC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.5 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.5-3 Revision 29 power source(s) inoperable, appropriate restrictions will be implemented in accordance with the affected required
 
features LCO ACTIONS. In many instances, this option may
 
involve undesired administrative efforts. Therefore, the
 
allowance for sufficiently conservative actions is made (i.e., to suspend movement of irradiated fuel assemblies and operations involving positive reactivity additions). The
 
Required Action to suspend positive reactivity additions
 
does not preclude actions to maintain or increase reactor
 
vessel inventory, provided the required SDM is maintained.
 
Suspension of these activities shall not preclude completion
 
of actions to establish a safe conservative condition. 
 
These actions minimize probability of the occurrence of
 
postulated events. It is further required to immediately
 
initiate action to restore the required DC channels and to
 
continue this action until restoration is accomplished in
 
order to provide the necessary DC source to the unit safety
 
systems.
The Completion Time of immediately is consistent with the required times for actions requiring prompt attention. The
 
restoration of the required DC channels should be completed
 
as quickly as possible in order to minimize the time during
 
which the unit safety systems may be without sufficient power. SURVEILLANCE SR 3.8.5.1 REQUIREMENTS
 
Surveillance Requirement 3.8.5.1 states that surveillance tests required by SR 3.8.4.1 through SR 3.8.4.8 are applicable in these MODEs. See the corresponding Bases for
 
LCO 3.8.4 for a discussion of each SR.
 
This SR is modified by a Note. The reason for the Note is
 
to preclude requiring the OPERABLE DC sources from being
 
discharged below their capability to provide the required
 
power supply or otherwise rendered inoperable during the
 
performance of SRs. It is the intent that these SRs must
 
still be capable of being met, but actual performance is not required.
 
DC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.5 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.5-4 Revision 2 REFERENCES 1. UFSAR
 
Battery Cell Parameters B 3.8.6 B 3.8  ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.6  Battery Cell Parameters
 
BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.6-1 Revision 2 BACKGROUND This LCO delineates the limits on electrolyte temperature, level, individual cell float voltage (ICV), and specific gravity for the DC power source batteries. A discussion of
 
these batteries and their OPERABILITY requirements is provided in the Bases for LCO 3.8.4 and LCO 3.8.5
. APPLICABLE The initial conditions of DBA and transient analyses in SAFETY ANALYSES Reference 1 , Chapters 6 and 14 , assume ESF systems are OPERABLE. The DC sources provide normal and emergency DC
 
electrical power for the DG s, emergency auxiliaries, and control and switching during all MODE s of operation.
 
The OPERABILITY of the DC channels is consistent with the
 
initial assumptions of the accident analyses and is based


upon meeting the design basis of the unit, as discussed in  
DC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.5 BASES power source(s) inoperable, appropriate restrictions will be implemented in accordance with the affected required features LCO ACTIONS. In many instances, this option may involve undesired administrative efforts. Therefore, the allowance for sufficiently conservative actions is made (i.e., to suspend movement of irradiated fuel assemblies and operations involving positive reactivity additions). The Required Action to suspend positive reactivity additions does not preclude actions to maintain or increase reactor vessel inventory, provided the required SDM is maintained.
Suspension of these activities shall not preclude completion of actions to establish a safe conservative condition.
These actions minimize probability of the occurrence of postulated events. It is further required to immediately initiate action to restore the required DC channels and to continue this action until restoration is accomplished in order to provide the necessary DC source to the unit safety systems.
The Completion Time of immediately is consistent with the required times for actions requiring prompt attention. The restoration of the required DC channels should be completed as quickly as possible in order to minimize the time during which the unit safety systems may be without sufficient power.
SURVEILLANCE      SR 3.8.5.1 REQUIREMENTS Surveillance Requirement 3.8.5.1 states that surveillance tests required by SR 3.8.4.1 through SR 3.8.4.8 are applicable in these MODEs. See the corresponding Bases for LCO 3.8.4 for a discussion of each SR.
This SR is modified by a Note. The reason for the Note is to preclude requiring the OPERABLE DC sources from being discharged below their capability to provide the required power supply or otherwise rendered inoperable during the performance of SRs. It is the intent that these SRs must still be capable of being met, but actual performance is not required.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.5-3                      Revision 29


the Bases for LCO 3.8.4 and LCO 3.8.5.
DC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.5 BASES REFERENCES        1. UFSAR CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.5-4          Revision 2


Battery Cell Parameters B 3.8.6 B 3.8  ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.6  Battery Cell Parameters BASES BACKGROUND        This LCO delineates the limits on electrolyte temperature, level, individual cell float voltage (ICV), and specific gravity for the DC power source batteries. A discussion of these batteries and their OPERABILITY requirements is provided in the Bases for LCO 3.8.4 and LCO 3.8.5.
APPLICABLE        The initial conditions of DBA and transient analyses in SAFETY ANALYSES    Reference 1, Chapters 6 and 14, assume ESF systems are OPERABLE. The DC sources provide normal and emergency DC electrical power for the DGs, emergency auxiliaries, and control and switching during all MODEs of operation.
The OPERABILITY of the DC channels is consistent with the initial assumptions of the accident analyses and is based upon meeting the design basis of the unit, as discussed in the Bases for LCO 3.8.4 and LCO 3.8.5.
Battery cell parameters satisfy Criterion 3 of the NRC Policy Statement.
Battery cell parameters satisfy Criterion 3 of the NRC Policy Statement.
LCO Battery cell parameters must remain within acceptable limits  
LCO               Battery cell parameters must remain within acceptable limits to ensure availability of the required DC power to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe condition after an AOO or a postulated DBA. Electrolyte limits are conservatively established, allowing continued DC electrical system function even with Category A or B limits not met.
 
APPLICABILITY     The battery parameters are required solely for the support of the associated DC electrical power subsystems.
to ensure availability of the required DC power to shut down  
Therefore, battery electrolyte is only required when the DC power source is required to be OPERABLE. Refer to the Applicability discussion in the Bases for LCO 3.8.4 and LCO 3.8.5.
 
ACTIONS           The Actions Table is modified by a Note which indicates that separate Condition entry is allowed for each battery. This is acceptable, since the Required Actions for each Condition provide appropriate compensatory actions for each inoperable DC channel. Complying with the Required Actions for one CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2       B 3.8.6-1                         Revision 2
the reactor and maintain it in a safe condition after an AOO or a postulated DBA. Electrolyte limits are conservatively  
 
established, allowing continued DC electrical system function even with Category A or B limits not met.
APPLICABILITY The battery parameters are required solely for the support of the associated DC electrical power subsystems.
 
Therefore, battery electrolyte is only required when the  
 
DC power source is required to be OPERABLE. Refer to the  
 
Applicability discussion in the Bases for LCO 3.8.4 and LCO 3.8.5.
ACTIONS The Actions Table is modified by a Note which indicates that separate Condition entry is allowed for each battery. This  
 
is acceptable, since the Required Actions for each Condition  
 
provide appropriate compensatory actions for each inoperable  
 
DC channel. Complying with the Required Actions for one Battery Cell Parameters B 3.8.6 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.6-2 Revision 2 inoperable DC channel may allow for continued operation, and subsequent inoperable DC subsystem(s) are governed by
 
separate Condition entry and application of associated
 
Required Actions.
 
A.1, A.2.1, A.2.2, and A.3
 
With parameters of one or more cells
, in one or more batteries , not within limits (i.e., Category A limits not met or Category B limits not met) but within Category C
 
limits specified in Table 3.8.6-1, the battery is degraded
 
but there is still sufficient capacity to perform the
 
intended function. Therefore, the affected battery is not
 
required to be considered inoperable solely as a result of
 
Category A or B limits not met, and continued operation is
 
permitted for a limited period.
 
The pilot cell electrolyte level and ICV are required to be verified to meet the Category C limits within one hour (Required Action A.1). This check will provide a quick
 
indication of the status of the remainder of the battery
 
cells. One hour provides time to inspect the electrolyte
 
level and to confirm the ICV of the pilot cells. One hour
 
is considered a reasonable amount of time to perform the
 
required verification.
 
Verification that the Category C limits are met (Required Action A.2) provides assurance that during the time needed
 
to restore the parameters to the Category A and B limits, the battery will still be capable of performing its intended
 
function. A period of 24 hours is allowed to complete the
 
initial verification because specific gravity measurements
 
must be obtained for each connected cell. Taking into
 
consideration both the time required to perform the required verification and the assurance that the battery cell parameters are not severely degraded, this time is
 
considered reasonable. The verification is repeated at
 
seven day intervals until the parameters are restored to Category A and B limits. This periodic verification is
 
consistent with the normal Frequency of pilot cell
 
Surveillances.
 
Battery Cell Parameters B 3.8.6 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.6-3 Revision 2 Continued operation prior to declaring the affected batteries inoperable is permitted for 31 days before battery
 
cell parameters must be restored to within Category A and B
 
limits. With the consideration that, while battery capacity
 
is degraded, sufficient capacity exists to perform the
 
intended function and to allow time to fully restore the battery cell parameters to normal limits, this time is acceptable prior to declaring the battery inoperable.
 
B.1 With one or more batteries with one or more battery cell
 
parameters outside the Category C limit for any connected
 
cell, sufficient capacity to supply the maximum expected
 
load requirement is not assured and the corresponding DC
 
channel must be declared inoperable. Additionally, other
 
potentially extreme conditions, such as any Required Action
 
of Condition A and associated Completion Time not met
, or average electrolyte temperature of representative cells  69 F, are also cause for immediately declaring the associated DC channel inoperable.
SURVEILLANCE SR 3.8.6.1 REQUIREMENTS
 
This SR verifies that Category A battery cell parameters are
 
consistent with Reference 2 , which recommends regular battery inspections (at least one per month) including
 
voltage, specific gravity, and electrolyte temperature of
 
pilot cells.
SR 3.8.6.2  The quarterly inspection of specific gravity and voltage is
 
consistent with Reference
: 2.
SR 3.8.6.3 This Surveillance verification that the average temperature of representative cells is  69 F is consistent with a recommendation of Reference 2 , which states that the temperature of electrolytes in representative cells should be determined on a quarterly basis. The temperature is also
 
high enough to supply the required capacity.
Battery Cell Parameters B 3.8.6 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.6-4 Revision 2 Lower than normal temperatures act to inhibit or reduce


battery capacity. This SR ensures that the operating
Battery Cell Parameters B 3.8.6 BASES inoperable DC channel may allow for continued operation, and subsequent inoperable DC subsystem(s) are governed by separate Condition entry and application of associated Required Actions.
A.1, A.2.1, A.2.2, and A.3 With parameters of one or more cells, in one or more batteries, not within limits (i.e., Category A limits not met or Category B limits not met) but within Category C limits specified in Table 3.8.6-1, the battery is degraded but there is still sufficient capacity to perform the intended function. Therefore, the affected battery is not required to be considered inoperable solely as a result of Category A or B limits not met, and continued operation is permitted for a limited period.
The pilot cell electrolyte level and ICV are required to be verified to meet the Category C limits within one hour (Required Action A.1). This check will provide a quick indication of the status of the remainder of the battery cells. One hour provides time to inspect the electrolyte level and to confirm the ICV of the pilot cells. One hour is considered a reasonable amount of time to perform the required verification.
Verification that the Category C limits are met (Required Action A.2) provides assurance that during the time needed to restore the parameters to the Category A and B limits, the battery will still be capable of performing its intended function. A period of 24 hours is allowed to complete the initial verification because specific gravity measurements must be obtained for each connected cell. Taking into consideration both the time required to perform the required verification and the assurance that the battery cell parameters are not severely degraded, this time is considered reasonable. The verification is repeated at seven day intervals until the parameters are restored to Category A and B limits. This periodic verification is consistent with the normal Frequency of pilot cell Surveillances.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.6-2                        Revision 2


temperatures remain within an acceptable operating range.
Battery Cell Parameters B 3.8.6 BASES Continued operation prior to declaring the affected batteries inoperable is permitted for 31 days before battery cell parameters must be restored to within Category A and B limits. With the consideration that, while battery capacity is degraded, sufficient capacity exists to perform the intended function and to allow time to fully restore the battery cell parameters to normal limits, this time is acceptable prior to declaring the battery inoperable.
B.1 With one or more batteries with one or more battery cell parameters outside the Category C limit for any connected cell, sufficient capacity to supply the maximum expected load requirement is not assured and the corresponding DC channel must be declared inoperable. Additionally, other potentially extreme conditions, such as any Required Action of Condition A and associated Completion Time not met, or average electrolyte temperature of representative cells
                  < 69&deg;F, are also cause for immediately declaring the associated DC channel inoperable.
SURVEILLANCE      SR 3.8.6.1 REQUIREMENTS This SR verifies that Category A battery cell parameters are consistent with Reference 2, which recommends regular battery inspections (at least one per month) including voltage, specific gravity, and electrolyte temperature of pilot cells.
SR 3.8.6.2 The quarterly inspection of specific gravity and voltage is consistent with Reference 2.
SR 3.8.6.3 This Surveillance verification that the average temperature of representative cells is > 69&deg;F is consistent with a recommendation of Reference 2, which states that the temperature of electrolytes in representative cells should be determined on a quarterly basis. The temperature is also high enough to supply the required capacity.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.6-3                        Revision 2


Battery Cell Parameters B 3.8.6 BASES Lower than normal temperatures act to inhibit or reduce battery capacity. This SR ensures that the operating temperatures remain within an acceptable operating range.
This limit is based on manufacturer recommendations.
This limit is based on manufacturer recommendations.
Table 3.8.6-1   This Table delineates the limits on electrolyte level, ICV, and specific gravity for three different categories. The  
Table 3.8.6-1 This Table delineates the limits on electrolyte level, ICV, and specific gravity for three different categories. The meaning of each category is discussed below.
 
Category A defines the normal parameter limit for each designated pilot cell in each battery. The cells selected as pilot cells are those whose temperature, voltage, and electrolyte specific gravity approximate the state of charge of the entire battery.
meaning of each category is discussed below.  
The Category A limits specified for electrolyte level are based on manufacturer recommendations and are consistent with the guidance in Reference 2, with the extra 1/4 inch allowance above the high water level indication for operating margin to account for temperatures and charge effects. In addition to this allowance, Footnote (a) to Table 3.8.6-1 permits the electrolyte level to be temporarily above the specified maximum level during and following equalizing charge (i.e., for up to seven days following the completion of an equalize charge), provided it is not overflowing. These limits ensure that the plates suffer no physical damage, and that adequate electron transfer capability is maintained in the event of transient conditions. Reference 2 recommends that electrolyte level readings should be made only after the battery has been at float charge for at least 72 hours.
 
The Category A limit specified for ICV is  2.13 V per cell. This value is based on a recommendation of Reference 2, which states that prolonged operation of cells
Category A defines the normal parameter limit for each  
                  < 2.13 V can reduce the life expectancy of cells.
 
The Category A limit specified for specific gravity for each pilot cell is  1.200 (0.015 below the manufacturer fully charged nominal specific gravity or a battery charging CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2       B 3.8.6-4                        Revision 2
designated pilot cell in each battery. The cells selected  
 
as pilot cells are those whose temperature, voltage
, and electrolyte specific gravity approximate the state of charge  
 
of the entire battery.  
 
The Category A limits specified for electrolyte level are  
 
based on manufacturer recommendations and are consistent  
 
with the guidance in Reference 2 , with the extra 1/4 inch allowance above the high water level indication for  
 
operating margin to account for temperatures and charge  
 
effects. In addition to this allowance, Footnote (a) to  
 
Table 3.8.6-1 permits the electrolyte level to be  
 
temporarily above the specified maximum level during and  
 
following equalizing charge (i.e., for up to seven days following the completion of an equalize charge), provided it  
 
is not overflowing. These limits ensure that the plates  
 
suffer no physical damage, and that adequate electron  
 
transfer capability is maintained in the event of transient  
 
conditions.
Reference 2 recommends that electrolyte level readings should be made only after the battery has been at  
 
float charge for at least 72 hours.
The Category A limit specified for ICV is  2.13 V per cell. This value is based on a recommendation of Reference 2 , which states that prolonged operation of cells 2.13 V can reduce the life expectancy of cells.
The Category A limit specified for specific gravity for each pilot cell is  1.200 (0.015 below the manufacturer fully charged nominal specific gravity or a battery charging Battery Cell Parameters B 3.8.6 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.6-5 Revision 2 current that had stabilized at a low value). This value is characteristic of a charged cell with adequate capacity. 
 
According to Reference 2 , the specific gravity readings are based on a temperature of 77 F (25 C) and full electrolyte
 
level. The specific gravity readings are corrected for actual electrolyte temperature and level. For each 3 F (1.67 C) above 77 F (25 C), 1 point (0.001) is added to the reading;
 
1 point is subtracted for each 3 F below 77 F. The specific gravity of the electrolyte in a cell increases with a loss
 
of water due to electrolysis or evaporation.
 
Category B defines the normal parameter limits for each
 
connected cell. The term "connected cell" excludes any
 
battery cell that may be jumpered out.
 
The Category B limits specified for electrolyte level and
 
ICV are the same as those specified for Category A and have
 
been discussed above. The Category B limit specified for specific gravity for each connected cell is  1.195 (0.020 below the manufacturer fully charged, nominal specific
 
gravity) with the average of all connected cells  1.205 (0.010 below the manufacturer fully charged, nominal specific gravity). These values are based on manufacturer's
 
recommendations. The minimum specific gravity value
 
required for each cell ensures a cell with a marginal or
 
unacceptable specific gravity is not masked by averaging
 
cells having higher specific gravities.
 
Category C defines the limit for each connected cell. These
 
values, although reduced, provide assurance that sufficient
 
capacity exists to perform the intended function and
 
maintain a margin of safety. When any battery parameter is
 
outside the Category C limit, the assurance of sufficient capability described above no longer exists and the battery must be declared inoperable.
 
The Category C limit specified for electrolyte level (above
 
the top of the plates and not overflowing) ensures that the
 
plates suffer no physical damage and maintain adequate
 
electron transfer capability. The Category C limit for ICV
 
is derived from Reference 2 recommendations , which states Battery Cell Parameters B 3.8.6 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.6-6 Revision 2 that a cell voltage of 2.07 V or below, under float conditions and not caused by elevated temperature of the
 
cell, indicates internal cell problems and may require cell
 
replacement.
The Category C limit of average specific gravity  1.195 is based on manufacturer recommendations (0.020 below the manufacturer recommended fully charged, nominal specific
 
gravity). In addition to that limit, it is required that
 
the specific gravity for each connected cell must be no less
 
than 0.020 below the average of all connected cells. This
 
limit ensures that a cell with a marginal or unacceptable
 
specific gravity is not masked by averaging with cells
 
having higher specific gravities.
 
The footnotes to Table 3.8.6-1 are applicable to Category A, B, and C specific gravity. Footnote (b) to Table 3.8.6-1
 
requires the above mentioned correction for electrolyte
 
level and temperature, with the exception that level
 
correction is not required when battery charging current is  1 amp on float charge. This current provides, in general, an indication of acceptable overall battery condition.
 
Because of specific gravity gradients that are produced during the recharging process, delays of several days may
 
occur while waiting for the specific gravity to stabilize. 
 
A stabilized charging current is an acceptable alternative
 
to specific gravity measurement for determining the state of
 
charge. This phenomenon is discussed in Reference
: 2. Footnote (c) to Table 3.8.6-1 allows the float charge
 
current to be used as an alternate to specific gravity for


up to seven days following a battery equalizing recharge.
Battery Cell Parameters B 3.8.6 BASES current that had stabilized at a low value). This value is characteristic of a charged cell with adequate capacity.
Within seven days, each connected cell's specific gravity must be measured to confirm the state of charge. Following a minor battery recharge (such as equalizing charge that does not follow a deep discharge) specific gravity gradients
According to Reference 2, the specific gravity readings are based on a temperature of 77&deg;F (25&deg;C) and full electrolyte level.
The specific gravity readings are corrected for actual electrolyte temperature and level. For each 3&deg;F (1.67&deg;C) above 77&deg;F (25&deg;C), 1 point (0.001) is added to the reading; 1 point is subtracted for each 3&deg;F below 77&deg;F. The specific gravity of the electrolyte in a cell increases with a loss of water due to electrolysis or evaporation.
Category B defines the normal parameter limits for each connected cell. The term "connected cell" excludes any battery cell that may be jumpered out.
The Category B limits specified for electrolyte level and ICV are the same as those specified for Category A and have been discussed above. The Category B limit specified for specific gravity for each connected cell is  1.195 (0.020 below the manufacturer fully charged, nominal specific gravity) with the average of all connected cells  1.205 (0.010 below the manufacturer fully charged, nominal specific gravity). These values are based on manufacturer's recommendations. The minimum specific gravity value required for each cell ensures a cell with a marginal or unacceptable specific gravity is not masked by averaging cells having higher specific gravities.
Category C defines the limit for each connected cell. These values, although reduced, provide assurance that sufficient capacity exists to perform the intended function and maintain a margin of safety. When any battery parameter is outside the Category C limit, the assurance of sufficient capability described above no longer exists and the battery must be declared inoperable.
The Category C limit specified for electrolyte level (above the top of the plates and not overflowing) ensures that the plates suffer no physical damage and maintain adequate electron transfer capability. The Category C limit for ICV is derived from Reference 2 recommendations, which states CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.6-5                        Revision 2


are not significant, and confirming measurements may be made in less than seven days.
Battery Cell Parameters B 3.8.6 BASES that a cell voltage of 2.07 V or below, under float conditions and not caused by elevated temperature of the cell, indicates internal cell problems and may require cell replacement.
Battery Cell Parameters B 3.8.6 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.6-7 Revision 2 REFERENCES 1. UFSAR
The Category C limit of average specific gravity  1.195 is based on manufacturer recommendations (0.020 below the manufacturer recommended fully charged, nominal specific gravity). In addition to that limit, it is required that the specific gravity for each connected cell must be no less than 0.020 below the average of all connected cells. This limit ensures that a cell with a marginal or unacceptable specific gravity is not masked by averaging with cells having higher specific gravities.
: 2. IEEE Standard
The footnotes to Table 3.8.6-1 are applicable to Category A, B, and C specific gravity. Footnote (b) to Table 3.8.6-1 requires the above mentioned correction for electrolyte level and temperature, with the exception that level correction is not required when battery charging current is
-450-1995 , "IEEE Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement Vented Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary Applications," May 1995
                  < 1 amp on float charge. This current provides, in general, an indication of acceptable overall battery condition.
Because of specific gravity gradients that are produced during the recharging process, delays of several days may occur while waiting for the specific gravity to stabilize.
A stabilized charging current is an acceptable alternative to specific gravity measurement for determining the state of charge. This phenomenon is discussed in Reference 2.
Footnote (c) to Table 3.8.6-1 allows the float charge current to be used as an alternate to specific gravity for up to seven days following a battery equalizing recharge.
Within seven days, each connected cell's specific gravity must be measured to confirm the state of charge. Following a minor battery recharge (such as equalizing charge that does not follow a deep discharge) specific gravity gradients are not significant, and confirming measurements may be made in less than seven days.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.6-6                        Revision 2


Inverters-Operating B 3.8.7 B 3.8  ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.7 Inverters-Operating
Battery Cell Parameters B 3.8.6 BASES REFERENCES        1. UFSAR
: 2. IEEE Standard -450-1995, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement Vented Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary Applications," May 1995 CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.6-7                       Revision 2


BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.7-1 Revision 2 BACKGROUND The inverters are the preferred source of power for the AC vital buses
Inverters-Operating B 3.8.7 B 3.8  ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.7   Inverters-Operating BASES BACKGROUND         The inverters are the preferred source of power for the AC vital buses, because of the stability and reliability they achieve. The function of the inverter is to provide AC electrical power to the vital buses. Each inverter has two built-in independent inverters, either one of which can serve as the preferred source of power. In these dual inverters, 120 volt AC power output can be manually switched from one side to the other side. The inverters can be powered from the DC bus which is energized from the station battery and/or battery chargers. The station battery and the inverters provides an uninterruptible power source for the instrumentation and controls for the Reactor Protective System (RPS) and the ESFAS. Specific details on inverters and their operating characteristics are found in Reference 1, Chapter 8.
, because of the stability and reliability they achieve. The function of the inverter is to provide AC electrical power to the vital buses. Each inverter has two built-in independent inverters, either one of which can serve as the preferred source of power. In these dual  
APPLICABLE         The initial conditions of DBA and transient analyses in SAFETY ANALYSES   Reference 1, Chapters 6 and 14, assume ESF systems are OPERABLE. The inverters are designed to provide the required capacity, capability, redundancy, and reliability to ensure the availability of necessary power to the RPS and ESFAS instrumentation and controls so that the fuel, RCS, and containment design limits are not exceeded. These limits are discussed in more detail in the Bases for Sections 3.2, 3.4, and 3.6.
 
The OPERABILITY of the inverters is consistent with the initial assumptions of the accident analyses and is based on meeting the design basis of the unit. This includes maintaining required AC vital buses OPERABLE during accident conditions in the event of:
inverters, 120 volt AC power output can be manually switched  
 
from one side to the other side. The inverters can be powered from the DC b us which is energized from the station battery and/or battery chargers. The station battery and  
 
the inverters provides an uninterruptible power source for  
 
the instrumentation and controls for the Reactor Protective  
 
System (RPS) and the ESFAS. Specific details on inverters and their operating characteristics are found in Reference 1 , Chapter 8.
APPLICABLE The initial conditions of DBA and transient analyses in SAFETY ANALYSES Reference 1, Chapters 6 and 14 , assume ESF systems are OPERABLE. The inverters are designed to provide the  
 
required capacity, capability, redundancy, and reliability  
 
to ensure the availability of necessary power to the RPS and  
 
ESFAS instrumentation and controls so that the fuel, RCS , and containment design limits are not exceeded. These  
 
limits are discussed in more detail in the Bases for  
 
Sections 3.2 , 3.4 , and 3.6.
The OPERABILITY of the inverters is consistent with the  
 
initial assumptions of the accident analyses and is based on meeting the design basis of the unit. This includes maintaining required AC vital buses OPERABLE during accident  
 
conditions in the event of:
: a. An assumed loss of all offsite AC electrical power or all onsite AC electrical power; and
: a. An assumed loss of all offsite AC electrical power or all onsite AC electrical power; and
: b. A worst case single failure.  
: b. A worst case single failure.
 
Inverters are a part of the distribution system and, as such, satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), Criterion 3.
Inverters are a part of the distribution system and, as such, satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), Criterion 3.  
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2       B 3.8.7-1                         Revision 2
 
Inverters-Operating B 3.8.7 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.7-2 Revision 2 LCO The LCO requires four inverters to be operable, one inverter per AC vital bus. Each AC vital bus can receive power from
 
either side of the dual inverter. Each side of the dual
 
inverter is fully rated
, to power the AC vital bus.
Therefore, only one side of each dual inverter is required
 
for the inverter to be considered OPERABLE.
 
The inverters ensure the availability of AC electrical power
 
for the systems instrumentation required to shut down the
 
reactor and maintain it in a safe condition after an AOO or a postulated DBA.
 
Maintaining the required inverters OPERABLE ensures that the
 
redundancy incorporated into the design of the RPS and ESFAS
 
instrumentation and controls
, is maintained. The four required inverters per unit ensure an uninterruptible supply
 
of AC electrical power to each of the units AC vital buses
 
even if the 4.16 kV safety buses are de-energized.
 
OPERABLE inverters require the associated vital bus to be
 
powered by either side of the dual inverter with output
 
voltage within tolerances, and power input to the inverter
 
from a 125 VDC station battery. Alternatively, power supply
 
may be from the battery charger as long as the station
 
battery is available as the uninterruptible power supply.
APPLICABILITY The inverters are required to be OPERABLE in MODE s 1, 2, 3, and 4 to ensure that:
: a. Acceptable fuel design limits and reactor coolant pressure boundary limits are not exceeded as a result of AOOs or abnormal transients; and  b. Adequate core cooling is provided, and containment OPERABILITY and other vital functions are maintained in the event of a postulated DBA.
 
Inverter requirements for MODE s 5 and 6 are covered in the Bases for LCO 3.8.8
.
ACTIONS A.1 With a required inverter inoperable, its associated AC vital
 
bus becomes inoperable until it is manually re-energized Inverters-Operating B 3.8.7 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.7-3 Revision 2 from its 120 VAC bus powered by an ESF m otor c ontrol c enter through a regulating transformer.
Required Action A.1 is modified by a Note, which states to
 
enter the applicable conditions and Required Actions of
 
LCO 3.8.9 , when Condition A is entered with one AC vital bus de-energized. This ensures the vital bus is re-energized
 
within two hours.
Required Action A.1 allows 24 hours to fix the inoperable
 
inverter and return it to service. The 24 hour limit is
 
based upon engineering judgment, taking into consideration
 
the time required to repair an inverter and the additional
 
risk to which the unit is exposed because of the inverter
 
inoperability. This has to be balanced against the risk of
 
an immediate shutdown, along with the potential challenges
 
to safety systems such a shutdown might entail. When the AC
 
vital bus is powered from its constant voltage source, it is
 
relying upon interruptible AC electrical power sources (offsite and onsite). The uninterruptible inverter source
 
to the AC vital buses is the preferred source for powering
 
instrumentation trip setpoint devices.
 
B.1 and B.2 If the inoperable devices or components cannot be restored
 
to OPERABLE status within the required Completion Time, the
 
unit must be brought to a MODE in which the LCO does not
 
apply. To achieve this status, the unit must be brought to
 
at least MODE 3 within six hours and to MODE 5 within 36 hours. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required unit
 
conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.
SURVEILLANCE SR 3.8.7.1 REQUIREMENTS
 
This S R verifies that the inverters are functioning properly with all required circuit breakers closed and AC vital buses
 
energized from the inverter. The verification of proper
 
voltage output ensures that the required power is readily
 
available for the instrumentation of the RPS and ESFAS


connected to the AC vital buses. The seven day Frequency Inverters-Operating B 3.8.7 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.7-4 Revision 2 takes into account the redundant capability of the inverters and other indications available in the C ontrol R oom that alert the operator to inverter malfunctions.
Inverters-Operating B 3.8.7 BASES LCO              The LCO requires four inverters to be operable, one inverter per AC vital bus. Each AC vital bus can receive power from either side of the dual inverter. Each side of the dual inverter is fully rated, to power the AC vital bus.
REFERENCES 1. UFSAR
Therefore, only one side of each dual inverter is required for the inverter to be considered OPERABLE.
The inverters ensure the availability of AC electrical power for the systems instrumentation required to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe condition after an AOO or a postulated DBA.
Maintaining the required inverters OPERABLE ensures that the redundancy incorporated into the design of the RPS and ESFAS instrumentation and controls, is maintained. The four required inverters per unit ensure an uninterruptible supply of AC electrical power to each of the units AC vital buses even if the 4.16 kV safety buses are de-energized.
OPERABLE inverters require the associated vital bus to be powered by either side of the dual inverter with output voltage within tolerances, and power input to the inverter from a 125 VDC station battery. Alternatively, power supply may be from the battery charger as long as the station battery is available as the uninterruptible power supply.
APPLICABILITY    The inverters are required to be OPERABLE in MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 to ensure that:
: a. Acceptable fuel design limits and reactor coolant pressure boundary limits are not exceeded as a result of AOOs or abnormal transients; and
: b. Adequate core cooling is provided, and containment OPERABILITY and other vital functions are maintained in the event of a postulated DBA.
Inverter requirements for MODEs 5 and 6 are covered in the Bases for LCO 3.8.8.
ACTIONS          A.1 With a required inverter inoperable, its associated AC vital bus becomes inoperable until it is manually re-energized CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2       B 3.8.7-2                        Revision 2


Inverters-Shutdown B 3.8.8 B 3.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.8  Inverters-Shutdown
Inverters-Operating B 3.8.7 BASES from its 120 VAC bus powered by an ESF motor control center through a regulating transformer.
Required Action A.1 is modified by a Note, which states to enter the applicable conditions and Required Actions of LCO 3.8.9, when Condition A is entered with one AC vital bus de-energized. This ensures the vital bus is re-energized within two hours.
Required Action A.1 allows 24 hours to fix the inoperable inverter and return it to service. The 24 hour limit is based upon engineering judgment, taking into consideration the time required to repair an inverter and the additional risk to which the unit is exposed because of the inverter inoperability. This has to be balanced against the risk of an immediate shutdown, along with the potential challenges to safety systems such a shutdown might entail. When the AC vital bus is powered from its constant voltage source, it is relying upon interruptible AC electrical power sources (offsite and onsite). The uninterruptible inverter source to the AC vital buses is the preferred source for powering instrumentation trip setpoint devices.
B.1 and B.2 If the inoperable devices or components cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the required Completion Time, the unit must be brought to a MODE in which the LCO does not apply. To achieve this status, the unit must be brought to at least MODE 3 within six hours and to MODE 5 within 36 hours. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required unit conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.
SURVEILLANCE      SR 3.8.7.1 REQUIREMENTS This SR verifies that the inverters are functioning properly with all required circuit breakers closed and AC vital buses energized from the inverter. The verification of proper voltage output ensures that the required power is readily available for the instrumentation of the RPS and ESFAS connected to the AC vital buses. The seven day Frequency CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.7-3                        Revision 2


BASES CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.8-1 Revision 2 BACKGROUND A description of the inverters is provided in the Bases for LCO 3.8.7. APPLICABLE The initial conditions of DBA and transient analyses in SAFETY ANALYSES Reference 1 , Chapters 6 and 14 , assume ESF systems are OPERABLE. The DC to AC inverters are designed to provide
Inverters-Operating B 3.8.7 BASES takes into account the redundant capability of the inverters and other indications available in the Control Room that alert the operator to inverter malfunctions.
REFERENCES        1. UFSAR CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2       B 3.8.7-4                        Revision 2


the required capacity, capability, redundancy, and  
Inverters-Shutdown B 3.8.8 B 3.8  ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.8  Inverters-Shutdown BASES BACKGROUND        A description of the inverters is provided in the Bases for LCO 3.8.7.
 
APPLICABLE        The initial conditions of DBA and transient analyses in SAFETY ANALYSES    Reference 1, Chapters 6 and 14, assume ESF systems are OPERABLE. The DC to AC inverters are designed to provide the required capacity, capability, redundancy, and reliability to ensure the availability of necessary power to the RPS and ESFAS instrumentation and controls so that the fuel, RCS, and containment design limits are not exceeded.
reliability to ensure the availability of necessary power to  
The OPERABILITY of the inverters is consistent with the initial assumptions of the accident analyses and the requirements for the supported systems' OPERABILITY.
 
The OPERABILITY of the minimum inverters to each AC vital bus during MODEs 5 and 6 ensures that:
the RPS and ESFAS instrumentation and controls so that the fuel, RCS , and containment design limits are not exceeded.  
 
The OPERABILITY of the inverters is consistent with the  
 
initial assumptions of the accident analyses and the  
 
requirements for the supported systems' OPERABILITY.  
 
The OPERABILITY of the minimum inverters to each AC vital  
 
bus during MODE s 5 and 6 ensures that:
: a. The unit can be maintained in the shutdown or refueling condition for extended periods;
: a. The unit can be maintained in the shutdown or refueling condition for extended periods;
: b. Sufficient instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit  
: b. Sufficient instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit status; and
 
: c. Adequate power is available to mitigate events postulated during shutdown, such as a fuel handling accident.
status; and
: c. Adequate power is available to mitigate events postulated during shutdown, such as a fuel handling  
 
accident.  
 
The inverters were previously identified as part of the distribution system and, as such, satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), Criterion 3.
The inverters were previously identified as part of the distribution system and, as such, satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), Criterion 3.
LCO The inverters ensure the availability of electrical power for the instrumentation for systems required to shut down  
LCO               The inverters ensure the availability of electrical power for the instrumentation for systems required to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe condition after an AOO or a postulated DBA. The battery powered inverters provide uninterruptible supply of AC electrical power to the AC vital buses even if the 4.16 kV safety buses are de-energized. OPERABILITY of the inverters requires that the vital bus be powered by the inverter. This ensures the CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2        B 3.8.8-1                        Revision 2


the reactor and maintain it in a safe condition after an AOO or a postulated DBA. The battery powered inverters provide
Inverters-Shutdown B 3.8.8 BASES availability of sufficient inverter power sources to operate the unit in a safe manner and to mitigate the consequences of postulated events during shutdown (e.g., fuel handling accidents).
 
APPLICABILITY     The inverters required to be OPERABLE in MODEs 5 and 6 and during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies provide assurance that:
uninterruptible supply of AC electrical power to the AC
: a. Systems to provide adequate coolant inventory makeup are available for the irradiated fuel in the core;
 
: b. Systems needed to mitigate a fuel handling accident are available;
vital buses even if the 4.16 kV safety buses are
: c. Systems necessary to mitigate the effects of events that can lead to core damage during shutdown are available; and
 
: d. Instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit in a cold shutdown condition or refueling condition.
de-energized. OPERABILITY of the inverters requires that
Inverter requirements for MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 are covered in LCO 3.8.7.
 
ACTIONS           Limiting Condition for Operation 3.0.3 is not applicable while in MODEs 5 or 6. However, since irradiated fuel assembly movement can occur in MODEs 1, 2, 3, or 4, the ACTIONS have been modified by a Note stating that LCO 3.0.3 is not applicable. If moving irradiated fuel assemblies while in MODEs 5 or 6, LCO 3.0.3 would not specify any action. If moving irradiated fuel assemblies while in MODEs 1, 2, 3, or 4, the fuel movement is independent of reactor operations. Therefore, in either case, inability to suspend movement of irradiated fuel assemblies would not be sufficient reason to require a reactor shutdown.
the vital bus be powered by the inverter. This ensures the Inverters-Shutdown B 3.8.8 BASES CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.8-2 Revision 29 availability of sufficient inverter power sources to operate the unit in a safe manner and to mitigate the consequences  
A.1, A.2.1, A.2.2, and A.2.3 If two trains are required by LCO 3.8.10, the remaining OPERABLE inverters may be capable of supporting sufficient required features to allow continuation of movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, operations with a potential for draining the reactor vessel, and operations with a potential for positive reactivity additions. By the allowance of the CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2       B 3.8.8-2                      Revision 29
 
of postulated events during shutdown (e.g., fuel handling accidents).
APPLICABILITY The inverters required to be OPERABLE in MODEs 5 and 6 and during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies provide  
 
assurance that:
: a. Systems to provide adequate coolant inventory makeup are available for the irradiated fuel in the core; b. Systems needed to mitigate a fuel handling accident are available; c. Systems necessary to mitigate the effects of events that can lead to core damage during shutdown are  
 
available; and d. Instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit in a cold shutdown  
 
condition or refueling condition.  
 
Inverter requirements for MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 are covered in LCO 3.8.7.  
 
ACTIONS Limiting Condition for Operation 3.0.3 is not applicable while in MODEs 5 or 6. However, since irradiated fuel  
 
assembly movement can occur in MODEs 1, 2, 3, or 4, the ACTIONS have been modified by a Note stating that LCO 3.0.3 is not applicable. If moving irradiated fuel assemblies  
 
while in MODEs 5 or 6, LCO 3.0.3 would not specify any  
 
action. If moving irradiated fuel assemblies while in  
 
MODEs 1, 2, 3, or 4, the fuel movement is independent of  
 
reactor operations. Therefore, in either case, inability to  
 
suspend movement of irradiated fuel assemblies would not be  
 
sufficient reason to require a reactor shutdown.  
 
A.1, A.2.1, A.2.2, and A.2.3 If two trains are required by LCO 3.8.10, the remaining  
 
OPERABLE inverters may be capable of supporting sufficient  
 
required features to allow continuation of movement of irradiated fuel assemblies , operations with a potential for draining the reactor vessel, and operations with a potential  
 
for positive reactivity additions. By the allowance of the Inverters-Shutdown B 3.8.8 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.8-3 Revision 29 option to declare required features inoperable with the associated inverter(s) inoperable, appropriate restrictions
 
will be implemented in accordance with the affected required
 
features LCOs' Required Actions. In many instances, this
 
option may involve undesired administrative efforts. It is
 
therefore required to suspend movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, and operations involving positive reactivity
 
additions that could result in loss of the required SDM (MODE 5) or boron concentration (MODE 6). Suspending
 
positive reactivity additions that could result in failure
 
to meet the minimum SDM or boron concentration limit is
 
required to assure continued safe operation. Introduction
 
of coolant inventory must be from sources that have a boron
 
concentration greater than that required in the RCS for the
 
minimum SDM or refueling boron concentration. This may
 
result in an overall reduction in RCS boron concentration, but provides an acceptable margin to maintaining subcritical
 
operation. Introduction of temperature changes including
 
temperature increases when operating with a positive MTC
 
must also be evaluated to ensure they do not result in a
 
loss of the required SDM.
 
Suspension of these activities shall not preclude completion of actions to establish a safe conservative condition. 
 
These actions minimize the probability of the occurrence of
 
postulated events. It is further required to immediately
 
initiate action to restore the required inverters and to
 
continue this action until restoration is accomplished in
 
order to provide the necessary inverter power to the unit
 
safety systems.
 
The Completion Time of immediately is consistent with the required times for actions requiring prompt attention. The
 
restoration of the required inverters should be completed as quickly as possible in order to minimize the time the unit safety systems may be without power or powered from a constant voltage source transformer.
SURVEILLANCE SR 3.8.8.1 REQUIREMENTS


This SR verifies that the inverters are functioning properly  
Inverters-Shutdown B 3.8.8 BASES option to declare required features inoperable with the associated inverter(s) inoperable, appropriate restrictions will be implemented in accordance with the affected required features LCOs' Required Actions. In many instances, this option may involve undesired administrative efforts. It is therefore required to suspend movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, and operations involving positive reactivity additions that could result in loss of the required SDM (MODE 5) or boron concentration (MODE 6). Suspending positive reactivity additions that could result in failure to meet the minimum SDM or boron concentration limit is required to assure continued safe operation. Introduction of coolant inventory must be from sources that have a boron concentration greater than that required in the RCS for the minimum SDM or refueling boron concentration. This may result in an overall reduction in RCS boron concentration, but provides an acceptable margin to maintaining subcritical operation. Introduction of temperature changes including temperature increases when operating with a positive MTC must also be evaluated to ensure they do not result in a loss of the required SDM.
Suspension of these activities shall not preclude completion of actions to establish a safe conservative condition.
These actions minimize the probability of the occurrence of postulated events. It is further required to immediately initiate action to restore the required inverters and to continue this action until restoration is accomplished in order to provide the necessary inverter power to the unit safety systems.
The Completion Time of immediately is consistent with the required times for actions requiring prompt attention. The restoration of the required inverters should be completed as quickly as possible in order to minimize the time the unit safety systems may be without power or powered from a constant voltage source transformer.
SURVEILLANCE      SR 3.8.8.1 REQUIREMENTS This SR verifies that the inverters are functioning properly with all required circuit breakers closed and AC vital buses energized from the inverter. The verification of proper CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.8-3                      Revision 29


with all required circuit breakers closed and AC vital buses  
Inverters-Shutdown B 3.8.8 BASES voltage output ensures that the required power is readily available for the instrumentation connected to the AC vital buses. The seven day Frequency takes into account the redundant capability of the inverters and other indications available in the Control Room that alert the operator to inverter malfunctions.
REFERENCES        1. UFSAR CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.8-4                      Revision 19


energized from the inverter. The verification of proper Inverters-Shutdown B 3.8.8 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.8-4 Revision 19 voltage output ensures that the required power is readily available for the instrumentation connected to the AC vital
Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 B 3.8  ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.9  Distribution Systems-Operating BASES BACKGROUND        The onsite Class 1E AC, DC, and AC vital bus Electrical Power Distribution Systems are divided into two redundant and independent AC electrical power distribution subsystems and four independent and redundant DC and AC vital bus electrical power distribution subsystems (Reference 1, Chapter 8).
The AC primary Electrical Power Distribution System consists of two 4.16 kV ESF buses, each having at least one separate and independent offsite source of power as well as a dedicated onsite DG source. Each 4.16 kV ESF bus is normally connected to a preferred offsite source. After a loss of the preferred offsite power source to a 4.16 kV ESF bus, the onsite emergency DG supplies power to the 4.16 kV ESF bus. Control power for the 4.16 kV breakers is supplied from the Class 1E batteries. Additional description of this system may be found in the Bases for LCOs 3.8.1 and 3.8.4.
The 480 V system include the safety-related load centers, motor control centers, and distribution panels shown in Table B 3.8.9-1.
The 120 VAC vital buses are divided into four independent and isolated subsystems and are normally supplied from an inverter. The alternate power supply for the vital buses are non-Class 1E 120 VAC Buses fed from a Class 1E ESF motor control center through the regulating transformer, and its use is governed by LCO 3.8.7. Each constant voltage source transformer is powered from a Class 1E AC bus.
There are four independent 125 VDC electrical power distribution subsystems.
The list of all required Distribution Systems-Operating is presented in Table B 3.8.9-1.
APPLICABLE        The initial conditions of DBA and transient analyses in SAFETY ANALYSES    Reference 1, Chapters 6 and 14, assume ESF systems are OPERABLE. The AC, DC, and AC vital bus Electrical Power Distribution Systems are designed to provide sufficient CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2       B 3.8.9-1                        Revision 5


buses. The seven day Frequency takes into account the
Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES capacity, capability, redundancy, and reliability to ensure the availability of necessary power to ESF systems so that the fuel, RCS, and containment design limits are not exceeded. These limits are discussed in more detail in the Bases for Sections 3.2, 3.4, and 3.6.
 
The OPERABILITY of the AC, DC, and AC vital bus Electrical Power Distribution Systems is consistent with the initial assumptions of the accident analyses and is based upon meeting the design basis of the unit. This includes maintaining power distribution systems OPERABLE during accident conditions in the event of:
redundant capability of the inverters and other indications
 
available in the Control Room that alert the operator to inverter malfunctions.
REFERENCES 1. UFSAR Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 B 3.8  ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.9  Distribution Systems-Operating
 
BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.9-1 Revision 5 BACKGROUND The onsite Class 1E AC, DC, and AC vital bus Electrical Power Distribution Systems are divided into two redundant and independent AC electrical power distribution subsystems
 
and four independent and redundant DC and AC vital bus electrical power distribution subsystems (Reference 1, Chapter 8).
 
The AC primary Electrical Power Distribution System consists
 
of two 4.16 kV ESF buses, each having at least one separate
 
and independent offsite source of power as well as a
 
dedicated onsite DG source. Each 4.16 kV ESF bus is
 
normally connected to a preferred offsite source. After a
 
loss of the preferred offsite power source to a 4.16 kV ESF
 
bus, the onsite emergency DG supplies power to the 4.16 kV
 
ESF bus. Control power for the 4.16 kV breakers is supplied
 
from the Class 1E batteries. Additional description of this
 
system may be found in the Bases for LCOs 3.8.1 and 3.8.4.
 
The 480 V system include the safety-related load centers, motor control centers, and distribution panels shown in
 
Table B 3.8.9-1.
 
The 120 VAC vital buses are divided into four independent and isolated subsystems and are normally supplied from an
 
inverter. The alternate power supply for the vital buses
 
are non-Class 1E 120 VAC Buses fed from a Class 1E ESF motor
 
control center through the regulating transformer, and its
 
use is governed by LCO 3.8.7. Each constant voltage source
 
transformer is powered from a Class 1E AC bus.
 
There are four independent 125 VDC electrical power distribution subsystems.
 
The list of all required Distribution Systems-Operating is presented in Table B 3.8.9-1.
 
APPLICABLE The initial conditions of DBA and transient analyses in SAFETY ANALYSES Reference 1, Chapters 6 and 14, assume ESF systems are OPERABLE. The AC, DC, and AC vital bus Electrical Power
 
Distribution Systems are designed to provide sufficient Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.9-2 Revision 2 capacity, capability, redundancy, and reliability to ensure the availability of necessary power to ESF systems so that  
 
the fuel, RCS , and containment design limits are not exceeded. These limits are discussed in more detail in the  
 
Bases for Section s 3.2, 3.4, and 3.6. The OPERABILITY of the AC, DC, and AC vital bus Electrical Power Distribution Systems is consistent with the initial assumptions of the accident analyses and is based upon  
 
meeting the design basis of the unit. This includes  
 
maintaining power distribution systems OPERABLE during  
 
accident conditions in the event of:
: a. An assumed loss of all offsite power or all onsite AC electrical power; and
: a. An assumed loss of all offsite power or all onsite AC electrical power; and
: b. A worst case single failure.  
: b. A worst case single failure.
The distribution systems satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii),
Criterion 3.
LCO              The required electrical power distribution subsystems listed in Table B 3.8.9-1 ensure the availability of AC, DC, and AC vital bus electrical supply for the systems required to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe condition after an AOO or a postulated DBA. The AC, DC, and AC vital bus electrical power distribution subsystems are required to be OPERABLE.
Maintaining the AC, DC, and AC vital bus electrical power distribution subsystems OPERABLE ensures that the redundancy incorporated into the design of ESF is not defeated.
Therefore, a single failure within any system or within the electrical power distribution subsystems will not prevent safe shutdown of the reactor.
OPERABLE AC electrical power distribution subsystems require the associated buses, load centers, motor control centers, and distribution panels to be energized to their proper voltages. OPERABLE DC electrical power distribution subsystems require the associated buses to be energized to their proper voltage from either the associated battery or charger. OPERABLE vital bus electrical distribution CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.9-2                        Revision 2


The distribution systems satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), Criterion 3.
Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES subsystems require the associated buses to be energized to their proper voltage.
LCO The required electrical power distribution subsystems listed
In addition, tie breakers between redundant safety-related AC, DC, and AC vital bus distribution subsystems, if they exist, must be open. This prevents any electrical malfunction in any distribution subsystem from propagating to the redundant subsystem, which could cause the failure of a redundant subsystem and a loss of essential safety function(s). If any tie breakers are closed, the affected redundant electrical distribution subsystems are considered inoperable. This applies to the onsite, safety-related redundant electrical power distribution subsystems.
APPLICABILITY    The electrical distribution subsystems are required to be OPERABLE in MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 to ensure that:
: a. Acceptable fuel design limits and reactor coolant pressure boundary limits are not exceeded as a result of AOOs or abnormal transients; and
: b. Adequate core cooling is provided, and Containment OPERABILITY and other vital functions are maintained in the event of a postulated DBA.
Electrical distribution subsystem requirements for MODEs 5 and 6 are covered in the Bases for LCO 3.8.10.
ACTIONS          A.1 With one or more required AC buses, load centers, motor control centers, or distribution panels, except AC vital buses, inoperable and a loss of function has not yet occurred, the remaining AC electrical power distribution subsystems are capable of supporting the minimum safety functions necessary to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe shutdown condition, assuming no single failure.
The overall reliability is reduced, however, because a single failure in the remaining power distribution subsystems could result in the minimum required ESF functions not being supported. Therefore, the required AC buses, load centers, motor control centers, and distribution panels must be restored to OPERABLE status within eight hours.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.9-3                        Revision 2


in Table B 3.8.9-1 ensure the availability of AC, DC, and AC
Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES Condition A worst scenario is one train without AC power (i.e., no offsite power to the train and the associated DG inoperable). In this condition, the unit is more vulnerable to a complete loss of AC power. It is, therefore, imperative that the unit operator's attention be focused on minimizing the potential for loss of power to the remaining train by stabilizing the unit, and on restoring power to the affected train. The eight hour time limit before requiring a unit shutdown in this condition is acceptable because of:
 
: a. The potential for decreased safety if the unit operator's attention is diverted from the evaluations and actions necessary to restore power to the affected train, to the actions associated with taking the unit to shutdown within this time limit; and
vital bus electrical supply for the systems required to shut
: b. The potential for an event in conjunction with a single failure of a redundant component in the train with AC power.
 
The second Completion Time for Required Action A.1 establishes a limit on the maximum time allowed for any combination of required distribution subsystems to be inoperable during any single contiguous occurrence of failing to meet the LCO. If Condition A is entered while, for instance, a DC bus is inoperable and subsequently restored OPERABLE, the LCO may already have been not met for up to two hours. This could lead to a total of ten hours, since initial failure of the LCO, to restore the AC distribution system. At this time, a DC circuit could again become inoperable, and AC distribution restored OPERABLE.
down the reactor and maintain it in a safe condition after
This could continue indefinitely.
 
The Completion Time allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for beginning the allowed outage time "clock."
an AOO or a postulated DBA. The AC, DC, and AC vital bus electrical power distribution subsystems are required to be
This will result in establishing the "time zero" at the time the LCO was initially not met, instead of the time Condition A was entered. The 16 hour Completion Time is an acceptable limitation on this potential to fail to meet the LCO indefinitely.
 
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2       B 3.8.9-4                        Revision 2
OPERABLE.
 
Maintaining the AC, DC, and AC vital bus electrical power
 
distribution subsystems OPERABLE ensures that the redundancy
 
incorporated into the design of ESF is not defeated.
Therefore, a single failure within any system or within the electrical power distribution subsystems will not prevent
 
safe shutdown of the reactor.
 
OPERABLE AC electrical power distribution subsystems require
 
the associated buses, load centers, motor control centers, and distribution panels to be energized to their proper
 
voltages. OPERABLE DC electrical power distribution
 
subsystems require the associated buses to be energized to
 
their proper voltage from either the associated battery or
 
charger. OPERABLE vital bus electrical distribution Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.9-3 Revision 2 subsystems require the associated buses to be energized to their proper voltage.
 
In addition, tie breakers between redundant safety
-related AC, DC, and AC vital bus distribution subsystems, if they
 
exist, must be open. This prevents any electrical malfunction in any distribution subsystem from propagating to the redundant subsystem, which could cause the failure of
 
a redundant subsystem and a loss of essential safety
 
function(s). If any tie breakers are closed, the affected
 
redundant electrical distribution subsystems are considered
 
inoperable. This applies to the onsite, safety
-related redundant electrical power distribution subsystems.
 
APPLICABILITY The electrical distribution subsystems are required to be OPERABLE in MODE s 1, 2, 3, and 4 to ensure that:
: a. Acceptable fuel design limits and reactor coolant pressure boundary limits are not exceeded as a result
 
of AOOs or abnormal transients; and
: b. Adequate core cooling is provided, and C ontainment OPERABILITY and other vital functions are maintained in
 
the event of a postulated DBA.
 
Electrical distribution subsystem requirements for MODE s 5 and 6 are covered in the Bases for LCO 3.8.10
.
ACTIONS A.1 With one or more required AC buses, load centers, motor
 
control centers, or distribution panels, except AC vital
 
buses, inoperable and a loss of f unction has not yet occurred, the remaining AC electrical power distribution
 
subsystems are capable of supporting the minimum safety
 
functions necessary to shut down the reactor and maintain it
 
in a safe shutdown condition, assuming no single failure. 
 
The overall reliability is reduced, however, because a
 
single failure in the remaining power distribution
 
subsystems could result in the minimum required ESF
 
functions not being supported. Therefore, the required AC
 
buses, load centers, motor control centers, and distribution
 
panels must be restored to OPERABLE status within
 
eight hours.
Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.9-4 Revision 2 Condition A worst scenario is one train without AC power (i.e., no offsite power to the train and the associated DG  
 
inoperable). In this condition, the unit is more vulnerable  
 
to a complete loss of AC power. It is, therefore, imperative that the unit operator's attention be focused on  
 
minimizing the potential for loss of power to the remaining train by stabilizing the unit, and on restoring power to the affected train. The eight hour time limit before requiring a unit shutdown in this condition is acceptable because of:
: a. The potential for decreased safety if the unit operator's attention is diverted from the evaluations  
 
and actions necessary to restore power to the affected  
 
train, to the actions associated with taking the unit  
 
to shutdown within this time limit; and b. The potential for an event in conjunction with a single failure of a redundant component in the train with AC  
 
power.
The second Completion Time for Required Action A.1 establishes a limit on the maximum time allowed for any  
 
combination of required distribution subsystems to be  
 
inoperable during any single contiguous occurrence of  
 
failing to meet the LCO. If Condition A is entered while, for instance, a DC bus is inoperable and subsequently  
 
restored OPERABLE, the LCO may already have been not met for  
 
up to two hours. This could lead to a total of ten hours, since initial failure of the LCO, to restore the AC  
 
distribution system. At this time, a DC circuit could again  
 
become inoperable, and AC distribution restored OPERABLE.
 
This could continue indefinitely.  
 
The Completion Time allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for beginning the allowed outage time "clock."
 
This will result in establishing the "time zero" at the time the LCO was initially not met, instead of the time Condition A was entered. The 16 hour Completion Time is an  
 
acceptable limitation on this potential to fail to meet the  
 
LCO indefinitely.  
 
Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.9-5 Revision 2 B.1  With one or more AC vital buses inoperable and a loss of Function has not yet occurred, the remaining OPERABLE AC
 
vital buses are capable of supporting the minimum safety
 
functions necessary to shut down the unit and maintain it in
 
the safe shutdown condition. Overall reliability is reduced, however, since an additional single failure could result in the minimum required ESF functions not being
 
supported. Therefore, the AC vital bus must be restored to
 
OPERABLE status within two hours by powering the bus from an associated inverter via DC or the non-Class 1E 120 VAC bus
 
powered by an ESF m otor c ontrol c enter through a regulating transformer.
 
Condition B represents one or more AC vital buses without
 
power; potentially both the DC source and the associated AC
 
source are non
-functioning. In this situation, the unit is significantly more vulnerable to a complete loss of all
 
noninterruptible power. It is, therefore, imperative that
 
the operator's attention focus on stabilizing the unit, minimizing the potential for loss of power to the remaining
 
vital buses, and restoring power to the affected vital bus.
 
This two hour limit is more conservative than Completion Times allowed for the vast majority of components that are
 
without adequate vital AC power. Taking exception to
 
LCO 3.0.2 for components without adequate vital AC power, which would have the Required Action Completion Times
 
shorter than two hours if declared inoperable, is acceptable because of:
: a. The potential for decreased safety by requiring a change in unit conditions (i.e., requiring a shutdown)
 
and not allowing stable operations to continue;
: b. The potential for decreased safety by requiring entry into numerous Applicable Conditions and Required
 
Actions for components without adequate vital AC power
 
and not providing sufficient time for the operators to
 
perform the necessary evaluations and actions for
 
restoring power to the affected train; and
: c. The potential for an event in conjunction with a single failure of a redundant component.
 
Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.9-6 Revision 2 The two hour Completion Time takes into account the importance to safety of restoring the AC vital bus to OPERABLE status, the redundant capability afforded by the
 
other OPERABLE vital buses, and the low probability of a DBA
 
occurring during this period.
The second Completion Time for Required Action B.1 establishes a limit on the maximum allowed for any
 
combination of required distribution subsystems to be
 
inoperable during any single contiguous occurrence of


failing to meet the LCO. If Condition B is entered while, for instance, an AC bus is inoperable and subsequently
Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES B.1 With one or more AC vital buses inoperable and a loss of Function has not yet occurred, the remaining OPERABLE AC vital buses are capable of supporting the minimum safety functions necessary to shut down the unit and maintain it in the safe shutdown condition. Overall reliability is reduced, however, since an additional single failure could result in the minimum required ESF functions not being supported. Therefore, the AC vital bus must be restored to OPERABLE status within two hours by powering the bus from an associated inverter via DC or the non-Class 1E 120 VAC bus powered by an ESF motor control center through a regulating transformer.
Condition B represents one or more AC vital buses without power; potentially both the DC source and the associated AC source are non-functioning. In this situation, the unit is significantly more vulnerable to a complete loss of all noninterruptible power. It is, therefore, imperative that the operator's attention focus on stabilizing the unit, minimizing the potential for loss of power to the remaining vital buses, and restoring power to the affected vital bus.
This two hour limit is more conservative than Completion Times allowed for the vast majority of components that are without adequate vital AC power. Taking exception to LCO 3.0.2 for components without adequate vital AC power, which would have the Required Action Completion Times shorter than two hours if declared inoperable, is acceptable because of:
: a. The potential for decreased safety by requiring a change in unit conditions (i.e., requiring a shutdown) and not allowing stable operations to continue;
: b. The potential for decreased safety by requiring entry into numerous Applicable Conditions and Required Actions for components without adequate vital AC power and not providing sufficient time for the operators to perform the necessary evaluations and actions for restoring power to the affected train; and
: c. The potential for an event in conjunction with a single failure of a redundant component.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.9-5                        Revision 2


returned OPERABLE, the LCO may already have been not met for  
Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES The two hour Completion Time takes into account the importance to safety of restoring the AC vital bus to OPERABLE status, the redundant capability afforded by the other OPERABLE vital buses, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.
 
The second Completion Time for Required Action B.1 establishes a limit on the maximum allowed for any combination of required distribution subsystems to be inoperable during any single contiguous occurrence of failing to meet the LCO. If Condition B is entered while, for instance, an AC bus is inoperable and subsequently returned OPERABLE, the LCO may already have been not met for up to eight hours. This could lead to a total of ten hours, since initial failure of the LCO, to restore the vital bus distribution system. At this time, an AC train could again become inoperable, and vital bus distribution restored OPERABLE. This could continue indefinitely.
up to eight hours. This could lead to a total of ten hours, since initial failure of the LCO, to restore the vital bus  
This Completion Time allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for beginning the allowed outage time "clock."
 
This will result in establishing the "time zero" at the time the LCO was initially not met, instead of the time Condition B was entered. The 16 hour Completion Time is an acceptable limitation on this potential to fail to meet the LCO indefinitely.
distribution system. At this time, an AC train could again  
C.1 With one DC bus inoperable, the remaining DC electrical power distribution subsystems are capable of supporting the minimum safety functions necessary to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe shutdown condition, assuming no single failure. The overall reliability is reduced, however, because a single failure in the remaining DC electrical power distribution subsystem could result in the minimum required ESF functions not being supported.
 
Therefore, the DC bus must be restored to OPERABLE status within two hours by powering the bus from the associated battery or charger.
become inoperable, and vital bus distribution restored  
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2       B 3.8.9-6                        Revision 2
 
OPERABLE. This could continue indefinitely.  
 
This Completion Time allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for beginning the allowed outage time "clock."
 
This will result in establishing the "time zero" at the time  
 
the LCO was initially not met, instead of the time  
 
Condition B was entered. The 16 hour Completion Time is an  
 
acceptable limitation on this potential to fail to meet the  
 
LCO indefinitely.  
 
C.1 With one DC bus inoperable, the remaining DC electrical  
 
power distribution subsystems are capable of supporting the  
 
minimum safety functions necessary to shut down the reactor  
 
and maintain it in a safe shutdown condition, assuming no  
 
single failure. The overall reliability is reduced, however, because a single failure in the remaining DC electrical power distribution subsystem could result in the minimum required ESF functions not being supported.
 
Therefore, the DC bus must be restored to OPERABLE status  
 
within two hours by powering the bus from the associated battery or charger.  
 
Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.9-7 Revision 2 Condition C represents one DC bus without adequate DC power; potentially both with the battery significantly degraded and
 
the associated charger nonfunctioning. In this situation, the unit is significantly more vulnerable to a complete loss
 
of all DC power. It is, therefore, imperative that the
 
operator's attention focus on stabilizing the unit, minimizing the potential for loss of power to the remaining trains and restoring power to the affected train.
 
This two hour limit is more conservative than Completion Times allowed for the vast majority of components which
 
would be without power. Taking exception to LCO 3.0.2 for
 
components without adequate DC power, which would have
 
Required Action Completion Times shorter than 2 hours, is
 
acceptable because of:
: a. The potential for decreased safety by requiring a change in unit conditions (i.e., requiring a shutdown)
 
while allowing stable operations to continue;  b. The potential for decreased safety by requiring entry into numerous applicable Conditions and Required
 
Actions for components without DC power and not
 
providing sufficient time for the operators to perform
 
the necessary evaluations and actions for restoring
 
power to the affected train; and  c. The potential for an event in conjunction with a single failure of a redundant component.
 
The two hour Completion Time for DC buses is consistent with Reference
: 2.
The second Completion Time for Required Action C.1
 
establishes a limit on the maximum time allowed for any
 
combination of required distribution subsystems to be
 
inoperable during any single contiguous occurrence of failing to meet the LCO. If Condition C is entered while, for instance, an AC bus is inoperable and subsequently
 
returned OPERABLE, the LCO may already have not been met for up to eight hours. This could lead to a total of ten hours, since initial failure of the LCO, to restore the DC
 
distribution system. At this time, an AC train could again
 
become inoperable, and DC distribution restored OPERABLE. 


Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES Condition C represents one DC bus without adequate DC power; potentially both with the battery significantly degraded and the associated charger nonfunctioning. In this situation, the unit is significantly more vulnerable to a complete loss of all DC power. It is, therefore, imperative that the operator's attention focus on stabilizing the unit, minimizing the potential for loss of power to the remaining trains and restoring power to the affected train.
This two hour limit is more conservative than Completion Times allowed for the vast majority of components which would be without power. Taking exception to LCO 3.0.2 for components without adequate DC power, which would have Required Action Completion Times shorter than 2 hours, is acceptable because of:
: a. The potential for decreased safety by requiring a change in unit conditions (i.e., requiring a shutdown) while allowing stable operations to continue;
: b. The potential for decreased safety by requiring entry into numerous applicable Conditions and Required Actions for components without DC power and not providing sufficient time for the operators to perform the necessary evaluations and actions for restoring power to the affected train; and
: c. The potential for an event in conjunction with a single failure of a redundant component.
The two hour Completion Time for DC buses is consistent with Reference 2.
The second Completion Time for Required Action C.1 establishes a limit on the maximum time allowed for any combination of required distribution subsystems to be inoperable during any single contiguous occurrence of failing to meet the LCO. If Condition C is entered while, for instance, an AC bus is inoperable and subsequently returned OPERABLE, the LCO may already have not been met for up to eight hours. This could lead to a total of ten hours, since initial failure of the LCO, to restore the DC distribution system. At this time, an AC train could again become inoperable, and DC distribution restored OPERABLE.
This could continue indefinitely.
This could continue indefinitely.
Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.9-8 Revision 2 This Completion Time allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for beginning the allowed outage time "clock." 
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2       B 3.8.9-7                        Revision 2
 
This will result in establishing the "time zero" at the time
 
the LCO was initially not met, instead of the time
 
Condition C was entered. The 16 hour Completion Time is an acceptable limitation on this potential to fail to meet the LCO indefinitely.
 
D.1 and D.2 If the inoperable distribution subsystem cannot be restored
 
to OPERABLE status within the required Completion Time, the
 
unit must be brought to a MODE in which the LCO does not
 
apply. To achieve this status, the unit must be brought to
 
at least MODE 3 within six hours and to MODE 5 within 36 hours. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required unit
 
conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner
 
and without challenging unit systems.
 
E.1  Condition E corresponds to a level of degradation in the
 
electrical distribution system that causes a required safety
 
function to be lost. When more than one inoperable
 
electrical power distribution subsystem results in the loss
 
of a required function, the plant is in a condition outside
 
the accident analysis. Therefore, no additional time is
 
justified for continued operation. L imiting C ondition for O peration 3.0.3 must be entered immediately to commence a controlled shutdown.
 
SURVEILLANCE SR 3.8.9.1 REQUIREMENTS
 
This S R verifies that the AC, DC, and AC vital bus Electrical Power Distribution Systems are functioning


properly, with the correct circuit breaker alignment. The  
Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES This Completion Time allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for beginning the allowed outage time "clock."
This will result in establishing the "time zero" at the time the LCO was initially not met, instead of the time Condition C was entered. The 16 hour Completion Time is an acceptable limitation on this potential to fail to meet the LCO indefinitely.
D.1 and D.2 If the inoperable distribution subsystem cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the required Completion Time, the unit must be brought to a MODE in which the LCO does not apply. To achieve this status, the unit must be brought to at least MODE 3 within six hours and to MODE 5 within 36 hours. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required unit conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.
E.1 Condition E corresponds to a level of degradation in the electrical distribution system that causes a required safety function to be lost. When more than one inoperable electrical power distribution subsystem results in the loss of a required function, the plant is in a condition outside the accident analysis. Therefore, no additional time is justified for continued operation. Limiting Condition for Operation 3.0.3 must be entered immediately to commence a controlled shutdown.
SURVEILLANCE      SR 3.8.9.1 REQUIREMENTS This SR verifies that the AC, DC, and AC vital bus Electrical Power Distribution Systems are functioning properly, with the correct circuit breaker alignment. The correct breaker alignment ensures the appropriate separation and independence of the electrical divisions is maintained, and the appropriate voltage is available to each required bus. The verification of proper voltage availability on the buses ensures that the required voltage is readily available for motive as well as control functions for critical system CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.9-8                        Revision 2


correct breaker alignment ensures the appropriate separation
Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES loads connected to these buses. The seven day  Frequency takes into account the redundant capability of the AC, DC, and AC vital bus electrical power distribution subsystems, and other indications available in the Control Room that alert the operator to subsystem malfunctions.
REFERENCES        1. UFSAR
: 2. Regulatory Guide 1.93, "Availability of Electric Power Sources," December 1974 CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.9-9                        Revision 2


and independence of the electrical divisions is maintained, and the appropriate voltage is available to each required
Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES Table B 3.8.9-1 (page 1 of 1)
AC and DC Electrical Power Distribution Systems(1) 4160 Volt Emergency Bus No. 11 (Unit 1), No. 21 (Unit 2) 4160 Volt Emergency Bus No. 14 (Unit 1), No. 24 (Unit 2) 480 Volt Emergency Bus No. 11A (Unit 1), No. 21A (Unit 2) 480 Volt Emergency Bus No. 11B (Unit 1), No. 21B (Unit 2) 480 Volt Emergency Bus No. 14A (Unit 1), No. 24A (Unit 2) 480 Volt Emergency Bus No. 14B (Unit 1), No. 24B (Unit 2) 480 Volt Emergency Bus No. 104R (Unit 1), No. 204R (Unit 2) 480 Volt Emergency Bus No. 114R (Unit 1), No. 214R (Unit 2) 120 Volt AC Vital Bus No. 11 (Unit 1), No. 21 (Unit 2) 120 Volt AC Vital Bus No. 12 (Unit 1), No. 22 (Unit 2) 120 Volt AC Vital Bus No. 13 (Unit 1), No. 23 (Unit 2) 120 Volt AC Vital Bus No. 14 (Unit 1), No. 24 (Unit 2) 125 Volt DC Bus No. 11 (Unit 1 and Unit 2) 125 Volt DC Bus No. 12 (Unit 1 and Unit 2) 125 Volt DC Bus No. 21 (Unit 1 and Unit 2) 125 Volt DC Bus No. 22 (Unit 1 and Unit 2)
(1)
Each bus of the AC and DC Electrical Power Distribution System is a subsystem.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.9-10                        Revision 2


bus. The verification of proper voltage availability on the
Distribution Systems-Shutdown B 3.8.10 B 3.8  ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.10   Distribution Systems-Shutdown BASES BACKGROUND         A description of the AC, DC, and AC vital bus Electrical Power Distribution Systems is provided in the Bases for LCO 3.8.9.
 
buses ensures that the required voltage is readily available
 
for motive as well as control functions for critical system Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.9-9 Revision 2 loads connected to these buses. The seven day Frequency takes into account the redundant capability of the AC, DC, and AC vital bus electrical power distribution subsystems, and other indications available in the C ontrol R oom that alert the operator to subsystem malfunctions.
 
REFERENCES 1. UFSAR
: 2. Regulatory Guide 1.93, "Availability of Electric Power Sources," December 1974
 
Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.9-10 Revision 2 Table B 3.8.9-1 (page 1 of 1)
AC and DC Electrical Power Distribution Systems(1)  4160 Volt Emergency Bus No. 11 (Unit 1), No. 21 (Unit 2) 4160 Volt Emergency Bus No. 14 (Unit 1), No. 24 (Unit 2)
 
480 Volt Emergency Bus No. 11A (Unit 1), No. 21A (Unit 2)
 
480 Volt Emergency Bus No. 11B (Unit 1), No. 21B (Unit 2)
 
480 Volt Emergency Bus No. 14A (Unit 1), No. 24A (Unit 2)
 
480 Volt Emergency Bus No. 14B (Unit 1), No. 24B (Unit 2)
 
480 Volt Emergency Bus No. 104R (Unit 1), No. 204R (Unit 2)
 
480 Volt Emergency Bus No. 114R (Unit 1), No. 214R (Unit 2)
 
120 Volt AC Vital Bus No. 11 (Unit 1), No. 21 (Unit 2)
 
120 Volt AC Vital Bus No. 12 (Unit 1), No. 22 (Unit 2)
 
120 Volt AC Vital Bus No. 13 (Unit 1), No. 23 (Unit 2)
 
120 Volt AC Vital Bus No. 14 (Unit 1), No. 24 (Unit 2)
 
125 Volt DC Bus No. 11 (Unit 1 and Unit 2)
 
125 Volt DC Bus No. 12 (Unit 1 and Unit 2)
 
125 Volt DC Bus No. 21 (Unit 1 and Unit 2) 125 Volt DC Bus No. 22 (Unit 1 and Unit 2)
(1) Each bus of the AC and DC Electrical Power Distribution System is a subsystem.
 
Distribution Systems-Shutdown B 3.8.10 B 3.8  ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.10 Distribution Systems-Shutdown  
 
BASES CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.10-1 Revision 5 BACKGROUND A description of the AC, DC, and AC vital bus Electrical Power Distribution Systems is provided in the Bases for LCO 3.8.9.
The list of all required Distribution Systems-Shutdown is presented in Table B 3.8.10-1.
The list of all required Distribution Systems-Shutdown is presented in Table B 3.8.10-1.
APPLICABLE The initial conditions of a DBA and transient analyses in SAFETY ANALYSES Reference 1, Chapters 6 and 14, assume ESF systems are OPERABLE. The AC, DC, and AC vital bus Electrical Power  
APPLICABLE         The initial conditions of a DBA and transient analyses in SAFETY ANALYSES   Reference 1, Chapters 6 and 14, assume ESF systems are OPERABLE. The AC, DC, and AC vital bus Electrical Power Distribution Systems are designed to provide sufficient capacity, capability, redundancy, and reliability to ensure the availability of necessary power to ESF systems so that the fuel, RCS, and containment design limits are not exceeded.
 
The OPERABILITY of the AC, DC, and AC vital bus Electrical Power Distribution System is consistent with the initial assumptions of the accident analyses and the requirements for the supported systems' OPERABILITY.
Distribution Systems are designed to provide sufficient  
The OPERABILITY of the minimum AC, DC, and AC vital bus electrical power distribution subsystems during MODEs 5 and 6, and during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, ensures that:
 
: a. The unit can be maintained in the shutdown or refueling condition for extended periods;
capacity, capability, redundancy, and reliability to ensure  
: b. Sufficient instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit status; and
 
: c. Adequate power is provided to mitigate events postulated during shutdown, such as a fuel handling accident.
the availability of necessary power to ESF systems so that  
The AC and DC Electrical Power Distribution Systems satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), Criterion 3.
 
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2       B 3.8.10-1                        Revision 5
the fuel, RCS, and containment design limits are not  
 
exceeded.  
 
The OPERABILITY of the AC, DC, and AC vital bus Electrical Power Distribution System is consistent with the initial  
 
assumptions of the accident analyses and the requirements  
 
for the supported systems' OPERABILITY.  
 
The OPERABILITY of the minimum AC, DC, and AC vital bus electrical power distribution subsystems during MODEs 5  
 
and 6, and during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, ensures that: a. The unit can be maintained in the shutdown or refueling condition for extended periods; b. Sufficient instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit  
 
status; and c. Adequate power is provided to mitigate events postulated during shutdown, such as a fuel handling  
 
accident.  
 
The AC and DC Electrical Power Distribution Systems satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), Criterion 3.  
 
Distribution Systems-Shutdown B 3.8.10 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.10-2 Revision 5 LCO Various combinations of subsystems, equipment, and components are required OPERABLE by other LCOs, depending on
 
the specific unit condition. Implicit in those requirements
 
is the required OPERABILITY of necessary support required
 
features. This LCO explicitly requires energization of the
 
portions of the electrical distribution system necessary to support OPERABILITY of required systems, equipment, and components-all specifically addressed in each LCO and
 
implicitly required via the definition of OPERABILITY.
 
Maintaining these portions of the distribution system
 
energized ensures the availability of sufficient power to
 
operate the unit in a safe manner to mitigate the
 
consequences of postulated events during shutdown (e.g., fuel handling accidents).
APPLICABILITY The AC and DC electrical power distribution subsystems required to be OPERABLE in MODEs 5 and 6, and during
 
movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, provide assurance
 
that:  a. Systems to provide adequate coolant inventory makeup are available for the irradiated fuel in the core;  b. Systems needed to mitigate a fuel handling accident are available;  c. Systems necessary to mitigate the effects of events that can lead to core damage during shutdown are
 
available; and  d. Instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit in a cold shutdown
 
condition and refueling condition.


Distribution Systems-Shutdown B 3.8.10 BASES LCO              Various combinations of subsystems, equipment, and components are required OPERABLE by other LCOs, depending on the specific unit condition. Implicit in those requirements is the required OPERABILITY of necessary support required features. This LCO explicitly requires energization of the portions of the electrical distribution system necessary to support OPERABILITY of required systems, equipment, and components-all specifically addressed in each LCO and implicitly required via the definition of OPERABILITY.
Maintaining these portions of the distribution system energized ensures the availability of sufficient power to operate the unit in a safe manner to mitigate the consequences of postulated events during shutdown (e.g., fuel handling accidents).
APPLICABILITY    The AC and DC electrical power distribution subsystems required to be OPERABLE in MODEs 5 and 6, and during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, provide assurance that:
: a. Systems to provide adequate coolant inventory makeup are available for the irradiated fuel in the core;
: b. Systems needed to mitigate a fuel handling accident are available;
: c. Systems necessary to mitigate the effects of events that can lead to core damage during shutdown are available; and
: d. Instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit in a cold shutdown condition and refueling condition.
The AC, DC, and AC vital bus electrical power distribution subsystem requirements for MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 are covered in LCO 3.8.9.
The AC, DC, and AC vital bus electrical power distribution subsystem requirements for MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 are covered in LCO 3.8.9.
ACTIONS Limiting Condition for Operation 3.0.3 is not applicable while in MODEs 5 or 6. However, since irradiated fuel  
ACTIONS           Limiting Condition for Operation 3.0.3 is not applicable while in MODEs 5 or 6. However, since irradiated fuel assembly movement can occur in MODEs 1, 2, 3, or 4, the ACTIONS have been modified by a Note stating that LCO 3.0.3 is not applicable. If moving irradiated fuel assemblies while in MODEs 5 or 6, LCO 3.0.3 would not specify any CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2     B 3.8.10-2                         Revision 5
 
assembly movement can occur in MODEs 1, 2, 3, or 4, the  
 
ACTIONS have been modified by a Note stating that LCO 3.0.3  
 
is not applicable. If moving irradiated fuel assemblies  
 
while in MODEs 5 or 6, LCO 3.0.3 would not specify any Distribution Systems-Shutdown B 3.8.10 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.10-3 Revision 29 action. If moving irradiated fuel assemblies while in MODEs 1, 2, 3, or 4, the fuel movement is independent of
 
reactor operations. Therefore, in either case, inability to
 
suspend movement of irradiated fuel assemblies would not be
 
sufficient reason to require a reactor shutdown.
The ACTIONS have been modified by a second Note stating that performance of Required Actions shall not preclude
 
completion of actions to establish a safe conservative
 
position. This clarification is provided to avoid stopping
 
movement of irradiated fuel assemblies while in a non-
 
conservative position based on compliance with the Required
 
Actions.
A.1, A.2.1, A.2.2, A.2.3, and A.2.4  Although redundant required features may require redundant
 
trains of electrical power distribution subsystems to be
 
OPERABLE, one OPERABLE distribution subsystem train may be
 
capable of supporting sufficient required features to allow
 
continuation of movement of irradiated fuel assemblies. By allowing the option to declare required features associated
 
with an inoperable distribution subsystem inoperable, appropriate restrictions are implemented in accordance with
 
the affected distribution subsystems LCO's Required Actions. 
 
In many instances, this option may involve undesired
 
administrative efforts. Therefore, the allowance for
 
sufficiently conservative actions is made [i.e., to suspend movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, and operations
 
involving positive reactivity additions that could result in
 
loss of the required SDM (MODE 5) or boron concentration (MODE 6)]. Suspending positive reactivity additions that
 
could result in failure to meet the minimum SDM or boron
 
concentration limit is required to assure continued safe
 
operation. Introduction of coolant inventory must be from sources that have a boron concentration greater than that required in the RCS for the minimum SDM or refueling boron
 
concentration. This may result in an overall reduction in
 
RCS boron concentration, but provides an acceptable margin
 
to maintaining subcritical operation. Introduction of
 
temperature changes including temperature increases when
 
operating with a positive MTC must also be evaluated to
 
ensure they do not result is a loss of the required SDM.
Distribution Systems-Shutdown B 3.8.10 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.10-4 Revision 38 Suspension of these activities shall not preclude completion
 
of actions to establish a safe conservative condition. 
 
These actions minimize the probability of the occurrence of
 
postulated events. It is further required to immediately
 
initiate action to restore the required AC and DC electrical power distribution subsystems and to continue this action until restoration is accomplished in order to provide the
 
necessary power to the unit safety systems.
 
Notwithstanding performance of the above conservative
 
Required Actions, a required shutdown cooling (SDC)
 
subsystem may be inoperable. In this case, Required
 
Actions A.2.1 through A.2.
3 do not adequately address the concerns relating to coolant circulation and heat removal. 
 
Pursuant to LCO 3.0.6, the SDC ACTIONS would not be entered. 
 
Therefore, Required Action A.2.
4 is provided to direct declaring SDC inoperable, which results in taking the
 
appropriate SDC actions. The SDC subsystem(s) declared
 
inoperable and not in operation as a result of not meeting
 
this LCO, may be used if needed. However, the appropriate
 
actions are still required to be taken.
 
The Completion Time of immediately is consistent with the
 
required times for actions requiring prompt attention. The
 
restoration of the required distribution subsystems should
 
be completed as quickly as possible in order to minimize the time the unit safety systems may be without power.
SURVEILLANCE SR 3.8.10.1 REQUIREMENTS This SR verifies that the AC, DC, and AC vital bus Electrical Power Distribution System is functioning
 
properly, with all the buses energized. The verification of
 
proper voltage availability on the buses ensures that the
 
required power is readily available for motive as well as
 
control functions for critical system loads connected to
 
these buses. The seven day Frequency takes into account the
 
redundant capability of the electrical power distribution
 
subsystems, and other indications available in the Control Room that alert the operator to subsystem malfunctions.
 
Distribution Systems-Shutdown B 3.8.10 BASES  CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.10-5 Revision 19 REFERENCES 1. UFSAR


Distribution Systems-Shutdown B 3.8.10 BASES CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.10-6 Revision 19 Table B 3.8.10-1 (page 1 of 1)
Distribution Systems-Shutdown B 3.8.10 BASES action. If moving irradiated fuel assemblies while in MODEs 1, 2, 3, or 4, the fuel movement is independent of reactor operations. Therefore, in either case, inability to suspend movement of irradiated fuel assemblies would not be sufficient reason to require a reactor shutdown.
AC and DC Electrical Power Distribution Systems 1 4160 Volt Emergency Bus 1 480 Volt Emergency Bus
The ACTIONS have been modified by a second Note stating that performance of Required Actions shall not preclude completion of actions to establish a safe conservative position. This clarification is provided to avoid stopping movement of irradiated fuel assemblies while in a non-conservative position based on compliance with the Required Actions.
A.1, A.2.1, A.2.2, A.2.3, and A.2.4 Although redundant required features may require redundant trains of electrical power distribution subsystems to be OPERABLE, one OPERABLE distribution subsystem train may be capable of supporting sufficient required features to allow continuation of movement of irradiated fuel assemblies. By allowing the option to declare required features associated with an inoperable distribution subsystem inoperable, appropriate restrictions are implemented in accordance with the affected distribution subsystems LCO's Required Actions.
In many instances, this option may involve undesired administrative efforts. Therefore, the allowance for sufficiently conservative actions is made [i.e., to suspend movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, and operations involving positive reactivity additions that could result in loss of the required SDM (MODE 5) or boron concentration (MODE 6)]. Suspending positive reactivity additions that could result in failure to meet the minimum SDM or boron concentration limit is required to assure continued safe operation. Introduction of coolant inventory must be from sources that have a boron concentration greater than that required in the RCS for the minimum SDM or refueling boron concentration. This may result in an overall reduction in RCS boron concentration, but provides an acceptable margin to maintaining subcritical operation. Introduction of temperature changes including temperature increases when operating with a positive MTC must also be evaluated to ensure they do not result is a loss of the required SDM.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2     B 3.8.10-3                      Revision 29


2 120 Volt AC Vital Busses
Distribution Systems-Shutdown B 3.8.10 BASES Suspension of these activities shall not preclude completion of actions to establish a safe conservative condition.
These actions minimize the probability of the occurrence of postulated events. It is further required to immediately initiate action to restore the required AC and DC electrical power distribution subsystems and to continue this action until restoration is accomplished in order to provide the necessary power to the unit safety systems.
Notwithstanding performance of the above conservative Required Actions, a required shutdown cooling (SDC) subsystem may be inoperable. In this case, Required Actions A.2.1 through A.2.3 do not adequately address the concerns relating to coolant circulation and heat removal.
Pursuant to LCO 3.0.6, the SDC ACTIONS would not be entered.
Therefore, Required Action A.2.4 is provided to direct declaring SDC inoperable, which results in taking the appropriate SDC actions. The SDC subsystem(s) declared inoperable and not in operation as a result of not meeting this LCO, may be used if needed. However, the appropriate actions are still required to be taken.
The Completion Time of immediately is consistent with the required times for actions requiring prompt attention. The restoration of the required distribution subsystems should be completed as quickly as possible in order to minimize the time the unit safety systems may be without power.
SURVEILLANCE      SR 3.8.10.1 REQUIREMENTS This SR verifies that the AC, DC, and AC vital bus Electrical Power Distribution System is functioning properly, with all the buses energized. The verification of proper voltage availability on the buses ensures that the required power is readily available for motive as well as control functions for critical system loads connected to these buses. The seven day Frequency takes into account the redundant capability of the electrical power distribution subsystems, and other indications available in the Control Room that alert the operator to subsystem malfunctions.
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.10-4                      Revision 38


2 125 Volt DC Busses
Distribution Systems-Shutdown B 3.8.10 BASES REFERENCES        1. UFSAR CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.10-5                  Revision 19


2 125 Volt Battery Banks (one of which may be the reserve battery) (one associated battery charger per battery bank supplying the required DC busses)}}
Distribution Systems-Shutdown B 3.8.10 BASES Table B 3.8.10-1 (page 1 of 1)
AC and DC Electrical Power Distribution Systems 1    4160 Volt Emergency Bus 1    480 Volt Emergency Bus 2     120 Volt AC Vital Busses 2    125 Volt DC Busses 2    125 Volt Battery Banks (one of which may be the reserve battery) (one associated battery charger per battery bank supplying the required DC busses)
CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2      B 3.8.10-6                      Revision 19}}

Latest revision as of 21:28, 11 November 2019

Technical Specification Bases, Revisions 44 and 45, B 3.8, Electrical Power Systems
ML12284A257
Person / Time
Site: Calvert Cliffs  Constellation icon.png
Issue date: 10/02/2012
From:
Calvert Cliffs, Constellation Energy Nuclear Group
To:
Office of Nuclear Reactor Regulation
References
Download: ML12284A257 (93)


Text

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 B 3.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.1 AC Sources-Operating BASES BACKGROUND The AC sources to the Class 1E Electrical Power Distribution System consist of the offsite power sources starting at the 4.16 kV engineered safety feature (ESF) buses and the onsite diesel generators (DGs). As required by Reference 1, General Design Criteria (GDC) 17, the design of the AC electrical power system has sufficient independence and redundancy to ensure a source to the ESFs assuming a single failure.

The Class 1E AC Distribution System is divided into two redundant load groups so that the loss of one group does not prevent the minimum safety functions from being performed.

Each load group has connections to two offsite sources and one Class 1E DG at its 4.16 kV 1E bus.

Offsite power is supplied to the 500 kV Switchyard from the transmission network by three 500 kV transmission lines.

Two electrically and physically separated circuits supply electric power from the 500 kV Switchyard to two 13 kV buses and then to the two 4.16 kV ESF buses. A third 69 kV/

13.8 kV offsite power source that may be manually connected to either 13 kV bus is available from the Southern Maryland Electric Cooperative (SMECO). When appropriate, the Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) loss of coolant incident and shutdown sequencer for the 4.16 kV bus will sequence loads on the bus after the 69 kV/13.8 kV SMECO line has been manually placed in service. The SMECO offsite power source will not be used to carry loads for an operating unit. A detailed description of the offsite power network and the circuits to the Class 1E ESF buses, is found in Reference 2, Chapter 8.

The required offsite power circuits are the two 13 kV buses (Nos. 11 and 21) which can be powered by:

a. Two 500 kV lines, two 500 kV buses each of which have connections to a 500 kV line that does not pass through the other 500 kV bus and both P-13000 (500 kV/14 kV) transformers; or CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-1 Revision 5

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES

b. One 500 kV line, one 500 kV bus, and one associated P-13000 (500 kV/13.8 kV) transformer, and the 69 kV/

13.8 kV SMECO line. When the SMECO line is credited as one of the qualified offsite circuits, the disconnect from the SMECO line to Warehouse No. 1 must be open.

In addition, each offsite circuit includes the cabling to and from a 13.8/13.8 kV voltage regulator, 13.8/4.16 kV unit service transformer, and one of the two breakers to one 4.16 kV ESF bus. Transfer capability between the two required offsite circuits is by manual means only. The required circuit breaker to each 4.16 kV ESF bus must be from different 13.8/4.16 kV unit service transformers for the two required offsite circuits. Thus, each unit is able to align one 4.16 kV bus to one required offsite circuit, and the other 4.16 kV bus to the other required offsite circuit.

In some cases, inoperable components in the electrical circuit place both units in Conditions. Examples of these are 13.8 kV bus Nos. 11 or 21, two 500 kV transmission lines, one P-13000 service transformer, or one 500 kV bus.

In other cases, inoperable components only place one unit in a Condition, such as an inoperable U-4000 and/or 13.8 kV regulator that feeds a required 4.16 kV bus.

The onsite standby power source to each 4.16 kV ESF bus is a dedicated DG. A DG starts automatically on an safety injection actuation signal or on a 4.16 kV degraded or undervoltage signal. If both 4.16 kV offsite source breakers are open, the DG, after reaching rated voltage and frequency, will automatically close onto the 4.16 kV bus.

In the event of a loss of offsite power to a 4.16 kV 1E bus, if required, the ESF electrical loads will be automatically sequenced onto the DG in sufficient time to provide for safe shutdown for an anticipated operational occurrence (AOO) and to ensure that the containment integrity and other vital functions are maintained in the event of a design bases accident.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-2 Revision 12

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES Ratings for the No. 1A DG satisfies the requirements of Reference 3 and ratings for the Nos. 1B, 2A, and 2B DGs satisfy the requirements of Reference 4. The continuous service rating for the No. 1A DG is 5400 kW and for the Nos. 1B, 2A, and 2B DGs are 3000 kW.

APPLICABLE The initial conditions of Design Basis Accident (DBA) and SAFETY ANALYSES transient analyses in Reference 1, Chapters 6 and 14, assume ESF systems are OPERABLE. The AC electrical power sources are designed to provide sufficient capacity, capability, redundancy, and reliability to ensure the availability of necessary power to ESF systems so that the fuel, RCS, and containment design limits are not exceeded. These limits are discussed in more detail in the Bases for Sections 3.2, 3.4, and 3.6.

The OPERABILITY of the AC electrical power sources is consistent with the initial assumptions of the accident analyses and is based upon meeting the design basis of the unit. This results in maintaining at least one train of the onsite or offsite AC sources OPERABLE, during accident conditions in the event of:

a. An assumed loss of all offsite power; and
b. A single failure.

The AC sources satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), Criterion 3.

LCO Two qualified circuits between the offsite transmission network and the onsite Class 1E Electrical Power Distribution System and separate and independent DGs for each train ensure availability of the required power to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe shutdown condition after an AOO or a postulated DBA.

Qualified offsite circuits are those that are described in the Updated Final Safety Analysis Report (UFSAR) and are part of the licensing basis for the unit.

Each offsite circuit must be capable of maintaining rated frequency and voltage and accepting required loads during an accident, while connected to the ESF buses. Loads are immediately connected to the ESF buses when the buses are CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-3 Revision 2

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES powered from the 500 kV offsite circuits and, when powered from the 69/13.8 kV SMECO offsite circuit after being manually connected, the loads are sequenced onto the ESF bus utilizing the same sequencer used to sequence the loads onto the DG. The SMECO offsite circuit will not be used to carry loads for an operating unit.

The Limiting Condition for Operation (LCO) requires operability of two out of three qualified circuits between the transmission network and the onsite Class 1E AC Electrical Power Distribution System circuits. These circuits consist of two 500 kV circuits via 500 kV/14 kV and 13.8 kV/4.16 kV transformers and the 69 kV SMECO dedicated source (described in Reference 5) via 69 kV/13.8 kV and 13.8 kV/4.16 kV transformers. In addition, each offsite circuit includes one of the two breakers to one 4.16 kV ESF bus. The required circuit breaker to each 4.16 kV ESF bus must be from different 13.8/4.16 unit service transformers for the two required offsite circuits. Thus, each unit is able to align one 4.16 kV bus to one required offsite circuit, and the other 4.16 kV bus to the other required offsite circuit.

Each DG must be capable of starting, accelerating to rated speed and voltage, and connecting to its respective ESF bus on detection of bus undervoltage. This will be accomplished within 10 seconds. Each DG must also be capable of accepting required loads within the assumed loading sequence intervals, and continue to operate until offsite power can be restored to the ESF buses. These capabilities are required to be met from a variety of initial conditions such as DG in standby with the engine hot and DG in standby with the engine at ambient conditions. Additional DG capabilities must be demonstrated to meet required Surveillances, e.g., capability of the DG to reject a load 500 hp without tripping.

Proper sequencing of loads, including shedding of non-essential loads, is a required function for DG OPERABILITY in MODEs 1, 2, and 3.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-4 Revision 10

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES The AC sources in one train must be separate and independent (to the extent possible) of the AC sources in the other train. For the DGs, separation and independence are complete.

The Control Room Emergency Ventilation System (CREVS) and Control Room Emergency Temperature System (CRETS) are shared systems with one train of each system connected to an onsite Class 1E AC electrical power distribution subsystem from each unit. Limiting Condition for Operation 3.8.1.c requires one qualified circuit between the offsite transmission network and the other unit's onsite Class 1E AC electrical power distribution subsystems needed to supply power to the CREVS and CRETS to be OPERABLE and one DG from the other unit capable of supplying power to the CREVS and CRETS to be OPERABLE. The qualified circuit in LCO 3.8.1.c must be separate and independent (to the extent possible) of the qualified circuit which provides power to the other train of the CREVS and CRETS. These requirements, in conjunction with the requirements for the unit AC electrical power sources in LCO 3.8.1.a and LCO 3.8.1.b, ensure that power is available to two trains of the CREVS and CRETS.

APPLICABILITY The AC sources are required to be OPERABLE in MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 to ensure that:

a. Acceptable fuel design limits and reactor coolant pressure boundary limits, are not exceeded as a result of AOOs or abnormal transients; and
b. Adequate core cooling is provided and Containment OPERABILITY and other vital functions, are maintained in the event of a postulated DBA.

The AC power requirements for MODEs 5 and 6 are covered in LCO 3.8.2.

ACTIONS A Note prohibits the application of LCO 3.0.4.b to an inoperable DG. There is an increased risk associated with entering a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with an inoperable DG and the provisions of LCO 3.0.4.b, which allow entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met after performance of a risk assessment addressing CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-5 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES inoperable systems and components, should not be applied in this circumstance.

A.1 To ensure a highly reliable power source remains with the one required LCO 3.8.1.a offsite circuit inoperable, it is necessary to verify the OPERABILITY of the remaining required offsite circuits on a more frequent basis. Since the Required Action only specifies "perform," a failure of Surveillance Requirement (SR) 3.8.1.1 or SR 3.8.1.2 acceptance criteria does not result in a Required Action not met. However, if a second required circuit fails SR 3.8.1.1 or SR 3.8.1.2, the second offsite circuit is inoperable, and Condition D and/or G, as applicable, for the two offsite circuits inoperable, is entered.

A.2 Required Action A.2, which only applies if the train cannot be powered from an offsite source, is intended to provide assurance that an event coincident with a single failure of the associated DG will not result in a complete loss of safety function of critical redundant required features.

These features are powered from the redundant AC electrical power train(s). Single train systems may not be included.

The Completion Time for Required Action A.2 is intended to allow the operator time to evaluate and repair any discovered inoperabilities. This Completion Time also allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for beginning the allowed outage time "clock." In this Required Action, the Completion Time only begins on discovery that both:

a. The train has no offsite power supplying its loads; and
b. A required feature on another train is inoperable.

If at any time during the existence of Condition A (one required LCO 3.8.1.a offsite circuit inoperable) a redundant required feature subsequently becomes inoperable, this Completion Time begins to be tracked.

The Completion Time must be started if it is discovered that there is no offsite power to one train of the onsite CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-6 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES Class 1E Electrical Power Distribution System coincident with one or more inoperable required support or supported features (or both) that are associated with the other train that has offsite power. Twenty-four hours is acceptable because it minimizes risk while allowing time for restoration before subjecting the unit to transients associated with shutdown.

The remaining OPERABLE offsite circuits and DGs are adequate to supply electrical power to Train A and Train B of the onsite Class 1E Distribution System. The 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> Completion Time takes into account the component OPERABILITY of the redundant counterpart to the inoperable required feature.

Additionally, the 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.

A.3 Consistent with Reference 6, operation may continue in Condition A for a period that should not exceed 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />.

With one offsite circuit inoperable, the reliability of the offsite system is degraded, and the potential for a loss of offsite power is increased, with attendant potential for a challenge to the unit safety systems. In this Condition, however, the remaining OPERABLE offsite circuit and DGs are adequate to supply electrical power to the onsite Class 1E Distribution System.

The 72 hour8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.

The second Completion Time for Required Action A.3 establishes a limit on the maximum time allowed for any combination of required AC power sources to be inoperable during any single contiguous occurrence of failing to meet LCO 3.8.1.a or LCO 3.8.1.b. If Condition A is entered while, for instance, an LCO 3.8.1.b DG is inoperable, and that DG is subsequently returned OPERABLE, the LCO may already have been not met for up to 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />. This could lead to a total of 17 days, since initial failure to meet CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-7 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES LCO 3.8.1.a or LCO 3.8.1.b, to restore the offsite circuit.

At this time, a LCO 3.8.1.b DG could again become inoperable, the circuit restored OPERABLE, and an additional 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> (for a total of 20 days) allowed prior to complete restoration of LCOs 3.8.1.a and 3.8.1.b. The 17 day Completion Time provides a limit on the time allowed in a specified condition after discovery of failure to meet LCO 3.8.1.a or LCO 3.8.1.b. This limit is considered reasonable for situations in which Conditions A and B are entered concurrently. The "AND" connector between the 72 hour8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> and 17 day Completion Time means that both Completion Times apply simultaneously, and the more restrictive Completion Time must be met.

As in Required Action A.2, the Completion Time allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for beginning the allowed outage time "clock." This will result in establishing the "time zero" at the time that LCO 3.8.1.a or LCO 3.8.1.b was initially not met, instead of at the time Condition A was entered.

B.1 The 14 day Completion Time for Required Action B.5 is based on the OPERABILITY of both opposite-unit DGs and the availability of the 0C DG. The 0C DG is available to power the inoperable DG bus loads in the event of a station blackout or loss-of-offsite power. It is required to administratively verify both opposite-unit DGs OPERABLE and the 0C DG available within one hour and to continue this action once per 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> thereafter until restoration of the required DG is accomplished. This verification provides assurance that both opposite-unit DGs and the 0C DG are capable of supplying the onsite Class 1E AC Electrical Power Distribution System.

B.2 To ensure a highly reliable power source remains with an inoperable LCO 3.8.1.b DG, it is necessary to verify the availability of the offsite circuits on a more frequent basis. Since the Required Action only specifies "perform,"

a failure of SR 3.8.1.1 or SR 3.8.1.2 acceptance criteria does not result in a Required Action being not met.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-8 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES However, if a circuit fails to pass SR 3.8.1.1 or SR 3.8.1.2, it is inoperable. Upon offsite circuit inoperability, additional Conditions and Required Actions must then be entered.

B.3 Required Action B.3 is intended to provide assurance that a loss of offsite power, during the period that a LCO 3.8.1.b DG is inoperable, does not result in a complete loss of safety function of critical systems. These features are designed with redundant safety-related trains. Single train systems are not included. Redundant required feature failures consist of inoperable features with a train, redundant to the train that has an inoperable LCO 3.8.1.b DG.

The Completion Time for Required Action B.3 is intended to allow the operator time to evaluate and repair any discovered inoperabilities. This Completion Time also allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for beginning the allowed outage time "clock." In this Required Action, the Completion Time only begins on discovery that both:

a. An inoperable LCO 3.8.1.b DG exists; and
b. A required feature on another train is inoperable.

If at any time during the existence of this Condition (one LCO 3.8.1.b DG inoperable) a required feature subsequently becomes inoperable, this Completion Time begins to be tracked.

Discovering one required LCO 3.8.1.b DG inoperable coincident with one or more inoperable required support or supported features (or both) that are associated with the OPERABLE DGs, results in starting the Completion Time for the Required Action. Four hours from the discovery of these events existing concurrently, is acceptable because it minimizes risk while allowing time for restoration before subjecting the unit to transients associated with shutdown.

In this Condition, the remaining OPERABLE DGs and offsite circuits are adequate to supply electrical power to the CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-9 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES onsite Class 1E Distribution System. Thus, on a component basis, single failure protection for the required feature's function may have been lost; however, function has not been lost. The four hour Completion Time takes into account the OPERABILITY of the redundant counterpart to the inoperable required feature. Additionally, the four hour Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.

B.4.1 and B.4.2 Required Action B.4.1 provides an allowance to avoid unnecessary testing of OPERABLE DGs. If it can be determined that the cause of the inoperable DG does not exist on the OPERABLE DG(s), SR 3.8.1.3 does not have to be performed. If the cause of inoperability exists on other DG(s), the other DG(s) would be declared inoperable upon discovery and Condition E and/or I of LCO 3.8.1, as applicable, would be entered. Once the failure is repaired, the common cause failure no longer exists and Required Action B.4.1 is satisfied. If the cause of the initial inoperable DG cannot be confirmed not to exist on the remaining DG(s), performance of SR 3.8.1.3 suffices to provide assurance of continued OPERABILITY of the DG(s).

In the event the inoperable DG is restored to OPERABLE status prior to completing either B.4.1 or B.4.2, the corrective action program will continue to evaluate the common cause possibility. This continued evaluation, however, is no longer under the 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> constraint imposed while in Condition B.

Consistent with Reference 7, 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> is reasonable to confirm that the OPERABLE DG(s) is not affected by the same problem as the inoperable DG.

These Conditions (B.4.1 and B.4.2) do not address the availability of the 0C DG.

B.5 Operation may continue in Condition B for a period that should not exceed 14 days.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-10 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES Planned entry into this Required Action requires that a risk assessment be performed in accordance with a configuration risk management program (Reference 11). This ensures that a proceduralized probabilistic risk assessment-informed process is in place that assesses the overall impact of plant maintenance on plant risk prior to entering this Required Action for planned activities.

In Condition B, the remaining OPERABLE DGs, available 0C DG, and offsite circuits are adequate to supply electrical power to the onsite Class 1E Distribution System. The 14 day Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.

In addition to utilizing Calvert Cliffs Nuclear Power Plant's processes for evaluating risk, Reference 11, Calvert Cliffs will administratively limit DG OOS time to 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> for elective maintenance unless the following actions are completed:

a. Weather conditions will be evaluated prior to entering the extended DG Completion Time for elective maintenance. An extended DG Completion Time will not be entered for elective maintenance purposes if official weather forecasts are predicting severe conditions (tornado or thunderstorm warnings).
b. The condition of the offsite power supply will be evaluated prior to entering the extended DG Completion Time.
c. No elective maintenance will be performed in the switchyard, on the 4 kV Distribution System, or on the 13 kV Distribution System.
d. No maintenance or testing that affects the reliability of the train associated with the operable DG on the affected unit will be scheduled during the extended DG Completion Time. If any testing or maintenance activities, which affects the train reliability must be performed while the extended DG Completion Time is in effect, a 10 CFR 50.65(a)(4) evaluation will be performed.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-11 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES

e. Elective maintenance will not be performed on the alternate AC power source (0C DG). Personnel will be made aware of the dedication of the alternate AC source to the affected Unit.
f. Planned maintenance will not be performed on the Auxiliary Feedwater System.
g. The system dispatcher (System Operations and Maintenance Department) will be contacted prior to removing the DG from service and after it has been returned to service.
h. The operations crews will be briefed concerning the Unit activities, including compensatory measures established and the importance of promptly starting and aligning the alternate AC source (0C DG).
i. The on-shift operations crew will discuss and review the appropriate normal and emergency operating procedures prior to or shortly after assuming the watch for the first time after having scheduled days off while the extended DG Completion Time is in effect.
j. The condition of the grid will be evaluated prior to entering the extended DG 3.8.1 Condition B Completion Time for elective maintenance. An extended DG Completion Time will not be entered to perform elective maintenance when grid stress conditions are considered High per plant procedures. This will include conditions such as expected extreme summer temperatures and/or high demand.

The second Completion Time for Required Action B.5 establishes a limit on the maximum time allowed for any combination of required AC power sources to be inoperable during any single contiguous occurrence of failing to meet LCO 3.8.1.a or LCO 3.8.1.b. If Condition B is entered while, for instance, an LCO 3.8.1.a offsite circuit is inoperable and that circuit is subsequently returned OPERABLE, the LCO may already have not been met for up to 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />. This could lead to a total of 17 days, since initial failure to meet LCO 3.8.1.a or LCO 3.8.1.b, to restore the DG. At this time, a LCO 3.8.1.a offsite circuit could again become inoperable, the DG restored OPERABLE, and an additional 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> (for a total of 20 days) allowed CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-12 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES prior to complete restoration of LCO 3.8.1.a and LCO 3.8.1.b. The 17 day Completion Time provides a limit on time allowed in a specified condition after discovery of failure to meet LCO 3.8.1.a or LCO 3.8.1.b. This limit is considered reasonable for situations in which Conditions A and B are entered concurrently. The "AND" connector between the 14 day and 17 day Completion Times means that both Completion Times apply simultaneously, and the more restrictive Completion Time must be met.

As in Required Action B.3, the Completion Time allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for beginning the allowed time "clock." This will result in establishing the "time zero" at the time that LCO 3.8.1.a or LCO 3.8.1.b was initially not met, instead of at the time Condition B was entered.

C.1.1 and C.1.2 In Condition C with an opposite-unit DG inoperable and/or the 0C DG unavailable, the remaining OPERABLE unit-specific DG and required qualified circuits are adequate to supply electrical power to the onsite Class 1E Distribution System.

Consistent with Reference 6, operation may continue in Condition C for a period that should not exceed 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />.

The 72 hour8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.

D.1 Pursuant to LCO 3.0.6, the Distribution System ACTIONS would not be entered even if all AC sources to it, were inoperable resulting in de-energization. Therefore, the Required Actions of Condition D are modified by a Note to indicate that when Condition D is entered with no AC source to any train, the Conditions and Required Actions for LCO 3.8.9, must be immediately entered. This allows Condition D to provide requirements for the loss of the LCO 3.8.1.c offsite circuit and DG without regard to whether a train is de-energized. Limiting Condition for Operation 3.8.9 provides the appropriate restrictions for a de-energized train.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-13 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES To ensure a highly reliable power source remains with the one required LCO 3.8.1.c offsite circuit inoperable, it is necessary to verify the OPERABILITY of the remaining required offsite circuits on a more frequent basis. Since the Required Action only specifies "perform," a failure of SR 3.8.1.1 or SR 3.8.1.2 acceptance criteria does not result in a Required Action not met. However, if a second required circuit fails SR 3.8.1.1 or SR 3.8.1.2, the second offsite circuit is inoperable, and Condition A and/or G, as applicable, for the two offsite circuits inoperable, is entered.

D.2 Required Action D.2, which only applies if the train cannot be powered from an offsite source, is intended to provide assurance that an event coincident with a single failure of the associated DG will not result in a complete loss of safety function for the CREVS or CRETS. The Completion Time for Required Action D.2 is intended to allow the operator time to evaluate and repair any discovered inoperabilities.

This Completion Time also allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for beginning the allowed outage time "clock." In this Required Action, the Completion Time only begins on discovery that both:

a. The train has no offsite power supplying its loads; and
b. A train of CREVS or CRETS on the other train is inoperable.

If at any time during the existence of Condition D (one required LCO 3.8.1.c offsite circuit inoperable) a train of CREVS or CRETS becomes inoperable, this Completion Time begins to be tracked.

Discovering no offsite power to one train of the onsite Class 1E Electrical Power Distribution System coincident with one train of CREVS or CRETS that is associated with the other train that has offsite power, results in starting the Completion Times for the Required Action. Twenty-four hours is acceptable because it minimizes risk while allowing time for restoration before subjecting the unit to transients associated with shutdown.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-14 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES The remaining OPERABLE offsite circuits and DGs are adequate to supply electrical power to Train A and Train B of the onsite Class 1E Distribution System. The 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> Completion Time takes into account the component OPERABILITY of the redundant counterpart to the inoperable CREVS or CRETS.

Additionally, the 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.

D.3 Consistent with the time provided in ACTION A, operation may continue in Condition D for a period that should not exceed 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />. With one required LCO 3.8.1.c offsite circuit inoperable, the reliability of the offsite system is degraded, and the potential for a loss of offsite power is increased, with attendant potential for a challenge to the unit safety systems. In this Condition, however, the remaining OPERABLE offsite circuits and DGs are adequate to supply electrical power to the onsite Class 1E Distribution System.

If the LCO 3.8.1.c required offsite circuit cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />, the CREVS and CRETS associated with the offsite circuit must be declared inoperable. The ACTIONS associated with the CREVS and CRETS will ensure the appropriate actions are taken. The 72 hour8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.

E.1 The 14 day Completion Time for Required Action E.5 is based on the OPERABILITY of the other three safety-related DGs and the availability of the 0C DG. The 0C DG is available to power the inoperable DG bus loads in the event of a station blackout or loss-of-offsite power. It is required to administratively verify the three safety-related DGs OPERABLE and the 0C DG available within one hour and to continue this action once per 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> thereafter until restoration of the required DG is accomplished. This CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-15 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES verification provides assurance that the three safety-related DGs and the 0C DG are capable of supplying the onsite Class 1E AC Electrical Power Distribution System.

E.2 Pursuant to LCO 3.0.6, the Distribution System ACTIONS would not be entered even if all AC sources to it, were inoperable resulting in de-energization. Therefore, the Required Actions of Condition E are modified by a Note to indicate that when Condition E is entered with no AC source to any train, the Conditions and Required Actions for LCO 3.8.9 must be immediately entered. This allows Condition E to provide requirements for the loss of the LCO 3.8.1.c offsite circuit and DG without regard to whether a train is de-energized. Limiting Condition for Operation 3.8.9 provides the appropriate restrictions for a de-energized train.

To ensure a highly reliable power source remains with the one required LCO 3.8.1.c DG inoperable, it is necessary to verify the availability of the required offsite circuits on a more frequency basis. Since the Required Action only specifies "perform," a failure of SR 3.8.1.1 or SR 3.8.1.2 acceptance criteria does not result in a Required Action not met. However, if a circuit fails to pass SR 3.8.1.1 or SR 3.8.1.2, it is inoperable. Upon offsite circuit inoperability additional Conditions and Required Actions must then be entered.

E.3 Required Action E.3 is intended to provide assurance that a loss of offsite power, during the period the LCO 3.8.1.c DG is inoperable, does not result in a complete loss of safety function for the CREVS or CRETS. The Completion Time is intended to allow the operator time to evaluate and repair any discovered inoperabilities. This Completion Time also allows for an exception to the normal time zero for beginning the allowed outage time clock. In this Required Action, the Completion Time only begins on discovery that both:

a. An inoperable LCO 3.8.1.c DG exists; and
b. A train of CREVS or CRETS on the other train is inoperable.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-16 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES If at any time during the existence of this Condition (the LCO 3.8.1.c DG inoperable) a train of CREVS or CRETS becomes inoperable, this Completion Time begins to be tracked.

Discovering the LCO 3.8.1.c DG inoperable coincident with one train of CREVS or CRETS that is associated with the one LCO 3.8.1.b DG results in starting the Completion Time for the Required Action. Four hours from the discovery of these events existing concurrently, is acceptable because it minimizes risk while allowing time for restoration before subjecting the unit to transients associated with shutdown.

In this Condition, the remaining OPERABLE DGs and offsite circuits are adequate to supply electrical power to the onsite Class 1E Distribution System. Thus, on a component basis, single failure protection for the CREVS or CRETS may have been lost; however, function has not been lost. The four hour Completion Time also takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining CREVS and CRETS train, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.

E.4.1 and E.4.2 Required Action E.4.1 provides an allowance to avoid unnecessary testing of OPERABLE DGs. If it can be determined that the cause of the inoperable DG does not exist on the OPERABLE DG(s), SR 3.8.1.3 does not have to be performed. If the cause of inoperability exists on other DG(s), the other DG(s) would be declared inoperable upon discovery and Condition B and/or I of LCO 3.8.1, as applicable, would be entered. Once the failure is repaired, the common cause failure no longer exists and Required Action E.4.1 is satisfied. If the cause of the initial inoperable DG cannot be confirmed not to exist on the remaining DG(s), performance of SR 3.8.1.3 suffices to provide assurance of continued OPERABILITY of the DG(s).

In the event the inoperable DG is restored to OPERABLE status prior to completing either E.4.1 or E.4.2, the corrective action program will continue to evaluate the common cause possibility. This continued evaluation, CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-17 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES however, is no longer under the 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> constraint imposed while in Condition E.

Consistent with Reference 6, 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> is reasonable to confirm that the OPERABLE DG(s) is not affected by the same problem as the inoperable DG.

These Conditions (E.4.1 and E.4.2) do not address the availability of the 0C DG.

E.5 Consistent with the time provided in ACTION B, operation may continue in Condition E for a period that should not exceed 14 days. In Condition E, the remaining OPERABLE DGs, available 0C DG, and offsite power circuits are adequate to supply electrical power to the Class 1E Distribution System.

If the LCO 3.8.1.c DG cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within 14 days the CREVS and CRETS associated with this DG must be declared inoperable. The Actions associated with the CREVS and CRETS will ensure the appropriate Actions are taken.

The 14 day Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.

F.1.1 and F.1.2 In Condition F, with an additional safety-related DG inoperable or the 0C DG unavailable, the remaining OPERABLE DG and required qualified circuits are adequate to supply electrical power to the onsite Class 1E Distribution System.

Consistent with Reference 6, operation may continue in Condition F for a period that should not exceed 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />.

The 72 hour8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-18 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES F.1.3 If the LCO 3.8.1.c DG cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> the CREVS and CRETS associated with this DG must be declared inoperable. The Required Actions associated with the CREVS and CRETS will ensure that the appropriate actions are taken.

The 72 hour8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.

G.1 and G.2 Condition G is entered when both offsite circuits required by LCO 3.8.1.a are inoperable, or when the offsite circuit required by LCO 3.8.1.c and one offsite circuit required by LCO 3.8.1.a are concurrently inoperable, if the LCO 3.8.1.a offsite circuit is credited with providing power to the CREVS and CRETS.

Required Action G.1 is intended to provide assurance that an event with a coincident single failure will not result in a complete loss of redundant required safety functions. The Completion Time for this failure of redundant required features is reduced to 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> from that allowed for one train without offsite power (Required Action A.2). The rationale for the reduction to 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> is that Reference 6 allows a Completion Time of 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> for two required offsite circuits inoperable, based upon the assumption that two complete safety trains are OPERABLE. When a concurrent redundant required feature failure exists, this assumption is not the case, and a shorter Completion Time of 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> is appropriate. These features are powered from redundant AC safety trains. Single train features are not included in the list.

The Completion Time for Required Action G.1 is intended to allow the operator time to evaluate and repair any discovered inoperabilities. This Completion Time also allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for beginning the allowed outage time "clock." In this Required CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-19 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES Action, the Completion Time only begins on discovery that both:

a. Two required offsite circuits are inoperable; and
b. A required feature is inoperable.

If at any time during the existence of Condition G (e.g., two required LCO 3.8.1.a offsite circuits inoperable) and a required feature becomes inoperable, this Completion Time begins to be tracked.

Consistent with Reference 6, operation may continue in Condition G for a period that should not exceed 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />.

This level of degradation means that the offsite electrical power system does not have the capability to effect a safe shutdown and to mitigate the effects of an accident; however, the onsite AC sources have not been degraded. This level of degradation could correspond to a total loss of the immediately accessible offsite power sources.

Because of the normally high availability of the offsite sources, this level of degradation may appear to be more severe than other combinations of two AC sources inoperable that involve one or more DGs inoperable. However, two factors tend to decrease the severity of this level of degradation:

a. The configuration of the redundant AC electrical power system that remains available is not susceptible to a single bus or switching failure; and
b. The time required to detect and restore an unavailable offsite power source is generally much less than that required to detect and restore an unavailable onsite AC source.

With two of the required offsite circuits inoperable, sufficient onsite AC sources are available to maintain the unit in a safe shutdown condition in the event of a DBA or transient. In fact, a simultaneous loss of offsite AC sources, a loss of coolant accident, and a worst case single failure were postulated as a part of the design basis in the safety analysis. Thus, the 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> Completion Time provides a period of time to effect restoration of one of the offsite circuits commensurate with the importance of maintaining an CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-20 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES AC electrical power system capable of meeting its design criteria.

Consistent with Reference 6, with the available offsite AC sources two less than required by the LCO, operation may continue for 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />. If two offsite sources are restored within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />, unrestricted operation may continue. If only one offsite source is restored within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />, power operation continues in accordance with Condition A or D, as applicable.

H.1 and H.2 Pursuant to LCO 3.0.6, the Distribution System ACTIONS would not be entered even if all AC sources to it were inoperable resulting in de-energization. Therefore, the Required Actions of Condition H are modified by a Note to indicate that when Condition H is entered with no AC source to any train, the Conditions and Required Actions for LCO 3.8.9, must be immediately entered. This allows Condition H to provide requirements for the loss of one required LCO 3.8.1.a offsite circuit and one LCO 3.8.1.b DG without regard to whether a train is de-energized. Limiting Condition for Operation 3.8.9 provides the appropriate restrictions for a de-energized train.

Consistent with Reference 6, operation may continue in Condition H for a period that should not exceed 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />.

In Condition H, individual redundancy is lost in both the offsite electrical power system and the onsite AC electrical power system. Since power system redundancy is provided by two diverse sources of power, however, the reliability of the power systems in this Condition may appear higher than that in Condition G (loss of two required offsite circuits).

This difference in reliability is offset by the susceptibility of this power system configuration to a single bus or switching failure. The 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> Completion Time takes into account the capacity and capability of the remaining AC sources, a reasonable time for repairs, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-21 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES I.1 With two LCO 3.8.1.b DGs inoperable, there are no remaining standby AC sources to provide power to most of the ESF systems. With one LCO 3.8.1.c DG inoperable and the LCO 3.8.1.b DG that provides power to the CREVS and CRETS inoperable, there are no remaining standby AC sources to the CREVS and CRETS. Thus, with an assumed loss of offsite electrical power, insufficient standby AC sources are available to power the minimum required ESF functions.

Since the offsite electrical power system is the only source of AC power for this level of degradation, the risk associated with continued operation for a short time could be less than that associated with an immediate controlled shutdown (the immediate shutdown could cause grid instability, which could result in a total loss of AC power). Since any inadvertent generator trip could also result in a total loss of offsite AC power, however, the time allowed for continued operation is severely restricted.

The intent here is to avoid the risk associated with an immediate controlled shutdown and to minimize the risk associated with this level of degradation.

Consistent with Reference 6, with both LCO 3.8.1.b DGs inoperable, or with the LCO 3.8.1.b DG that provides power to the CREVS and CRETS and the LCO 3.8.1.c DG inoperable, operation may continue for a period that should not exceed 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br />.

J.1 and J.2 If any Required Action and associated Completion Time of Conditions A, B.2, B.3, B.4.1, B.4.2, B.5, C, E.2, E.3, E.4.1, E.4.2, E.5, F, G, H, or I are not met, the unit must be brought to a MODE in which the LCO does not apply. To achieve this status, the unit must be brought to at least MODE 3 within six hours and to MODE 5 within 36 hours4.166667e-4 days <br />0.01 hours <br />5.952381e-5 weeks <br />1.3698e-5 months <br />. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required unit conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-22 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES K.1 Condition K corresponds to a level of degradation in which all redundancy in LCO 3.8.1.a and LCO 3.8.1.b AC electrical power supplies has been lost. At this severely degraded level, any further losses in the AC electrical power system will cause a loss of function. Therefore, no additional time is justified for continued operation. The unit is required by LCO 3.0.3 to commence a controlled shutdown.

SURVEILLANCE The AC sources are designed to permit inspection and REQUIREMENTS testing of all important areas and features, especially those that have a standby function, in accordance with Reference 1, GDC 18. Periodic component tests are supplemented by extensive functional tests during refueling outages (under simulated accident conditions). The SRs for demonstrating the OPERABILITY of the DGs are consistent with the recommendations of Reference 3, or Reference 4, and Reference 8.

When the SRs discussed herein specify voltage and frequency tolerances, the following is applicable. The minimum transient output voltage of 3740 V is 90% of the nominal 4160 V output voltage. This value allows for voltage drop to the terminals of 4000 V motors whose minimum operating voltage is specified as 90% or 3600 V. The specified maximum output voltage of 4400 V is equal to the maximum operating voltage specified for 4000 V motors. It ensures that for a lightly loaded distribution system, the voltage at the terminals of 4000 V is no more than the maximum rated operating voltages. The specified minimum and maximum frequencies of the DG are 58.8 Hz and 61.2 Hz, respectively.

These values are equal to +/- 2% of the 60 Hz nominal frequency and are the recommendations given in Reference 3.

The SRs are modified by a Note which states that SR 3.8.1.1 through SR 3.8.1.15 are applicable to LCO 3.8.1.a and LCO 3.8.1.b AC Sources. The Note also states that SR 3.8.1.16 is applicable to LCO 3.8.1.c AC sources. This Note clarifies that not all of the SRs are applicable to all the components described in the LCO.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-23 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES SR 3.8.1.1 and SR 3.8.1.2 These SRs assure proper circuit continuity for the offsite AC electrical power supply to the onsite distribution network and availability of offsite AC electrical power.

The breaker alignment verifies that each breaker is in its correct position to ensure that distribution buses and loads are connected to their preferred power source, and that appropriate independence of offsite circuits is maintained.

The Frequency of once within one hour after substitution for a 500 kV circuit and every eight hours thereafter, for SR 3.8.1.1 was established to ensure that the breaker alignment for the SMECO circuit (which does not have Control Room indication) is in its correct position although breaker position is unlikely to change. The seven day Frequency for SR 3.8.1.2 is adequate since the 500 kV circuit breaker position is not likely to change without the operator being aware of it and because its status is displayed in the Control Room.

Surveillance Requirement 3.8.1.1 is modified by a Note which states that this SR is only required when SMECO is being credited for an offsite source. This SR will prevent unnecessary testing on an uncredited circuit.

SR 3.8.1.3 and SR 3.8.1.9 These SRs help to ensure the availability of the standby electrical power supply to mitigate DBAs and transients and to maintain the unit in a safe shutdown condition.

To minimize the wear on moving parts that do not get lubricated when the engine is not running, these SRs are modified by a Note (Note 2 for SR 3.8.1.3) to indicate that all DG starts for these surveillance tests may be preceded by an engine prelube period and followed by a warmup period prior to loading by an engine prelube period.

For the purposes of SR 3.8.1.9 testing, the DGs are required to start from standby conditions only for SR 3.8.1.9.

Standby conditions for a DG mean the diesel engine coolant and oil are being continuously circulated and temperature is being maintained consistent with manufacturer recommendations.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-24 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES In order to reduce stress and mechanical wear on diesel engines, the DG manufacturers recommend a modified start in which the starting speed of DGs is limited, warmup is limited to this lower speed, and the DGs are gradually accelerated to synchronous speed prior to loading. This is the intent of Note 3, which is only applicable when such modified start procedures are recommended by the manufacturer.

Surveillance Requirement 3.8.1.9 requires that, at a 184 day Frequency, the DG starts from standby conditions and achieves required voltage and frequency within 10 seconds.

The minimum voltage and frequency stated in the SR are those necessary to ensure the DG can accept DBA loading while maintaining acceptable voltage and frequency levels. The 10 second start requirement supports the assumptions of the design basis loss of coolant accident analysis in Reference 2, Chapter 14.

Since SR 3.8.1.9 requires a 10 second start, it is more restrictive than SR 3.8.1.3, and it may be performed in lieu of SR 3.8.1.3.

The 31 day Frequency for SR 3.8.1.3 is consistent with Reference 4 and Reference 3. The 184 day Frequency for SR 3.8.1.9 is a reduction in cold testing consistent with Reference 7. This Frequency provides adequate assurance of DG OPERABILITY, while minimizing degradation resulting from testing.

SR 3.8.1.4 This SR verifies that the DGs are capable of synchronizing with the offsite electrical system and accepting loads greater than or equal to 4000 kW for No. 1A DG and greater than or equal to 90% of the continuous duty rating for the remaining DGs. The 90% minimum load limit is consistent with Reference 3 and is acceptable because testing of these DGs at post-accident load values is performed by SR 3.8.1.11. A minimum run time of 60 minutes is required to stabilize engine temperatures, while minimizing the time that the DG is connected to the offsite source.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-25 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES Although no power factor requirements are established by this SR, the DG is normally operated at a power factor between 0.8 lagging and 1.0. The 0.8 value is the design rating of the machine, while 1.0 is an operational limitation. The 31-day Frequency for this SR is consistent with Reference 3.

This SR is modified by four Notes. Note 1 indicates that the diesel engine runs for this surveillance test may include gradual loading, as recommended by the manufacturer, so that mechanical stress and wear on the diesel engine are minimized. Note 2 states that momentary transients because of changing bus loads do not invalidate this test. Note 3 indicates that this surveillance test shall be conducted on only one DG at a time in order to prevent routinely paralleling multiple DGs and to minimize the potential for effects from offsite circuit or grid perturbations. Note 4 stipulates a prerequisite requirement for performance of this SR. A successful DG start must precede this test to credit satisfactory performance.

SR 3.8.1.5 This SR provides verification that the level of fuel oil in the day tank is at or above the level at which fuel oil is automatically added. The level required by the SR is expressed as an equivalent volume in gallons, and is selected to ensure adequate fuel oil for a minimum of one hour of DG operation at full load plus 10%.

The 31-day Frequency is adequate to assure that a sufficient supply of fuel oil is available, since low level alarms are provided, and unit operators would be aware of any large uses of fuel oil during this period.

SR 3.8.1.6 Microbiological fouling is a major cause of fuel oil degradation. There are numerous bacteria that can grow in fuel oil and cause fouling, but all must have a water environment in order to survive. Removal of water from the fuel oil day tanks once every 31 days eliminates the necessary environment for bacterial survival. This is the most effective means of controlling microbiological fouling.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-26 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES In addition, it eliminates the potential for water entrainment in the fuel oil during DG operation. Water may come from any of several sources, including condensation, ground water, rain water, contaminated fuel oil, and from breakdown of the fuel oil by bacteria. Frequent checking for and removal of accumulated water minimizes fouling and provides data regarding the watertight integrity of the fuel oil system. The SR Frequencies are consistent with Reference 8. This SR is for preventive maintenance. The presence of water does not necessarily represent failure of this SR provided the accumulated water is removed during the performance of this surveillance test.

SR 3.8.1.7 This SR demonstrates that one fuel oil transfer pump operates and transfers fuel oil from its associated storage tank to its associated day tank. This is required to support continuous operation of standby power sources. This SR provides assurance that the fuel oil transfer pump is OPERABLE, the fuel oil piping system is intact, the fuel delivery piping is not obstructed, and the controls and control systems for automatic fuel transfer systems are OPERABLE.

The Frequency for this SR is 31 days. The 31-day Frequency corresponds to the design of the fuel transfer system. The design of fuel transfer systems is such that pumps will operate automatically or must be started manually in order to maintain an adequate volume of fuel oil in the day tanks during or following DG testing. In such a case, a 31-day Frequency is appropriate.

SR 3.8.1.8 Under accident and loss of offsite power conditions loads are sequentially connected to the bus by the automatic load sequencer (this SR verifies steps 1 through 5). The sequencing logic controls the permissive and closing signals to breakers to prevent overloading of the DGs due to high motor starting currents. The 10% load sequence time interval tolerance ensures that sufficient time exists for the DG to restore frequency and voltage prior to applying the next load, and that safety analysis assumptions CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-27 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES regarding ESF equipment time delays are not violated. The UFSAR provides a summary of the automatic loading of ESF buses.

The Frequency of 31 days is consistent with DG monthly testing and is sufficient to ensure the load sequencer operation as required.

SR 3.8.1.9 See SR 3.8.1.3.

SR 3.8.1.10 Transfer of each 4.16 kV ESF bus power supply from the normal offsite circuit to the alternate offsite circuit demonstrates the OPERABILITY of the alternate circuit distribution network to power the shutdown loads. The 24 month Frequency of the Surveillance is based on engineering judgment, taking into consideration the unit conditions required to perform the Surveillance, and is intended to be consistent with expected fuel cycle lengths.

Operating experience has shown that these components usually pass the SR when performed at the 24 month Frequency.

Therefore, the Frequency was concluded to be acceptable from a reliability standpoint.

SR 3.8.1.11 This SR provides verification that the DG can be operated at a load greater than predicted accident loads for at least 60 minutes once per 24 months. Operation at the greater than calculated accident loads will clearly demonstrate the ability of the DGs to perform their safety function. In order to ensure that the DG is tested under load conditions that are as close to design conditions as possible, testing must be performed using a DG load greater than or equal to calculated accident load and using a power factor 0.85.

This power factor is chosen to be representative of the actual design basis inductive loading that the DG could experience. In addition, the post-accident load for No. 1A DG is significantly lower than the continuous rating of No. 1A DG. To ensure No. 1A DG performance is not degraded, routine monitoring of engine parameters should be performed CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-28 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES during the performance of this SR for No. 1A DG (Reference 9).

This SR is modified by a Note which states that momentary transients due to changing bus loads do not invalidate this test. Similarly, momentary power factor transients above the limit will not invalidate the test. The 24 month Frequency is adequate to ensure DG OPERABILITY and it is consistent with the refueling interval.

SR 3.8.1.12 Each DG is provided with an engine overspeed trip to prevent damage to the engine. Recovery from the transient caused by the loss of a large load could cause diesel engine overspeed, which, if excessive, might result in a trip of the engine. This SR demonstrates the DG load response characteristics. This SR is accomplished by tripping the DG output breaker with the DG carrying greater than or equal to its associated single largest post-accident load while paralleled to offsite power.

Consistent with References 10, 3, and 4, the load rejection test is acceptable if the increase in diesel speed does not exceed 75% of the difference between synchronous speed and the overspeed trip setpoint, or 15% above synchronous speed, whichever is lower.

The 24 month Frequency is consistent with the Reference 2, Chapter 8.

SR 3.8.1.13 This SR demonstrates that DG non-critical protective functions are bypassed on a required actuation signal. This SR is accomplished by verifying the bypass contact changes to the correct state which prevents actuation of the non-critical function. The non-critical protective functions are consistent with References 3 and 4, and Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)-387 and are listed in Reference 2, Chapter 8. Verifying the non-critical trips are bypassed will ensure DG operation during a required actuation. The non-critical trips are bypassed during DBAs and provide an alarm on an abnormal engine CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-29 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES condition. A failure of the electronic governor results in the diesel generator operating in hydraulic mode. This alarm provides the operator with sufficient time to react appropriately. The DG availability to mitigate the DBA is more critical than protecting the engine against minor problems that are not immediately detrimental to emergency operation of the DG.

The 24 month Frequency is based on engineering judgment, taking into consideration unit conditions required to perform the surveillance test, and is intended to be consistent with expected fuel cycle lengths. Operating experience has shown that these components usually pass the SR when performed at the 24 month Frequency. Therefore, the Frequency was concluded to be acceptable from a reliability standpoint. This Frequency is consistent with Reference 2, Chapter 8.

SR 3.8.1.14 This SR ensures that the manual synchronization and load transfer from the DG to the offsite source can be made and that the DG can be returned to ready-to-load status when offsite power is restored. The DG is considered to be in ready-to-load status when the DG is at rated speed and voltage, the output breaker is open and can receive an auto-close signal on bus undervoltage, and the load sequence timers are reset.

The Frequency of 24 months takes into consideration unit conditions required to perform the surveillance test.

SR 3.8.1.15 In the event of a DBA coincident with a loss of offsite power, the DGs are required to supply the necessary power to ESF systems so that the fuel, RCS, and containment design limits are not exceeded.

This SR demonstrates the DG operation during a loss of offsite power actuation test signal in conjunction with an ESF (i.e., safety injection) actuation signal. In lieu of actual demonstration of connection and loading of loads, testing that adequately shows the capability of the DG CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-30 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES system to perform these functions is acceptable. This testing may include any series of sequential, overlapping, or total steps so that the entire connection and loading sequence is verified.

It is not necessary to energize loads which are dependent on temperature to load (i.e., heat tracing, switchgear HVAC compressor, computer room HVAC compressor). Also, it is acceptable to transfer the instrument AC bus to the non tested train to maintain safe operation of the plant during testing. Loads (both permanent and auto connect) < 15 kW do not require loading onto the diesel since these are insignificant loads for the DG.

Permanently- and auto-connected loads to the emergency diesel generators are defined as follows:

Permanently-Connected Load - Equipment that is not shed by an undervoltage or safety injection actuation signal and is normally operating, i.e., loads that are manually started, selected, or process signal controlled are not considered permanently-connected loads.

Auto-Connected Loads - Emergency equipment required for mitigating the events described in UFSAR Chapter 14 that are energized by loss-of-coolant incident sequencer actions after step zero and within the first minute of emergency diesel generator operation after the initiation of an undervoltage signal.

The Frequency of 24 months takes into consideration unit conditions required to perform the surveillance test and is intended to be consistent with an expected fuel cycle length of 24 months.

This SR is modified by a Note. The reason for the Note is to minimize mechanical wear and stress on the DGs during testing. For the purpose of this testing, the DGs must be started from standby conditions, that is, with the engine coolant and oil continuously circulated and temperature maintained consistent with manufacturer recommendations for DGs.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-31 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES SR 3.8.1.16 This SR lists the SRs that are applicable to the LCO 3.8.1.c (SRs 3.8.1.1, 3.8.1.2, 3.8.1.3, 3.8.1.5, 3.8.1.6, and 3.8.1.7). Performance of any SR for the LCO 3.8.1.c will satisfy both Unit 1 and Unit 2 requirements for those SRs.

Surveillance Requirements 3.8.1.4, 3.8.1.8, 3.8.1.9, 3.8.1.10, 3.8.1.11, 3.8.1.12, 3.8.1.13, 3.8.1.14, and 3.8.1.15, are not required to be performed for the LCO 3.8.1.c. Surveillance Requirement 3.8.1.10 is not required because this SR verifies manual transfer of AC power sources from the normal offsite circuit to the alternate offsite circuit, but only one qualified offsite circuit is necessary for the LCO 3.8.1.c. Surveillance Requirements 3.8.1.4, 3.8.1.11, and 3.1.8.12 are not required because they are tests that deal with loads.

Surveillance Requirement 3.8.1.8 verifies the interval between sequenced loads. Surveillance Requirement 3.8.1.14 verifies the proper sequencing with offsite power.

Surveillance Requirement 3.8.1.9 verifies that the DG starts within 10 seconds. These SRs are not required because they do not support the function of the LCO 3.8.1.c to provide power to the CREVS and CRETS. Surveillance Requirements 3.8.1.13 and 3.8.1.15 are not required to be performed because these SRs verify the emergency loads are actuated on an ESFAS signal for the Unit in which the test is being performed. The LCO 3.8.1.c DG will not start on an ESFAS signal for this Unit.

REFERENCES 1. 10 CFR Part 50, Appendix A, "General Design Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants"

2. UFSAR
3. Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 3, "Selection, Design, Qualification, and Testing of Emergency Diesel Generator Units Used as Class 1E Onsite Electric Power Systems at Nuclear Power Plants," July 1993
4. Safety Guide 9, Revision 0, March 1971
5. NRC Safety Evaluation for Amendment Nos. 19 and 5 for Calvert Cliffs Nuclear Power Plant Unit Nos. 1 and 2, dated January 14, 1977
6. Regulatory Guide 1.93, Revision 0, "Availability of Electric Power Sources," December 1974 CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-32 Revision 26

AC Sources-Operating B 3.8.1 BASES

7. Generic Letter 84-15, Proposed Staff Actions to Improve and Maintain Diesel Generator Reliability, July 2, 1984
8. Regulatory Guide 1.137, Revision 1, "Fuel-Oil Systems for Standby Diesel Generators," October 1979
9. Letter from Mr. D. G. McDonald, Jr. (NRC) to Mr. C. H. Cruse (BGE), dated April 2, 1996, Issuance of Amendments for Calvert Cliffs Nuclear Power Plant, Unit 1 (TAC No. M94030) and Unit 2 (TAC No. M94031)
10. IEEE Standard 308-1991, "IEEE Standard Criteria for Class 1E Power Systems for Nuclear Power Generating Stations"
11. NO-1-117, Integrated Risk Management CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.1-33 Revision 26

AC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.2 B 3.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.2 AC Sources-Shutdown BASES BACKGROUND A description of the AC sources is provided in the Bases for LCO 3.8.1.

APPLICABLE The OPERABILITY of the minimum AC sources during MODEs 5 SAFETY ANALYSES and 6 and during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies ensures that:

a. The unit can be maintained in the shutdown or refueling condition for extended periods;
b. Sufficient instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit status; and
c. Adequate AC electrical power is provided to mitigate events postulated during shutdown, such as a fuel handling accident.

In general, when the unit is shut down, the Technical Specifications requirements ensure that the unit has the capability to mitigate the consequences of postulated accidents. However, assuming a single failure and concurrent loss of all offsite or all onsite power is not required. The rationale for this is based on the fact that many DBAs that are analyzed in MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 have no specific analyses in MODEs 5 and 6. Worst case bounding events are deemed not credible in MODEs 5 and 6 because the energy contained within the reactor pressure boundary, reactor coolant temperature and pressure, and the corresponding stresses result in the probabilities of occurrence being significantly reduced or eliminated, and in minimal consequences. These deviations from DBA analysis assumptions and design requirements during shutdown conditions are allowed by the LCO for required systems.

During MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4, various deviations from the analysis assumptions and design requirements are allowed within the Required Actions. This allowance is in recognition that certain testing and maintenance activities must be conducted provided an acceptable level of risk is not exceeded. During MODEs 5 and 6, performance of a significant number of required testing and maintenance CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.2-1 Revision 2

AC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.2 BASES activities is also required. In MODEs 5 and 6, the activities are generally planned and administratively controlled. Relaxations from MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 LCO requirements are acceptable during shutdown MODEs based on:

a. The fact that time in an outage is limited. This is a risk prudent goal as well as a utility economic consideration.
b. Requiring appropriate compensatory measures for certain conditions. These may include administrative controls, reliance on systems that do not necessarily meet typical design requirements applied to systems credited in operating MODE analyses, or both.
c. Prudent utility consideration of the risk associated with multiple activities that could affect multiple systems.
d. Maintaining, to the extent practical, the ability to perform required functions (even if not meeting MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 OPERABILITY requirements) with systems assumed to function during an event.

In the event of an accident during shutdown, this LCO ensures the capability to support systems necessary to avoid immediate difficulty, assuming either a loss of all offsite power or a loss of all onsite DG power.

The AC sources satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), Criterion 3.

LCO One offsite circuit capable of supplying the onsite Class 1E power distribution subsystem(s) of LCO 3.8.10, ensures that all required loads are powered from offsite power. An OPERABLE DG, associated with a distribution system train required to be OPERABLE by LCO 3.8.10, ensures a diverse power source is available to provide electrical power support, assuming a loss of the offsite circuit. Together, OPERABILITY of the required offsite circuit and DG ensures the availability of sufficient AC sources to operate the unit in a safe manner and to mitigate the consequences of postulated events during shutdown (e.g., fuel handling accidents).

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.2-2 Revision 2

AC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.2 BASES The qualified offsite circuit must be capable of maintaining rated frequency and voltage, and accepting required loads during an accident, while connected to the ESF bus(es).

Qualified offsite circuits are those that are described in the UFSAR and are part of the licensing basis for the unit.

The DG must be capable of starting, accelerating to rated speed and voltage, connecting to its respective ESF bus, and accepting required loads. The DG must continue to operate until offsite power can be restored to the ESF buses. These capabilities are required to be met from a variety of initial conditions such as DG in standby with the engine hot and DG in standby at ambient conditions.

It is acceptable for trains to be cross-tied during shutdown conditions, allowing a single offsite power circuit to supply all required trains.

The CREVS and CRETS are shared systems with one train of each system connected to an onsite Class 1E AC electrical power distribution subsystem from each unit. Limiting Condition for Operation 3.8.2.c requires one qualified circuit between the offsite transmission network and the other unit's onsite Class 1E AC electrical power distribution subsystems needed to supply power to the CREVS and CRETS to be OPERABLE. Limiting Condition for Operation 3.8.2.d requires one DG from the other unit capable of supplying power to the required CREVS and CRETS to be OPERABLE, if the DG required by LCO 3.8.2.b is not capable of supplying power to the required CREVS and CRETS.

These requirements, in conjunction with the requirements for the unit AC electrical power sources in LCO 3.8.2.a and LCO 3.8.2.b, ensure that offsite power is available to both trains and onsite power is available to one train of the CREVS and CRETS, when they are required to be OPERABLE by their respective LCOs (LCOs 3.7.8 and 3.7.9).

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.2-3 Revision 10

AC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.2 BASES APPLICABILITY The AC sources required to be OPERABLE in MODEs 5 and 6 and during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies provide assurance that:

a. Systems to provide adequate coolant inventory makeup are available for the irradiated fuel assemblies;
b. Systems needed to mitigate a fuel handling accident are available;
c. Systems necessary to mitigate the effects of events that can lead to core damage during shutdown are available; and
d. Instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit in a cold shutdown condition or refueling condition.

The AC power requirements for MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 are covered in LCO 3.8.1.

ACTIONS Limiting Condition for Operation 3.0.3 is not applicable while in MODEs 5 or 6. However, since irradiated fuel assembly movement can occur in MODEs 1, 2, 3, or 4, the ACTIONS have been modified by a Note stating that LCO 3.0.3 is not applicable. If moving irradiated fuel assemblies while in MODEs 5 or 6, LCO 3.0.3 would not specify any action. If moving irradiated fuel assemblies while in MODEs 1, 2, 3, or 4, the fuel movement is independent of reactor operations. Therefore, in either case, inability to suspend movement of irradiated fuel assemblies would not be sufficient reason to require a reactor shutdown.

The ACTIONS have been modified by a second Note stating that performance of Required Actions shall not preclude completion of actions to establish a safe conservative position. This clarification is provided to avoid stopping movement of irradiated fuel assemblies while in a non-conservative position based on compliance with the Required Actions.

A.1 An offsite circuit would be considered inoperable, if it was unavailable to one required ESF train. Although two trains may be required by LCO 3.8.10, the remaining train with CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.2-4 Revision 5

AC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.2 BASES offsite power available may be capable of supporting sufficient required features to allow continuation of fuel movement. By the allowance of the option to declare required features inoperable, with no offsite power available, appropriate restrictions will be implemented in accordance with the affected required features LCO's ACTIONS.

A.2.1, A.2.2, A.2.3, B.1, B.2, and B.3 With the offsite circuit not available to all required trains, the option would still exist to declare all required features inoperable. Since this option may involve undesired administrative efforts, the allowance for sufficiently conservative actions is made. With the required DG inoperable, the minimum required diversity of AC power sources is not available. It is, therefore, required to suspend movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, and operations involving positive reactivity additions that could result in loss of the required SHUTDOWN MARGIN (SDM)

(MODE 5) or boron concentration (MODE 6). Suspending positive reactivity additions that could result in failure to meet the minimum SDM or boron concentration limit is required to assure continued safe operation. Introduction of coolant inventory must be from sources that have a boron concentration greater than that required in the RCS for the minimum SDM or refueling boron concentration. This may result in an overall reduction in RCS boron concentration, but provides an acceptable margin to maintaining subcritical operation. Introduction of temperature changes including temperature increases when operating with a positive moderator temperature coefficient (MTC) must also be evaluated to ensure they do not result in a loss of the required SDM.

Suspension of these activities does not preclude completion of actions to establish a safe conservative condition.

These actions minimize the probability or the occurrence of postulated events. It is further required, to immediately initiate action to restore the required AC sources and to continue this action until restoration is accomplished in order to provide the necessary AC power to the unit safety systems.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.2-5 Revision 29

AC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.2 BASES The Completion Time of immediately is consistent with the required times for actions requiring prompt attention. The restoration of the required AC electrical power sources should be completed as quickly as possible in order to minimize the time during which the unit safety systems may be without sufficient power.

Pursuant to LCO 3.0.6, the Electrical Distribution System's ACTIONS are not entered even if all AC sources to it are inoperable, resulting in de-energization. Therefore, the Required Actions of Condition A are modified by a Note to indicate that when Condition A is entered with no AC power to any required ESF bus, the ACTIONS for LCO 3.8.10 must be immediately entered. This Note allows Condition A to provide requirements for the loss of the offsite circuit, whether or not a train is de-energized. Limiting Condition for Operation 3.8.10 provides the appropriate restrictions for the situation involving a de-energized train.

SURVEILLANCE SR 3.8.2.1 and SR 3.8.2.2 REQUIREMENTS Surveillance Requirements 3.8.2.1 and 3.8.2.2 require the performance of SRs from LCO 3.8.1 that are necessary for ensuring the OPERABILITY of the AC sources in other than MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4. Surveillance Requirement 3.8.1.10 is not required to be met, since only one offsite circuit is required to be OPERABLE. Surveillance Requirements 3.8.1.4, 3.8.1.8, 3.8.1.13, and 3.8.1.15 are related to automatic starting of the DGs for an operating unit, which is not applicable for a shutdown unit. Surveillance Requirement 3.8.1.16 is related to LCO 3.8.2.c and 3.8.2.d AC sources, and is addressed by SR 3.8.2.2.

Surveillance Requirement 3.8.2.1 is modified by a Note. The Note lists SRs not required to be performed in order to preclude de-energizing a required 4.16 kV ESF bus or disconnecting a required offsite circuit during performance of SRs. With limited AC Sources available, a single event could compromise both the required circuit and the DG. It is the intent that these SRs must still be capable of being met, but actual performance is not required during periods when the DG and offsite circuit are required to be OPERABLE.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.2-6 Revision 19

AC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.2 BASES Refer to the corresponding Bases for LCO 3.8.1 for a discussion of each SR.

REFERENCES None CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.2-7 Revision 19

Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 B 3.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.3 Diesel Fuel Oil BASES BACKGROUND The fuel oil storage tanks (FOSTs) contain sufficient capability for the DGs to operate one unit on accident loads and one unit on shutdown loads for seven days. This is discussed in Reference 1, Chapter 8. This onsite fuel oil capacity is sufficient to operate the DGs for longer than the time to replenish the onsite supply from outside sources.

Fuel oil is transferred from the storage tanks to the day tank by transfer pumps associated with each DG.

For proper operation of the standby DGs, it is necessary to ensure the proper quality of the fuel oil. Testing to check for water and sediment content, the kinematic viscosity, specific gravity (or API gravity), and impurity level (i.e., total particulates) ensures this quality.

The DG fuel oil system design at Calvert Cliffs supports four emergency DGs and other non-safety DGs. Three of the four emergency DGs, i.e., Nos. 1B, 2A, and 2B, are fueled from two FOSTs, i.e., FOST Nos. 11 and 21, and DG No. 1A is fueled from FOST No. 1A. Fuel Oil Storage Tank Nos. 1A and 21 are enclosed such as to be considered "tornado protected" but FOST No. 11 is not protected. As such, FOST No. 11 is not used as the primary source for the emergency DGs, but rather is used as a backup to support FOST No. 21, if it or the fuel oil it contains becomes degraded.

The operability of FOST Nos. 21 and 11 ensure that at least seven days of fuel oil will be reserved below the internal tank standpipes for operation of one DG on each unit, assuming one unit under accident conditions with a DG load of 3500 kW, and the opposite unit under normal shutdown conditions with a DG load of 3000 kW. Additionally, the operability of FOST No. 21 ensures that in the event of a loss of offsite power, concurrent with a loss of the non-bunkered FOST (tornado/missile event), at least seven days of fuel oil will be available for operation of one DG on each unit, assuming both DGs are loaded to 3000 kW. The operability of the FOST No. 1A ensures that at least CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.3-1 Revision 2

Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 BASES seven days of fuel oil is available to support operation of DG No. 1A at 4000 kW.

The operability of the fuel oil day tanks ensures that at least one hour of DG operation is available without makeup to the day tanks, assuming DG No. 1A is loaded to 4000 kW and DG Nos. 1B, 2A, and 2B are loaded to 3500 kW.

APPLICABLE The initial conditions of DBA and transient analyses in SAFETY ANALYSES Reference 1, and Chapters 6 and 14, assume ESF systems are OPERABLE. The DGs are designed to provide sufficient capacity, capability, redundancy, and reliability to ensure the availability of necessary power to ESF systems so that fuel, RCS, and containment design limits are not exceeded.

These limits are discussed in more detail in the Bases for LCO Section 3.2, 3.4, and 3.6.

Since diesel fuel oil supports the operation of the standby AC power sources, they satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii),

Criterion 3.

LCO Fuel Oil Storage Tank No. 1A is required to contain a minimum of 49,500 gallons of available diesel fuel oil which is a sufficient supply to operate DG No. 1A with accident loads for seven days. Fuel Oil Storage Tank No. 21 is required to contain a minimum of 85,000 gallons of available diesel fuel oil which is a sufficient supply to operate one unit with accident loads and one unit with shutdown loads for seven days. It is also required to meet specific standards for quality. This requirement, in conjunction with an ability to obtain replacement supplies within seven days, supports the availability of DGs required to shut down the reactor and to maintain it in a safe condition for an AOO or a postulated DBA with loss of offsite power.

Diesel generator day tank fuel requirements, as well as transfer capability from the FOST to the day tank, are addressed in LCO 3.8.1 and LCO 3.8.2.

APPLICABILITY The AC sources (LCO 3.8.1 and LCO 3.8.2) are required to ensure the availability of the required power to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe shutdown condition after an AOO or a postulated DBA. Since stored diesel fuel oil supports LCO 3.8.1 and LCO 3.8.2, stored diesel fuel oil CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.3-2 Revision 2

Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 BASES is required to be within limits when the associated DG is required to be OPERABLE.

For both Unit 1 and Unit 2, the FOST No. 1A associated DG is only DG No. 1A. For Unit 1, the FOST No. 21 associated DGs are DG Nos. 1B and 2B. For Unit 2, the FOST No. 21 associated DGs are DG Nos. 2A and 2B. Alignment does not affect the association of DG and FOST since the individual DG fuel oil day tank provides sufficient volume for the DG to perform its safety function while re-alignment is accomplished, if necessary.

ACTIONS The ACTIONS Table is modified by a Note indicating that separate Condition entry is allowed for each DG. This is acceptable, since the Required Actions for each Condition provide appropriate compensatory actions for each inoperable DG subsystem. Complying with the Required Actions for one inoperable DG subsystem may allow for continued operation, and subsequent inoperable DG subsystem(s) are governed by separate Condition entry and application of associated Required Actions.

A.1, B.1, B.2, C.1, C.2, and C.3 In this Condition, the seven day fuel oil supply for a DG is not available. However, fuel oil volume reduction is limited to 6/7 of the required volume which will provide sufficient capacity to operate one DG on one unit on accident loads, and one DG on the other unit on shutdown loads for approximately six days. These circumstances may be caused by events such as full load operation required after an inadvertent start while at minimum required level; or feed and bleed operations, which may be necessitated by increasing particulate levels or any number of other oil quality degradations. This restriction allows sufficient time for obtaining the requisite replacement volume and performing the analyses required prior to addition of fuel oil to the tank. A period of 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> is considered sufficient to complete restoration of the required level prior to declaring the DG inoperable. This period is acceptable based on the remaining capacity (approximately six days), the fact that procedures will be initiated to CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.3-3 Revision 2

Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 BASES obtain replenishment, and the low probability of an event during this brief period.

Condition A addresses only FOST No. 1A which is tornado protected and which contains sufficient fuel for seven days of required operation of DG No. 1A. It supports both Unit 1 and Unit 2 equipment since DG No. 1A provides power for equipment which is shared by both units, e.g., the CREVS.

Condition B addresses only FOST No. 21 which is tornado protected and which contains sufficient fuel for seven days of required operation of two DGs. Fuel Oil Storage Tank No. 21 supports both Unit 1 and Unit 2 equipment, but Condition B is written for Unit 1 only to reflect the Unit 1 requirements for DG Nos. 1B and 2B. For an accident, Unit 1 requires either DG No. 1A or both DG Nos. 1B and 2B (since DG No. 2B powers equipment which is redundant to some equipment powered by DG No. 1A, e.g., CREVS). Since DG No. 1A is supported by FOST No. 1A and the redundant required equipment is powered by DG Nos. 1B and 2B which are supported by FOST No. 21, at least one full train of required equipment is supported by a tornado protected FOST even with an inoperable FOST or DG. Therefore, low fuel oil volume in FOST No. 21 can be supplemented by the fuel oil volume of an OPERABLE FOST No. 11 to assure the necessary volume. Required Action B.1 requires the combined volume of FOST No. 21 and an OPERABLE FOST No. 11 to be verified to be greater than 6/7 of the required volume within one hour. The Completion Time of one hour is consistent with the time needed to verify through administrative means that the backup FOST is OPERABLE.

Required Action B.2 requires the combined volume of FOST No. 21 and an OPERABLE FOST No. 11 to be 85,000 gallons within 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br />. In addition, if FOST No. 21 is not restored and FOST No. 11 continues to be relied upon, Required Action B.2 must be repeated every 31 days. This effectively replaces the SR 3.8.3.1 periodic surveillance of available DG fuel oil volume for the inoperable FOST No. 21.

Since FOST No. 11 is not required by the LCO, FOST No. 11 may be considered OPERABLE only when the stored fuel oil meets SR 3.8.3.2 and SR 3.8.3.3, and is capable of being delivered to the required DG, i.e., the necessary piping and valves are capable of performing their safety function.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.3-4 Revision 2

Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 BASES Specific alignment to a particular FOST is not required since the individual DG fuel oil day tank provides sufficient volume for the DG to perform its safety function while re-alignment is accomplished, if necessary. Further, if any fuel oil in FOST No. 11 above the 33,000 gallons reserved for emergency DG use is credited for DG use, appropriate administrative controls must be in place to assure its retention for this purpose.

Condition C also addresses only FOST No. 21 which is tornado protected and which contains sufficient fuel for seven days of required operation of two DGs. Fuel Oil Storage Tank No. 21 supports both Unit 1 and Unit 2 equipment, but Condition C is written for Unit 2 only to reflect the Unit 2 requirements for DG Nos. 2A and 2B. For an accident, Unit 2 requires either DG No. 2B or both DG Nos. 1A and 2A (since DG No. 1A powers equipment which is redundant to some equipment powered by DG No. 2B, e.g., CREVS). Unlike Unit 1, at least one full train of required equipment is not supported by a tornado protected FOST with an inoperable FOST or DG since most of the redundant required equipment is powered by DG Nos. 2A and 2B which are both supported by FOST No. 21. Therefore, low fuel oil volume in FOST No. 21 can only be supplemented by the fuel oil volume of an OPERABLE FOST No. 11 to assure the necessary volume when the probability for a tornado is sufficiently low. This is reflected in Note 2 for Required Action C.2 which addresses the inoperability of FOST No. 21 from April 1 to September 30. During the time of low tornado probability, the Unit 2 requirements for the inoperability of FOST No. 21 are very similar to the Unit 1 requirements for inoperability of FOST No. 21. It is acceptable for the combined volume of FOST No. 11 and FOST No. 21 to be considered in providing 6/7 of the required volume for the 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> allowed by Required Action C.3.

Required Action C.1 requires the combined volume of FOST No. 21 and an OPERABLE FOST No. 11 to be verified to be greater than 6/7 of the required volume within one hour.

Required Action C.3 then requires the volume of FOST No. 21 to be restored to within volume limits within 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br />.

However, during tornado season, i.e., from April 1 to September 30, the fuel oil volume of FOST No. 11 is not allowed to be credited and the fuel oil seven day volume of CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.3-5 Revision 2

Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 BASES FOST No. 21 must be restored within two hours as indicated in Required Action C.2. Required Action C.2 is also modified by a Note such that it is only required during the operation of Unit 2 in MODEs 1, 2, 3, or 4 since the unit is already shutdown if it is in another MODE or condition. An OPERABLE FOST No. 11 is determined as described above in the discussion for Condition B.

D.1 This Condition is entered as a result of a failure to meet the acceptance criterion of SR 3.8.3.2. Normally, trending of particulate levels allows sufficient time to correct high particulate levels prior to reaching the limit of acceptability. Poor sample procedures (bottom sampling),

contaminated sampling equipment, and errors in laboratory analysis can produce failures that do not follow a trend.

Since the presence of particulates does not mean failure of the fuel oil to burn properly in the diesel engine, and particulate concentration is unlikely to change significantly between SR Frequency intervals, and proper engine performance has been recently demonstrated (within 31 days), it is prudent to allow a brief period prior to declaring the associated DG inoperable. The seven day Completion Time allows for further evaluation, resampling, and re-analysis of the DG fuel oil.

E.1 With the new fuel oil properties defined in the Bases for SR 3.8.3.2 not within the required limits, a period of 30 days is allowed for restoring the stored fuel oil properties to within the new fuel oil limits. This period provides sufficient time to test the stored fuel oil to determine that the new fuel oil, when mixed with previously stored fuel oil, remains acceptable, or restore the stored fuel oil properties to within the new fuel oil limits. This restoration may involve feed and bleed procedures, filtering, or combinations of these procedures. Even if a DG start and load was required during this time interval, and the fuel oil properties were outside limits, there is a high likelihood that the DG would still be capable of performing its intended function.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.3-6 Revision 2

Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 BASES F.1 With a Required Action and associated Completion Time not met, or one or more DGs with diesel fuel oil not within limits for reasons other than addressed by Conditions A through E, the associated DG may be incapable of performing its intended function and must be immediately declared inoperable. "Associated DG(s)" are identified in the Applicability Bases.

SURVEILLANCE SR 3.8.3.1 REQUIREMENTS This SR provides verification that there is an adequate inventory of fuel oil in the DG FOSTs to support one unit on accident loads and one unit on shutdown loads for seven days. The seven day period is sufficient time to place the unit in a safe shutdown condition and to bring in replenishment fuel from an offsite location.

The 31 day Frequency is adequate to ensure that a sufficient supply of fuel oil is available, since low level alarms are provided and unit operators would be aware of any large uses of fuel oil during this period.

SR 3.8.3.2 The tests listed below are a means of determining whether new fuel oil is of the appropriate grade (i.e., 2D and 2D low sulfur) and has not been contaminated with substances that would have an immediate, detrimental impact on diesel engine combustion. Note that further references to American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) 2D fuel oil include both 2D and 2D low sulfur. If results from these tests are within acceptable limits, the fuel oil may be added to the storage tanks without concern for contaminating the entire volume of fuel oil in the storage tanks. These tests are to be conducted prior to adding the new fuel to the storage tank(s), but in no case is the time between receipt of new fuel and conducting the tests to exceed 31 days. The tests, limits, and applicable ASTM Standards are as follows:

a. Sample the new fuel oil in accordance with Reference 3, ASTM D4057-1995; CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.3-7 Revision 2

Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 BASES

b. Verify in accordance with the tests specified in Reference 3, ASTM D975-1996, that the sample has an absolute specific gravity at 60/60°F of 0.8155 and 0.8871, or an American Petroleum Institute gravity at 60°F of 28° and 42°, a kinematic viscosity at 40°C of 1.9 centistokes and 4.1 centistokes, and a flash point 125°F; and
c. Verify that the new fuel oil has 0.05% water and sediment (Reference 3, ASTM D975-1996).

Failure to meet any of the above limits is cause for rejecting the new fuel oil, but does not represent a failure to meet the LCO concern since the fuel oil is not added to the storage tanks.

Within 31 days following the initial new fuel oil sample, the fuel oil is analyzed to establish that the other properties specified in Reference 2, ASTM D975-1996, Table 1, are met for new fuel oil. The 31 day period is acceptable because the fuel oil properties of interest, even if they were not within stated limits, would not have an immediate effect on DG operation. This SR ensures the availability of high quality fuel oil for the DGs.

Fuel oil degradation during long-term storage shows up as an increase in particulate, due mostly to oxidation. The presence of particulate does not mean the fuel oil will not burn properly in a diesel engine. The particulate can cause fouling of filters and fuel oil injection equipment, however, that can cause engine failure.

Particulate concentrations should be determined by gravimetric analysis (based on ASTM D2276-1989) of total particulate concentration in the fuel oil and has a limit of 10 mg/l. It is acceptable to obtain a field sample for subsequent laboratory testing in lieu of field testing.

Because the total stored fuel oil volume for DG Nos. 1B, 2A, and 2B is contained in two interconnected tanks, each tank must be considered and tested separately. There is a separate FOST for DG No. 1A.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.3-8 Revision 3

Diesel Fuel Oil B 3.8.3 BASES The Frequency of this test takes into consideration fuel oil degradation trends that indicate that particulate concentration is unlikely to change significantly between Frequency intervals.

SR 3.8.3.3 Microbiological fouling is a major cause of fuel oil degradation. There are numerous bacteria that can grow in fuel oil and cause fouling, but all must have a water environment in order to survive. Removal of water from the fuel storage tanks once every 92 days eliminates the necessary environment for bacterial survival. This is the most effective means of controlling microbiological fouling.

In addition, it eliminates the potential for water entrainment in the fuel oil during DG operation. Water may come from any of several sources, including condensation, ground water, rain water, and contaminated fuel oil, and from breakdown of the fuel oil by bacteria. Frequent checking for and removal of accumulated water minimizes fouling and provides data regarding the watertight integrity of the fuel oil system. The SR Frequencies are established by Reference 3. This SR is for preventative maintenance.

The presence of water does not necessarily represent failure of this SR provided the accumulated water is removed during performance of the surveillance test.

REFERENCES 1. UFSAR

2. ASTM Standards
3. Regulatory Guide 1.137, "Fuel-Oil Systems for Standby Diesel Generators," January 1978 CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.3-9 Revision 2

DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 B 3.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.4 DC Sources-Operating BASES BACKGROUND The station DC sources provide the AC emergency power system with control power. It also provides both motive and control power to selected safety related equipment and preferred AC vital bus power (via inverters). As required by Reference 1, Appendix 1C, Criterion 39, the DC electrical power sources are designed to have sufficient independence, redundancy, and testability to perform their safety functions, assuming a single failure. The DC sources also conform to the recommendations of References 2 and 3.

The 125 VDC electrical power sources consist of four independent and redundant safety related Class 1E DC channels. Each channel consists of one 125 VDC battery, the associated battery charger for each battery, and all the associated control equipment and interconnecting cabling.

During normal operation, the 125 VDC load is powered from the battery chargers with the batteries floating on the system. In cases where momentary loads are greater than the charger capability, or a loss of normal power to the battery charger, the DC load is automatically powered from the station batteries.

The DC channels provide the control power for its associated Class 1E AC power load group, 4.16 kV switchgear, and 480 V load centers. The DC channels also provide a DC source to the inverters, which in turn power the AC vital buses.

The DC sources are described in more detail in the Bases for LCO 3.8.9 and for LCO 3.8.10.

Each battery has adequate storage capacity to carry the required load continuously for at least 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> and to carry load duty cycle as discussed in Reference 1, Chapter 8.

Each 125 VDC battery is separately housed in a ventilated room apart from its charger and distribution centers. Each channel is separated physically and electrically from the other channel to ensure that a single failure in one channel does not cause a failure in a redundant channel. There is CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.4-1 Revision 2

DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 BASES no sharing between redundant Class 1E channels, such as batteries, battery chargers, or distribution panels.

The batteries for DC channels are sized to produce required capacity at 80% of nameplate rating, corresponding to warranted capacity at end of life cycles and the 100% design demand. Battery size is based on 125% of required capacity.

An average voltage of 2.13 V per cell, corresponds to a total minimum voltage output of 125 V per battery (128 V for the reserve battery) as discussed in Reference 1, Chapter 8.

The criteria for sizing large lead storage batteries are defined in Reference 4.

Each DC channel has ample power output capacity for the steady state operation of connected loads required during normal operation, while at the same time maintaining its battery bank fully charged. Each battery charger also has sufficient capacity to restore the battery from the design minimum charge to 95% of its fully charged state within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> while supplying normal steady state loads discussed in Reference 1, Chapter 8.

APPLICABLE The initial conditions of DBA and transient analyses in SAFETY ANALYSES Reference 1, Chapters 6 and 14, assume that ESF systems are OPERABLE. The DC channels provide a normal and emergency DC sources for the DGs, emergency auxiliaries, and control and switching during all MODEs of operation.

The OPERABILITY of the DC sources is consistent with the initial assumptions of the accident analyses and is based upon meeting the design basis of the unit. This includes maintaining the DC sources OPERABLE during accident conditions in the event of:

a. An assumed loss of all offsite AC power or all onsite AC power; and
b. A worst case single failure.

The DC sources satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), Criterion 3.

LCO The DC channels, each channel consisting of one battery, one battery charger, and the corresponding control equipment and interconnecting cabling supplying power to the associated CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.4-2 Revision 2

DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 BASES bus, are required to be OPERABLE to ensure the availability of the required power to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe condition after an AOO or a postulated DBA.

Loss of any DC channel does not prevent the minimum safety function from being performed (Reference 1, Chapter 8).

An OPERABLE DC channel requires the battery and one OPERABLE charger to be operating and connected to the associated DC bus(es).

APPLICABILITY The DC sources are required to be OPERABLE in MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 to ensure safe unit operation and to ensure that:

a. Acceptable fuel design limits and reactor coolant pressure boundary limits are not exceeded as a result of AOOs or abnormal transients; and
b. Adequate core cooling is provided, and containment integrity and other vital functions are maintained in the event of a postulated DBA.

The DC sources requirement for MODEs 5 and 6 are addressed in the Bases for LCO 3.8.5.

ACTIONS A.1 Required Action A.1 requires the inoperable battery to be replaced by the reserve battery within four hours when one DC channel is inoperable due to an inoperable battery and the reserve battery is available. The reserve battery is a qualified battery that can replace and perform the required function of any inoperable battery. The four hour Completion Time is acceptable based on the capability of the reserve battery and the time it takes to replace the inoperable battery with the reserve battery while minimizing the time in this degraded condition.

B.1 Condition B represents one channel with a loss of ability to completely respond to an event, and a potential loss of ability to remain energized during normal operation.

Therefore, it is imperative that the operator's attention focus on stabilizing the unit, minimizing the potential for complete loss of DC power to the affected channel. The CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.4-3 Revision 45

DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 BASES 2 hour2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> limit is consistent with the allowed time for an inoperable DC channel.

If one of the required DC channels is inoperable for reasons other than Condition A (e.g., inoperable battery, inoperable battery charger(s), or inoperable battery charger and associated inoperable battery), the remaining DC channels have the capacity to support a safe shutdown and to mitigate an accident condition. Since a subsequent worst case single failure would, however, result in the further loss of the 125 VDC channels with attendant loss of ESF functions, continued power operation should not exceed 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br />. The 2 hour2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> Completion Time is based on Reference 5 and reflects a reasonable time to assess unit status as a function of the inoperable DC channel and, if the DC channel is not restored to OPERABLE status, to prepare to effect an orderly and safe unit shutdown.

C.1 and C.2 If the inoperable DC channel cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the required Completion Time, the unit must be brought to a MODE in which the LCO does not apply. To achieve this status, the unit must be brought to at least MODE 3 within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> and to MODE 5 within 36 hours4.166667e-4 days <br />0.01 hours <br />5.952381e-5 weeks <br />1.3698e-5 months <br />. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required unit conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems. The Completion Time to bring the unit to MODE 5 is consistent with the time required in Reference 5.

SURVEILLANCE SR 3.8.4.1 REQUIREMENTS Verifying battery terminal voltage while on float charge helps to ensure the effectiveness of the charging system and the ability of the batteries to perform their intended function. Float charge is the condition in which the charger is supplying connected loads and the continuous charge required to overcome the internal losses of a battery and maintain the battery in a fully charged state. The voltage requirements are based on the nominal design voltage of the battery (2.13 V per cell average) and are consistent with Reference 6 and the initial state of charge conditions CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.4-4 Revision 45

DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 BASES assumed in the battery sizing calculations. The 7 day Frequency is conservative when compared with manufacturer recommendations and Reference 6.

SR 3.8.4.2 Visual inspection to detect corrosion of the battery cells and connections, or measurement of the resistance of each cell to cell and terminal connection, provides an indication of physical damage or abnormal deterioration that could potentially degrade battery performance.

The limits established for this SR must be no more than 20%

above the resistance as measured during installation or not above the ceiling value established by the manufacturer.

The SR Frequency for these inspections, which can detect conditions that can cause power losses due to resistance heating, is 92 days. This Frequency is considered acceptable based on operating experience related to detecting corrosion trends.

SR 3.8.4.3 Visual inspection of the battery cells, cell plates, and battery racks provides an indication of physical damage or abnormal deterioration that could potentially degrade battery performance.

The presence of physical damage or deterioration does not necessarily represent a failure of this SR, provided an evaluation determines that the physical damage or deterioration does not affect the OPERABILITY of the battery (its ability to perform its design function).

The 18 month Frequency is based on engineering judgment.

Operating experience has shown that these components usually pass the SR when performed at the 18 month Frequency.

Therefore, the Frequency was concluded to be acceptable from a reliability standpoint.

SR 3.8.4.4 and SR 3.8.4.5 Visual inspection and resistance measurements of cell to cell and terminal connections provide an indication of CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.4-5 Revision 45

DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 BASES physical damage or abnormal deterioration that could indicate degraded battery condition. The anti-corrosion material is used to help ensure good electrical connections and to reduce terminal deterioration. The visual inspection for corrosion is not intended to require removal of and inspection under each terminal connection. The removal of visible corrosion is a preventive maintenance SR. The presence of visible corrosion does not necessarily represent a failure of this SR provided visible corrosion is removed during performance of SR 3.8.4.4.

The connection resistance limits for SR 3.8.4.5 shall be no more than 20% above the resistance as measured during installation, or not above the ceiling value established by the manufacturer.

The 18 month Frequency for these SRs is based on engineering judgment. Operating experience has shown that these components usually pass the SRs when performed at the 18 month Frequency. Therefore, the Frequency was concluded to be acceptable from a reliability standpoint.

SR 3.8.4.6 This SR requires that each battery charger be capable of supplying 400 amps and 125 V for 30 minutes. These requirements are based on the output rating of the chargers (Reference 1, Chapter 8). According to Reference 7, the battery charger supply is required to be based on the largest combined demands of the various steady state loads and the charging capacity to restore the battery from the design minimum charge state to the fully charged state, irrespective of the status of the unit during these demand occurrences. The minimum required amperes and duration ensures that these requirements can be satisfied. The test is performed while supplying normal DC loads or an equivalent or greater dummy load.

The SR Frequency is acceptable, given the unit conditions required to perform the test and the other administrative controls existing to ensure adequate charger performance during these 24 month intervals. In addition, this Frequency is intended to be consistent with expected fuel cycle lengths.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.4-6 Revision 45

DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 BASES SR 3.8.4.7 A battery service test is a special test of battery capability, as found and with the associated battery charger disconnected, to satisfy the design requirements (battery duty cycle) of the DC source. The test duration must be 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> and battery terminal voltage must be maintained 105 volts during the test. The discharge rate and test length should correspond to the design accident load (duty) cycle requirements as specified in Reference 1, Chapter 8.

A dummy load simulating the emergency loads of the design duty cycle may be used in lieu of the actual emergency loads.

The SR Frequency of 24 months is consistent with expected fuel cycle lengths.

This SR is modified by a Note. The Note allows the performance of a modified performance discharge test in lieu of a service test. This substitution is acceptable because a modified performance discharge test represents a more severe test of battery capacity than SR 3.8.4.7.

SR 3.8.4.8 A battery performance discharge test is a test of constant current capacity of a battery after having been in service, to detect any change in the capacity determined by the acceptance test. The test is intended to determine overall battery degradation due to age and usage.

A battery modified performance discharge test is a simulated duty cycle consisting of just two rates; the one minute rate published for the battery or the largest current load of the duty cycle, followed by the test rate employed for the performance discharge test, both of which envelope the duty cycle of the service test. Since the ampere-hours removed by a rated one minute discharge represents a very small portion of the battery capacity, the test rate can be changed to that for the performance test without compromising the results of the performance discharge test.

The battery terminal voltage for the modified performance discharge test should remain above the minimum battery CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.4-7 Revision 45

DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 BASES terminal voltage specified in the battery performance discharge test for the duration of time equal to that of the performance discharge test.

A modified performance discharge test is a test of the battery capacity and its ability to provide a high rate, short duration load (usually the highest rate of the duty cycle). This will often confirm the battery's ability to meet the critical period of the load duty cycle, in addition to determining its percentage of rated capacity. Initial conditions for the modified performance discharge test should be identical to those specified for a service test.

Either the battery performance discharge test or the modified performance discharge test is acceptable for satisfying SR 3.8.4.8; however, only the modified performance discharge test may be used to satisfy SR 3.8.4.8 while satisfying the requirements of SR 3.8.4.7 at the same time.

The acceptance criteria for this SR are consistent with References 6 and 4. These references recommend that the battery be replaced if its capacity is below 80% of the manufacturer rating. A capacity of 80% shows that the battery rate of deterioration is increasing, even if there is ample capacity to meet the load requirements.

The SR Frequency for this test is normally 60 months. If the battery shows degradation, or if the battery has reached 85% of its expected life and capacity is < 100% of the manufacturer's rating, the SR Frequency is reduced to 12 months. However, if the battery shows no degradation but has reached 85% of its expected life, the SR Frequency is only reduced to 24 months for batteries that retain capacity 100% of the manufacturer's rating. Degradation is indicated, according to Reference 6, when the battery capacity drops by more than 10% relative to its capacity on the previous performance test or when it is 10% below the manufacturer's rating. These Frequencies are consistent with the recommendations in Reference 6.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.4-8 Revision 45

DC Sources-Operating B 3.8.4 BASES REFERENCES 1. UFSAR

2. Safety Guide 6, Revision 0, "Assumptions Used for Evaluating the Potential Radiological Consequences of a Steam Line Break Accident for Boiling Water Reactors,"

March 1971

3. IEEE Standard 308-1978, "IEEE Standard Criteria for Class 1E Power Systems for Nuclear Power Generating Stations"
4. IEEE Standard 485-1983, "Recommended Practice for Sizing Large Lead Storage Batteries for Generating Stations and Substations (ANSI)," June 1983
5. Regulatory Guide 1.93, "Availability of Electric Power Sources," December 1974
6. IEEE Standard 450-1995, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Vented Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary Applications," May 1995
7. Regulatory Guide 1.32, Revision 2, "Criteria for Safety-Related Electric Power Systems for Nuclear Power Plants," February 1977 CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.4-9 Revision 45

DC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.5 B 3.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.5 DC Sources-Shutdown BASES BACKGROUND A description of the DC sources is provided in the Bases for LCO 3.8.4.

APPLICABLE The initial conditions of DBA; and transient analyses in SAFETY ANALYSES Reference 1, Chapters 6 and 14, assume that ESF systems are OPERABLE. The DC sources provide normal and emergency DC for the DGs, emergency auxiliaries, and control and switching during all MODEs of operation.

The OPERABILITY of the DC subsystems is consistent with the initial assumptions of the accident analyses and the requirements for the supported systems' OPERABILITY.

The OPERABILITY of the minimum DC sources during MODEs 5 and 6 and during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies ensures that:

a. The unit can be maintained in the shutdown or refueling condition for extended periods;
b. Sufficient instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit status; and
c. Adequate DC sources are provided to mitigate events postulated during shutdown, such as a fuel handling accident.

The DC sources satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), Criterion 3.

LCO The DC channels, each channel consisting of one battery, one battery charger, and the corresponding control equipment and interconnecting cabling within the channel, are required to be OPERABLE to support required trains of distribution systems required OPERABLE by LCO 3.8.10. This ensures the availability of sufficient DC sources to operate the unit in a safe manner and to mitigate the consequences of postulated events during shutdown (e.g., fuel handling accidents).

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.5-1 Revision 2

DC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.5 BASES APPLICABILITY The DC sources required to be OPERABLE in MODEs 5 and 6, and during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies provide assurance that:

a. Required features needed to mitigate a fuel handling accident are available;
b. Required features necessary to mitigate the effects of events that can lead to core damage during shutdown are available; and
c. Instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit in a cold shutdown condition or refueling condition.

The DC channel requirements for MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 are covered in LCO 3.8.4.

ACTIONS Limiting Condition for Operation 3.0.3 is not applicable while in MODE 5 or 6. However, since irradiated fuel assembly movement can occur in MODE 1, 2, 3, or 4, the ACTIONS have been modified by a Note stating that LCO 3.0.3 is not applicable. If moving irradiated fuel assemblies while in MODE 5 or 6, LCO 3.0.3 would not specify any action. If moving irradiated fuel assemblies while in MODE 1, 2, 3, or 4, the fuel movement is independent of reactor operations. Therefore, in either case, the inability to suspend movement of irradiated fuel assemblies would not be sufficient reason to require a reactor shutdown.

The ACTIONS have been modified by a second Note stating that performance of REQUIRED ACTIONS shall not preclude completion of actions to establish a safe conservative position. This clarification is provided to avoid stopping movement of irradiated fuel assemblies while in a non-conservative position based on compliance with the REQUIRED ACTIONS.

A.1, A.2.1, A.2.2, and A.2.3 If two trains are required per LCO 3.8.10, the remaining train with DC power available may be capable of supporting sufficient systems to allow continuation of movement of irradiated fuel assemblies. By allowing the option to declare required features inoperable with the associated DC CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.5-2 Revision 29

DC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.5 BASES power source(s) inoperable, appropriate restrictions will be implemented in accordance with the affected required features LCO ACTIONS. In many instances, this option may involve undesired administrative efforts. Therefore, the allowance for sufficiently conservative actions is made (i.e., to suspend movement of irradiated fuel assemblies and operations involving positive reactivity additions). The Required Action to suspend positive reactivity additions does not preclude actions to maintain or increase reactor vessel inventory, provided the required SDM is maintained.

Suspension of these activities shall not preclude completion of actions to establish a safe conservative condition.

These actions minimize probability of the occurrence of postulated events. It is further required to immediately initiate action to restore the required DC channels and to continue this action until restoration is accomplished in order to provide the necessary DC source to the unit safety systems.

The Completion Time of immediately is consistent with the required times for actions requiring prompt attention. The restoration of the required DC channels should be completed as quickly as possible in order to minimize the time during which the unit safety systems may be without sufficient power.

SURVEILLANCE SR 3.8.5.1 REQUIREMENTS Surveillance Requirement 3.8.5.1 states that surveillance tests required by SR 3.8.4.1 through SR 3.8.4.8 are applicable in these MODEs. See the corresponding Bases for LCO 3.8.4 for a discussion of each SR.

This SR is modified by a Note. The reason for the Note is to preclude requiring the OPERABLE DC sources from being discharged below their capability to provide the required power supply or otherwise rendered inoperable during the performance of SRs. It is the intent that these SRs must still be capable of being met, but actual performance is not required.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.5-3 Revision 29

DC Sources-Shutdown B 3.8.5 BASES REFERENCES 1. UFSAR CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.5-4 Revision 2

Battery Cell Parameters B 3.8.6 B 3.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.6 Battery Cell Parameters BASES BACKGROUND This LCO delineates the limits on electrolyte temperature, level, individual cell float voltage (ICV), and specific gravity for the DC power source batteries. A discussion of these batteries and their OPERABILITY requirements is provided in the Bases for LCO 3.8.4 and LCO 3.8.5.

APPLICABLE The initial conditions of DBA and transient analyses in SAFETY ANALYSES Reference 1, Chapters 6 and 14, assume ESF systems are OPERABLE. The DC sources provide normal and emergency DC electrical power for the DGs, emergency auxiliaries, and control and switching during all MODEs of operation.

The OPERABILITY of the DC channels is consistent with the initial assumptions of the accident analyses and is based upon meeting the design basis of the unit, as discussed in the Bases for LCO 3.8.4 and LCO 3.8.5.

Battery cell parameters satisfy Criterion 3 of the NRC Policy Statement.

LCO Battery cell parameters must remain within acceptable limits to ensure availability of the required DC power to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe condition after an AOO or a postulated DBA. Electrolyte limits are conservatively established, allowing continued DC electrical system function even with Category A or B limits not met.

APPLICABILITY The battery parameters are required solely for the support of the associated DC electrical power subsystems.

Therefore, battery electrolyte is only required when the DC power source is required to be OPERABLE. Refer to the Applicability discussion in the Bases for LCO 3.8.4 and LCO 3.8.5.

ACTIONS The Actions Table is modified by a Note which indicates that separate Condition entry is allowed for each battery. This is acceptable, since the Required Actions for each Condition provide appropriate compensatory actions for each inoperable DC channel. Complying with the Required Actions for one CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.6-1 Revision 2

Battery Cell Parameters B 3.8.6 BASES inoperable DC channel may allow for continued operation, and subsequent inoperable DC subsystem(s) are governed by separate Condition entry and application of associated Required Actions.

A.1, A.2.1, A.2.2, and A.3 With parameters of one or more cells, in one or more batteries, not within limits (i.e., Category A limits not met or Category B limits not met) but within Category C limits specified in Table 3.8.6-1, the battery is degraded but there is still sufficient capacity to perform the intended function. Therefore, the affected battery is not required to be considered inoperable solely as a result of Category A or B limits not met, and continued operation is permitted for a limited period.

The pilot cell electrolyte level and ICV are required to be verified to meet the Category C limits within one hour (Required Action A.1). This check will provide a quick indication of the status of the remainder of the battery cells. One hour provides time to inspect the electrolyte level and to confirm the ICV of the pilot cells. One hour is considered a reasonable amount of time to perform the required verification.

Verification that the Category C limits are met (Required Action A.2) provides assurance that during the time needed to restore the parameters to the Category A and B limits, the battery will still be capable of performing its intended function. A period of 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> is allowed to complete the initial verification because specific gravity measurements must be obtained for each connected cell. Taking into consideration both the time required to perform the required verification and the assurance that the battery cell parameters are not severely degraded, this time is considered reasonable. The verification is repeated at seven day intervals until the parameters are restored to Category A and B limits. This periodic verification is consistent with the normal Frequency of pilot cell Surveillances.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.6-2 Revision 2

Battery Cell Parameters B 3.8.6 BASES Continued operation prior to declaring the affected batteries inoperable is permitted for 31 days before battery cell parameters must be restored to within Category A and B limits. With the consideration that, while battery capacity is degraded, sufficient capacity exists to perform the intended function and to allow time to fully restore the battery cell parameters to normal limits, this time is acceptable prior to declaring the battery inoperable.

B.1 With one or more batteries with one or more battery cell parameters outside the Category C limit for any connected cell, sufficient capacity to supply the maximum expected load requirement is not assured and the corresponding DC channel must be declared inoperable. Additionally, other potentially extreme conditions, such as any Required Action of Condition A and associated Completion Time not met, or average electrolyte temperature of representative cells

< 69°F, are also cause for immediately declaring the associated DC channel inoperable.

SURVEILLANCE SR 3.8.6.1 REQUIREMENTS This SR verifies that Category A battery cell parameters are consistent with Reference 2, which recommends regular battery inspections (at least one per month) including voltage, specific gravity, and electrolyte temperature of pilot cells.

SR 3.8.6.2 The quarterly inspection of specific gravity and voltage is consistent with Reference 2.

SR 3.8.6.3 This Surveillance verification that the average temperature of representative cells is > 69°F is consistent with a recommendation of Reference 2, which states that the temperature of electrolytes in representative cells should be determined on a quarterly basis. The temperature is also high enough to supply the required capacity.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.6-3 Revision 2

Battery Cell Parameters B 3.8.6 BASES Lower than normal temperatures act to inhibit or reduce battery capacity. This SR ensures that the operating temperatures remain within an acceptable operating range.

This limit is based on manufacturer recommendations.

Table 3.8.6-1 This Table delineates the limits on electrolyte level, ICV, and specific gravity for three different categories. The meaning of each category is discussed below.

Category A defines the normal parameter limit for each designated pilot cell in each battery. The cells selected as pilot cells are those whose temperature, voltage, and electrolyte specific gravity approximate the state of charge of the entire battery.

The Category A limits specified for electrolyte level are based on manufacturer recommendations and are consistent with the guidance in Reference 2, with the extra 1/4 inch allowance above the high water level indication for operating margin to account for temperatures and charge effects. In addition to this allowance, Footnote (a) to Table 3.8.6-1 permits the electrolyte level to be temporarily above the specified maximum level during and following equalizing charge (i.e., for up to seven days following the completion of an equalize charge), provided it is not overflowing. These limits ensure that the plates suffer no physical damage, and that adequate electron transfer capability is maintained in the event of transient conditions. Reference 2 recommends that electrolyte level readings should be made only after the battery has been at float charge for at least 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />.

The Category A limit specified for ICV is 2.13 V per cell. This value is based on a recommendation of Reference 2, which states that prolonged operation of cells

< 2.13 V can reduce the life expectancy of cells.

The Category A limit specified for specific gravity for each pilot cell is 1.200 (0.015 below the manufacturer fully charged nominal specific gravity or a battery charging CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.6-4 Revision 2

Battery Cell Parameters B 3.8.6 BASES current that had stabilized at a low value). This value is characteristic of a charged cell with adequate capacity.

According to Reference 2, the specific gravity readings are based on a temperature of 77°F (25°C) and full electrolyte level.

The specific gravity readings are corrected for actual electrolyte temperature and level. For each 3°F (1.67°C) above 77°F (25°C), 1 point (0.001) is added to the reading; 1 point is subtracted for each 3°F below 77°F. The specific gravity of the electrolyte in a cell increases with a loss of water due to electrolysis or evaporation.

Category B defines the normal parameter limits for each connected cell. The term "connected cell" excludes any battery cell that may be jumpered out.

The Category B limits specified for electrolyte level and ICV are the same as those specified for Category A and have been discussed above. The Category B limit specified for specific gravity for each connected cell is 1.195 (0.020 below the manufacturer fully charged, nominal specific gravity) with the average of all connected cells 1.205 (0.010 below the manufacturer fully charged, nominal specific gravity). These values are based on manufacturer's recommendations. The minimum specific gravity value required for each cell ensures a cell with a marginal or unacceptable specific gravity is not masked by averaging cells having higher specific gravities.

Category C defines the limit for each connected cell. These values, although reduced, provide assurance that sufficient capacity exists to perform the intended function and maintain a margin of safety. When any battery parameter is outside the Category C limit, the assurance of sufficient capability described above no longer exists and the battery must be declared inoperable.

The Category C limit specified for electrolyte level (above the top of the plates and not overflowing) ensures that the plates suffer no physical damage and maintain adequate electron transfer capability. The Category C limit for ICV is derived from Reference 2 recommendations, which states CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.6-5 Revision 2

Battery Cell Parameters B 3.8.6 BASES that a cell voltage of 2.07 V or below, under float conditions and not caused by elevated temperature of the cell, indicates internal cell problems and may require cell replacement.

The Category C limit of average specific gravity 1.195 is based on manufacturer recommendations (0.020 below the manufacturer recommended fully charged, nominal specific gravity). In addition to that limit, it is required that the specific gravity for each connected cell must be no less than 0.020 below the average of all connected cells. This limit ensures that a cell with a marginal or unacceptable specific gravity is not masked by averaging with cells having higher specific gravities.

The footnotes to Table 3.8.6-1 are applicable to Category A, B, and C specific gravity. Footnote (b) to Table 3.8.6-1 requires the above mentioned correction for electrolyte level and temperature, with the exception that level correction is not required when battery charging current is

< 1 amp on float charge. This current provides, in general, an indication of acceptable overall battery condition.

Because of specific gravity gradients that are produced during the recharging process, delays of several days may occur while waiting for the specific gravity to stabilize.

A stabilized charging current is an acceptable alternative to specific gravity measurement for determining the state of charge. This phenomenon is discussed in Reference 2.

Footnote (c) to Table 3.8.6-1 allows the float charge current to be used as an alternate to specific gravity for up to seven days following a battery equalizing recharge.

Within seven days, each connected cell's specific gravity must be measured to confirm the state of charge. Following a minor battery recharge (such as equalizing charge that does not follow a deep discharge) specific gravity gradients are not significant, and confirming measurements may be made in less than seven days.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.6-6 Revision 2

Battery Cell Parameters B 3.8.6 BASES REFERENCES 1. UFSAR

2. IEEE Standard -450-1995, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement Vented Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary Applications," May 1995 CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.6-7 Revision 2

Inverters-Operating B 3.8.7 B 3.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.7 Inverters-Operating BASES BACKGROUND The inverters are the preferred source of power for the AC vital buses, because of the stability and reliability they achieve. The function of the inverter is to provide AC electrical power to the vital buses. Each inverter has two built-in independent inverters, either one of which can serve as the preferred source of power. In these dual inverters, 120 volt AC power output can be manually switched from one side to the other side. The inverters can be powered from the DC bus which is energized from the station battery and/or battery chargers. The station battery and the inverters provides an uninterruptible power source for the instrumentation and controls for the Reactor Protective System (RPS) and the ESFAS. Specific details on inverters and their operating characteristics are found in Reference 1, Chapter 8.

APPLICABLE The initial conditions of DBA and transient analyses in SAFETY ANALYSES Reference 1, Chapters 6 and 14, assume ESF systems are OPERABLE. The inverters are designed to provide the required capacity, capability, redundancy, and reliability to ensure the availability of necessary power to the RPS and ESFAS instrumentation and controls so that the fuel, RCS, and containment design limits are not exceeded. These limits are discussed in more detail in the Bases for Sections 3.2, 3.4, and 3.6.

The OPERABILITY of the inverters is consistent with the initial assumptions of the accident analyses and is based on meeting the design basis of the unit. This includes maintaining required AC vital buses OPERABLE during accident conditions in the event of:

a. An assumed loss of all offsite AC electrical power or all onsite AC electrical power; and
b. A worst case single failure.

Inverters are a part of the distribution system and, as such, satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), Criterion 3.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.7-1 Revision 2

Inverters-Operating B 3.8.7 BASES LCO The LCO requires four inverters to be operable, one inverter per AC vital bus. Each AC vital bus can receive power from either side of the dual inverter. Each side of the dual inverter is fully rated, to power the AC vital bus.

Therefore, only one side of each dual inverter is required for the inverter to be considered OPERABLE.

The inverters ensure the availability of AC electrical power for the systems instrumentation required to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe condition after an AOO or a postulated DBA.

Maintaining the required inverters OPERABLE ensures that the redundancy incorporated into the design of the RPS and ESFAS instrumentation and controls, is maintained. The four required inverters per unit ensure an uninterruptible supply of AC electrical power to each of the units AC vital buses even if the 4.16 kV safety buses are de-energized.

OPERABLE inverters require the associated vital bus to be powered by either side of the dual inverter with output voltage within tolerances, and power input to the inverter from a 125 VDC station battery. Alternatively, power supply may be from the battery charger as long as the station battery is available as the uninterruptible power supply.

APPLICABILITY The inverters are required to be OPERABLE in MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 to ensure that:

a. Acceptable fuel design limits and reactor coolant pressure boundary limits are not exceeded as a result of AOOs or abnormal transients; and
b. Adequate core cooling is provided, and containment OPERABILITY and other vital functions are maintained in the event of a postulated DBA.

Inverter requirements for MODEs 5 and 6 are covered in the Bases for LCO 3.8.8.

ACTIONS A.1 With a required inverter inoperable, its associated AC vital bus becomes inoperable until it is manually re-energized CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.7-2 Revision 2

Inverters-Operating B 3.8.7 BASES from its 120 VAC bus powered by an ESF motor control center through a regulating transformer.

Required Action A.1 is modified by a Note, which states to enter the applicable conditions and Required Actions of LCO 3.8.9, when Condition A is entered with one AC vital bus de-energized. This ensures the vital bus is re-energized within two hours.

Required Action A.1 allows 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> to fix the inoperable inverter and return it to service. The 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> limit is based upon engineering judgment, taking into consideration the time required to repair an inverter and the additional risk to which the unit is exposed because of the inverter inoperability. This has to be balanced against the risk of an immediate shutdown, along with the potential challenges to safety systems such a shutdown might entail. When the AC vital bus is powered from its constant voltage source, it is relying upon interruptible AC electrical power sources (offsite and onsite). The uninterruptible inverter source to the AC vital buses is the preferred source for powering instrumentation trip setpoint devices.

B.1 and B.2 If the inoperable devices or components cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the required Completion Time, the unit must be brought to a MODE in which the LCO does not apply. To achieve this status, the unit must be brought to at least MODE 3 within six hours and to MODE 5 within 36 hours4.166667e-4 days <br />0.01 hours <br />5.952381e-5 weeks <br />1.3698e-5 months <br />. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required unit conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.

SURVEILLANCE SR 3.8.7.1 REQUIREMENTS This SR verifies that the inverters are functioning properly with all required circuit breakers closed and AC vital buses energized from the inverter. The verification of proper voltage output ensures that the required power is readily available for the instrumentation of the RPS and ESFAS connected to the AC vital buses. The seven day Frequency CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.7-3 Revision 2

Inverters-Operating B 3.8.7 BASES takes into account the redundant capability of the inverters and other indications available in the Control Room that alert the operator to inverter malfunctions.

REFERENCES 1. UFSAR CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.7-4 Revision 2

Inverters-Shutdown B 3.8.8 B 3.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.8 Inverters-Shutdown BASES BACKGROUND A description of the inverters is provided in the Bases for LCO 3.8.7.

APPLICABLE The initial conditions of DBA and transient analyses in SAFETY ANALYSES Reference 1, Chapters 6 and 14, assume ESF systems are OPERABLE. The DC to AC inverters are designed to provide the required capacity, capability, redundancy, and reliability to ensure the availability of necessary power to the RPS and ESFAS instrumentation and controls so that the fuel, RCS, and containment design limits are not exceeded.

The OPERABILITY of the inverters is consistent with the initial assumptions of the accident analyses and the requirements for the supported systems' OPERABILITY.

The OPERABILITY of the minimum inverters to each AC vital bus during MODEs 5 and 6 ensures that:

a. The unit can be maintained in the shutdown or refueling condition for extended periods;
b. Sufficient instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit status; and
c. Adequate power is available to mitigate events postulated during shutdown, such as a fuel handling accident.

The inverters were previously identified as part of the distribution system and, as such, satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), Criterion 3.

LCO The inverters ensure the availability of electrical power for the instrumentation for systems required to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe condition after an AOO or a postulated DBA. The battery powered inverters provide uninterruptible supply of AC electrical power to the AC vital buses even if the 4.16 kV safety buses are de-energized. OPERABILITY of the inverters requires that the vital bus be powered by the inverter. This ensures the CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.8-1 Revision 2

Inverters-Shutdown B 3.8.8 BASES availability of sufficient inverter power sources to operate the unit in a safe manner and to mitigate the consequences of postulated events during shutdown (e.g., fuel handling accidents).

APPLICABILITY The inverters required to be OPERABLE in MODEs 5 and 6 and during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies provide assurance that:

a. Systems to provide adequate coolant inventory makeup are available for the irradiated fuel in the core;
b. Systems needed to mitigate a fuel handling accident are available;
c. Systems necessary to mitigate the effects of events that can lead to core damage during shutdown are available; and
d. Instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit in a cold shutdown condition or refueling condition.

Inverter requirements for MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 are covered in LCO 3.8.7.

ACTIONS Limiting Condition for Operation 3.0.3 is not applicable while in MODEs 5 or 6. However, since irradiated fuel assembly movement can occur in MODEs 1, 2, 3, or 4, the ACTIONS have been modified by a Note stating that LCO 3.0.3 is not applicable. If moving irradiated fuel assemblies while in MODEs 5 or 6, LCO 3.0.3 would not specify any action. If moving irradiated fuel assemblies while in MODEs 1, 2, 3, or 4, the fuel movement is independent of reactor operations. Therefore, in either case, inability to suspend movement of irradiated fuel assemblies would not be sufficient reason to require a reactor shutdown.

A.1, A.2.1, A.2.2, and A.2.3 If two trains are required by LCO 3.8.10, the remaining OPERABLE inverters may be capable of supporting sufficient required features to allow continuation of movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, operations with a potential for draining the reactor vessel, and operations with a potential for positive reactivity additions. By the allowance of the CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.8-2 Revision 29

Inverters-Shutdown B 3.8.8 BASES option to declare required features inoperable with the associated inverter(s) inoperable, appropriate restrictions will be implemented in accordance with the affected required features LCOs' Required Actions. In many instances, this option may involve undesired administrative efforts. It is therefore required to suspend movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, and operations involving positive reactivity additions that could result in loss of the required SDM (MODE 5) or boron concentration (MODE 6). Suspending positive reactivity additions that could result in failure to meet the minimum SDM or boron concentration limit is required to assure continued safe operation. Introduction of coolant inventory must be from sources that have a boron concentration greater than that required in the RCS for the minimum SDM or refueling boron concentration. This may result in an overall reduction in RCS boron concentration, but provides an acceptable margin to maintaining subcritical operation. Introduction of temperature changes including temperature increases when operating with a positive MTC must also be evaluated to ensure they do not result in a loss of the required SDM.

Suspension of these activities shall not preclude completion of actions to establish a safe conservative condition.

These actions minimize the probability of the occurrence of postulated events. It is further required to immediately initiate action to restore the required inverters and to continue this action until restoration is accomplished in order to provide the necessary inverter power to the unit safety systems.

The Completion Time of immediately is consistent with the required times for actions requiring prompt attention. The restoration of the required inverters should be completed as quickly as possible in order to minimize the time the unit safety systems may be without power or powered from a constant voltage source transformer.

SURVEILLANCE SR 3.8.8.1 REQUIREMENTS This SR verifies that the inverters are functioning properly with all required circuit breakers closed and AC vital buses energized from the inverter. The verification of proper CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.8-3 Revision 29

Inverters-Shutdown B 3.8.8 BASES voltage output ensures that the required power is readily available for the instrumentation connected to the AC vital buses. The seven day Frequency takes into account the redundant capability of the inverters and other indications available in the Control Room that alert the operator to inverter malfunctions.

REFERENCES 1. UFSAR CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.8-4 Revision 19

Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 B 3.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.9 Distribution Systems-Operating BASES BACKGROUND The onsite Class 1E AC, DC, and AC vital bus Electrical Power Distribution Systems are divided into two redundant and independent AC electrical power distribution subsystems and four independent and redundant DC and AC vital bus electrical power distribution subsystems (Reference 1, Chapter 8).

The AC primary Electrical Power Distribution System consists of two 4.16 kV ESF buses, each having at least one separate and independent offsite source of power as well as a dedicated onsite DG source. Each 4.16 kV ESF bus is normally connected to a preferred offsite source. After a loss of the preferred offsite power source to a 4.16 kV ESF bus, the onsite emergency DG supplies power to the 4.16 kV ESF bus. Control power for the 4.16 kV breakers is supplied from the Class 1E batteries. Additional description of this system may be found in the Bases for LCOs 3.8.1 and 3.8.4.

The 480 V system include the safety-related load centers, motor control centers, and distribution panels shown in Table B 3.8.9-1.

The 120 VAC vital buses are divided into four independent and isolated subsystems and are normally supplied from an inverter. The alternate power supply for the vital buses are non-Class 1E 120 VAC Buses fed from a Class 1E ESF motor control center through the regulating transformer, and its use is governed by LCO 3.8.7. Each constant voltage source transformer is powered from a Class 1E AC bus.

There are four independent 125 VDC electrical power distribution subsystems.

The list of all required Distribution Systems-Operating is presented in Table B 3.8.9-1.

APPLICABLE The initial conditions of DBA and transient analyses in SAFETY ANALYSES Reference 1, Chapters 6 and 14, assume ESF systems are OPERABLE. The AC, DC, and AC vital bus Electrical Power Distribution Systems are designed to provide sufficient CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.9-1 Revision 5

Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES capacity, capability, redundancy, and reliability to ensure the availability of necessary power to ESF systems so that the fuel, RCS, and containment design limits are not exceeded. These limits are discussed in more detail in the Bases for Sections 3.2, 3.4, and 3.6.

The OPERABILITY of the AC, DC, and AC vital bus Electrical Power Distribution Systems is consistent with the initial assumptions of the accident analyses and is based upon meeting the design basis of the unit. This includes maintaining power distribution systems OPERABLE during accident conditions in the event of:

a. An assumed loss of all offsite power or all onsite AC electrical power; and
b. A worst case single failure.

The distribution systems satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii),

Criterion 3.

LCO The required electrical power distribution subsystems listed in Table B 3.8.9-1 ensure the availability of AC, DC, and AC vital bus electrical supply for the systems required to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe condition after an AOO or a postulated DBA. The AC, DC, and AC vital bus electrical power distribution subsystems are required to be OPERABLE.

Maintaining the AC, DC, and AC vital bus electrical power distribution subsystems OPERABLE ensures that the redundancy incorporated into the design of ESF is not defeated.

Therefore, a single failure within any system or within the electrical power distribution subsystems will not prevent safe shutdown of the reactor.

OPERABLE AC electrical power distribution subsystems require the associated buses, load centers, motor control centers, and distribution panels to be energized to their proper voltages. OPERABLE DC electrical power distribution subsystems require the associated buses to be energized to their proper voltage from either the associated battery or charger. OPERABLE vital bus electrical distribution CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.9-2 Revision 2

Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES subsystems require the associated buses to be energized to their proper voltage.

In addition, tie breakers between redundant safety-related AC, DC, and AC vital bus distribution subsystems, if they exist, must be open. This prevents any electrical malfunction in any distribution subsystem from propagating to the redundant subsystem, which could cause the failure of a redundant subsystem and a loss of essential safety function(s). If any tie breakers are closed, the affected redundant electrical distribution subsystems are considered inoperable. This applies to the onsite, safety-related redundant electrical power distribution subsystems.

APPLICABILITY The electrical distribution subsystems are required to be OPERABLE in MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 to ensure that:

a. Acceptable fuel design limits and reactor coolant pressure boundary limits are not exceeded as a result of AOOs or abnormal transients; and
b. Adequate core cooling is provided, and Containment OPERABILITY and other vital functions are maintained in the event of a postulated DBA.

Electrical distribution subsystem requirements for MODEs 5 and 6 are covered in the Bases for LCO 3.8.10.

ACTIONS A.1 With one or more required AC buses, load centers, motor control centers, or distribution panels, except AC vital buses, inoperable and a loss of function has not yet occurred, the remaining AC electrical power distribution subsystems are capable of supporting the minimum safety functions necessary to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe shutdown condition, assuming no single failure.

The overall reliability is reduced, however, because a single failure in the remaining power distribution subsystems could result in the minimum required ESF functions not being supported. Therefore, the required AC buses, load centers, motor control centers, and distribution panels must be restored to OPERABLE status within eight hours.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.9-3 Revision 2

Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES Condition A worst scenario is one train without AC power (i.e., no offsite power to the train and the associated DG inoperable). In this condition, the unit is more vulnerable to a complete loss of AC power. It is, therefore, imperative that the unit operator's attention be focused on minimizing the potential for loss of power to the remaining train by stabilizing the unit, and on restoring power to the affected train. The eight hour time limit before requiring a unit shutdown in this condition is acceptable because of:

a. The potential for decreased safety if the unit operator's attention is diverted from the evaluations and actions necessary to restore power to the affected train, to the actions associated with taking the unit to shutdown within this time limit; and
b. The potential for an event in conjunction with a single failure of a redundant component in the train with AC power.

The second Completion Time for Required Action A.1 establishes a limit on the maximum time allowed for any combination of required distribution subsystems to be inoperable during any single contiguous occurrence of failing to meet the LCO. If Condition A is entered while, for instance, a DC bus is inoperable and subsequently restored OPERABLE, the LCO may already have been not met for up to two hours. This could lead to a total of ten hours, since initial failure of the LCO, to restore the AC distribution system. At this time, a DC circuit could again become inoperable, and AC distribution restored OPERABLE.

This could continue indefinitely.

The Completion Time allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for beginning the allowed outage time "clock."

This will result in establishing the "time zero" at the time the LCO was initially not met, instead of the time Condition A was entered. The 16 hour1.851852e-4 days <br />0.00444 hours <br />2.645503e-5 weeks <br />6.088e-6 months <br /> Completion Time is an acceptable limitation on this potential to fail to meet the LCO indefinitely.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.9-4 Revision 2

Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES B.1 With one or more AC vital buses inoperable and a loss of Function has not yet occurred, the remaining OPERABLE AC vital buses are capable of supporting the minimum safety functions necessary to shut down the unit and maintain it in the safe shutdown condition. Overall reliability is reduced, however, since an additional single failure could result in the minimum required ESF functions not being supported. Therefore, the AC vital bus must be restored to OPERABLE status within two hours by powering the bus from an associated inverter via DC or the non-Class 1E 120 VAC bus powered by an ESF motor control center through a regulating transformer.

Condition B represents one or more AC vital buses without power; potentially both the DC source and the associated AC source are non-functioning. In this situation, the unit is significantly more vulnerable to a complete loss of all noninterruptible power. It is, therefore, imperative that the operator's attention focus on stabilizing the unit, minimizing the potential for loss of power to the remaining vital buses, and restoring power to the affected vital bus.

This two hour limit is more conservative than Completion Times allowed for the vast majority of components that are without adequate vital AC power. Taking exception to LCO 3.0.2 for components without adequate vital AC power, which would have the Required Action Completion Times shorter than two hours if declared inoperable, is acceptable because of:

a. The potential for decreased safety by requiring a change in unit conditions (i.e., requiring a shutdown) and not allowing stable operations to continue;
b. The potential for decreased safety by requiring entry into numerous Applicable Conditions and Required Actions for components without adequate vital AC power and not providing sufficient time for the operators to perform the necessary evaluations and actions for restoring power to the affected train; and
c. The potential for an event in conjunction with a single failure of a redundant component.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.9-5 Revision 2

Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES The two hour Completion Time takes into account the importance to safety of restoring the AC vital bus to OPERABLE status, the redundant capability afforded by the other OPERABLE vital buses, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period.

The second Completion Time for Required Action B.1 establishes a limit on the maximum allowed for any combination of required distribution subsystems to be inoperable during any single contiguous occurrence of failing to meet the LCO. If Condition B is entered while, for instance, an AC bus is inoperable and subsequently returned OPERABLE, the LCO may already have been not met for up to eight hours. This could lead to a total of ten hours, since initial failure of the LCO, to restore the vital bus distribution system. At this time, an AC train could again become inoperable, and vital bus distribution restored OPERABLE. This could continue indefinitely.

This Completion Time allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for beginning the allowed outage time "clock."

This will result in establishing the "time zero" at the time the LCO was initially not met, instead of the time Condition B was entered. The 16 hour1.851852e-4 days <br />0.00444 hours <br />2.645503e-5 weeks <br />6.088e-6 months <br /> Completion Time is an acceptable limitation on this potential to fail to meet the LCO indefinitely.

C.1 With one DC bus inoperable, the remaining DC electrical power distribution subsystems are capable of supporting the minimum safety functions necessary to shut down the reactor and maintain it in a safe shutdown condition, assuming no single failure. The overall reliability is reduced, however, because a single failure in the remaining DC electrical power distribution subsystem could result in the minimum required ESF functions not being supported.

Therefore, the DC bus must be restored to OPERABLE status within two hours by powering the bus from the associated battery or charger.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.9-6 Revision 2

Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES Condition C represents one DC bus without adequate DC power; potentially both with the battery significantly degraded and the associated charger nonfunctioning. In this situation, the unit is significantly more vulnerable to a complete loss of all DC power. It is, therefore, imperative that the operator's attention focus on stabilizing the unit, minimizing the potential for loss of power to the remaining trains and restoring power to the affected train.

This two hour limit is more conservative than Completion Times allowed for the vast majority of components which would be without power. Taking exception to LCO 3.0.2 for components without adequate DC power, which would have Required Action Completion Times shorter than 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br />, is acceptable because of:

a. The potential for decreased safety by requiring a change in unit conditions (i.e., requiring a shutdown) while allowing stable operations to continue;
b. The potential for decreased safety by requiring entry into numerous applicable Conditions and Required Actions for components without DC power and not providing sufficient time for the operators to perform the necessary evaluations and actions for restoring power to the affected train; and
c. The potential for an event in conjunction with a single failure of a redundant component.

The two hour Completion Time for DC buses is consistent with Reference 2.

The second Completion Time for Required Action C.1 establishes a limit on the maximum time allowed for any combination of required distribution subsystems to be inoperable during any single contiguous occurrence of failing to meet the LCO. If Condition C is entered while, for instance, an AC bus is inoperable and subsequently returned OPERABLE, the LCO may already have not been met for up to eight hours. This could lead to a total of ten hours, since initial failure of the LCO, to restore the DC distribution system. At this time, an AC train could again become inoperable, and DC distribution restored OPERABLE.

This could continue indefinitely.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.9-7 Revision 2

Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES This Completion Time allows for an exception to the normal "time zero" for beginning the allowed outage time "clock."

This will result in establishing the "time zero" at the time the LCO was initially not met, instead of the time Condition C was entered. The 16 hour1.851852e-4 days <br />0.00444 hours <br />2.645503e-5 weeks <br />6.088e-6 months <br /> Completion Time is an acceptable limitation on this potential to fail to meet the LCO indefinitely.

D.1 and D.2 If the inoperable distribution subsystem cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the required Completion Time, the unit must be brought to a MODE in which the LCO does not apply. To achieve this status, the unit must be brought to at least MODE 3 within six hours and to MODE 5 within 36 hours4.166667e-4 days <br />0.01 hours <br />5.952381e-5 weeks <br />1.3698e-5 months <br />. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required unit conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.

E.1 Condition E corresponds to a level of degradation in the electrical distribution system that causes a required safety function to be lost. When more than one inoperable electrical power distribution subsystem results in the loss of a required function, the plant is in a condition outside the accident analysis. Therefore, no additional time is justified for continued operation. Limiting Condition for Operation 3.0.3 must be entered immediately to commence a controlled shutdown.

SURVEILLANCE SR 3.8.9.1 REQUIREMENTS This SR verifies that the AC, DC, and AC vital bus Electrical Power Distribution Systems are functioning properly, with the correct circuit breaker alignment. The correct breaker alignment ensures the appropriate separation and independence of the electrical divisions is maintained, and the appropriate voltage is available to each required bus. The verification of proper voltage availability on the buses ensures that the required voltage is readily available for motive as well as control functions for critical system CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.9-8 Revision 2

Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES loads connected to these buses. The seven day Frequency takes into account the redundant capability of the AC, DC, and AC vital bus electrical power distribution subsystems, and other indications available in the Control Room that alert the operator to subsystem malfunctions.

REFERENCES 1. UFSAR

2. Regulatory Guide 1.93, "Availability of Electric Power Sources," December 1974 CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.9-9 Revision 2

Distribution Systems-Operating B 3.8.9 BASES Table B 3.8.9-1 (page 1 of 1)

AC and DC Electrical Power Distribution Systems(1) 4160 Volt Emergency Bus No. 11 (Unit 1), No. 21 (Unit 2) 4160 Volt Emergency Bus No. 14 (Unit 1), No. 24 (Unit 2) 480 Volt Emergency Bus No. 11A (Unit 1), No. 21A (Unit 2) 480 Volt Emergency Bus No. 11B (Unit 1), No. 21B (Unit 2) 480 Volt Emergency Bus No. 14A (Unit 1), No. 24A (Unit 2) 480 Volt Emergency Bus No. 14B (Unit 1), No. 24B (Unit 2) 480 Volt Emergency Bus No. 104R (Unit 1), No. 204R (Unit 2) 480 Volt Emergency Bus No. 114R (Unit 1), No. 214R (Unit 2) 120 Volt AC Vital Bus No. 11 (Unit 1), No. 21 (Unit 2) 120 Volt AC Vital Bus No. 12 (Unit 1), No. 22 (Unit 2) 120 Volt AC Vital Bus No. 13 (Unit 1), No. 23 (Unit 2) 120 Volt AC Vital Bus No. 14 (Unit 1), No. 24 (Unit 2) 125 Volt DC Bus No. 11 (Unit 1 and Unit 2) 125 Volt DC Bus No. 12 (Unit 1 and Unit 2) 125 Volt DC Bus No. 21 (Unit 1 and Unit 2) 125 Volt DC Bus No. 22 (Unit 1 and Unit 2)

(1)

Each bus of the AC and DC Electrical Power Distribution System is a subsystem.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.9-10 Revision 2

Distribution Systems-Shutdown B 3.8.10 B 3.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS B 3.8.10 Distribution Systems-Shutdown BASES BACKGROUND A description of the AC, DC, and AC vital bus Electrical Power Distribution Systems is provided in the Bases for LCO 3.8.9.

The list of all required Distribution Systems-Shutdown is presented in Table B 3.8.10-1.

APPLICABLE The initial conditions of a DBA and transient analyses in SAFETY ANALYSES Reference 1, Chapters 6 and 14, assume ESF systems are OPERABLE. The AC, DC, and AC vital bus Electrical Power Distribution Systems are designed to provide sufficient capacity, capability, redundancy, and reliability to ensure the availability of necessary power to ESF systems so that the fuel, RCS, and containment design limits are not exceeded.

The OPERABILITY of the AC, DC, and AC vital bus Electrical Power Distribution System is consistent with the initial assumptions of the accident analyses and the requirements for the supported systems' OPERABILITY.

The OPERABILITY of the minimum AC, DC, and AC vital bus electrical power distribution subsystems during MODEs 5 and 6, and during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, ensures that:

a. The unit can be maintained in the shutdown or refueling condition for extended periods;
b. Sufficient instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit status; and
c. Adequate power is provided to mitigate events postulated during shutdown, such as a fuel handling accident.

The AC and DC Electrical Power Distribution Systems satisfy 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), Criterion 3.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.10-1 Revision 5

Distribution Systems-Shutdown B 3.8.10 BASES LCO Various combinations of subsystems, equipment, and components are required OPERABLE by other LCOs, depending on the specific unit condition. Implicit in those requirements is the required OPERABILITY of necessary support required features. This LCO explicitly requires energization of the portions of the electrical distribution system necessary to support OPERABILITY of required systems, equipment, and components-all specifically addressed in each LCO and implicitly required via the definition of OPERABILITY.

Maintaining these portions of the distribution system energized ensures the availability of sufficient power to operate the unit in a safe manner to mitigate the consequences of postulated events during shutdown (e.g., fuel handling accidents).

APPLICABILITY The AC and DC electrical power distribution subsystems required to be OPERABLE in MODEs 5 and 6, and during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, provide assurance that:

a. Systems to provide adequate coolant inventory makeup are available for the irradiated fuel in the core;
b. Systems needed to mitigate a fuel handling accident are available;
c. Systems necessary to mitigate the effects of events that can lead to core damage during shutdown are available; and
d. Instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit in a cold shutdown condition and refueling condition.

The AC, DC, and AC vital bus electrical power distribution subsystem requirements for MODEs 1, 2, 3, and 4 are covered in LCO 3.8.9.

ACTIONS Limiting Condition for Operation 3.0.3 is not applicable while in MODEs 5 or 6. However, since irradiated fuel assembly movement can occur in MODEs 1, 2, 3, or 4, the ACTIONS have been modified by a Note stating that LCO 3.0.3 is not applicable. If moving irradiated fuel assemblies while in MODEs 5 or 6, LCO 3.0.3 would not specify any CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.10-2 Revision 5

Distribution Systems-Shutdown B 3.8.10 BASES action. If moving irradiated fuel assemblies while in MODEs 1, 2, 3, or 4, the fuel movement is independent of reactor operations. Therefore, in either case, inability to suspend movement of irradiated fuel assemblies would not be sufficient reason to require a reactor shutdown.

The ACTIONS have been modified by a second Note stating that performance of Required Actions shall not preclude completion of actions to establish a safe conservative position. This clarification is provided to avoid stopping movement of irradiated fuel assemblies while in a non-conservative position based on compliance with the Required Actions.

A.1, A.2.1, A.2.2, A.2.3, and A.2.4 Although redundant required features may require redundant trains of electrical power distribution subsystems to be OPERABLE, one OPERABLE distribution subsystem train may be capable of supporting sufficient required features to allow continuation of movement of irradiated fuel assemblies. By allowing the option to declare required features associated with an inoperable distribution subsystem inoperable, appropriate restrictions are implemented in accordance with the affected distribution subsystems LCO's Required Actions.

In many instances, this option may involve undesired administrative efforts. Therefore, the allowance for sufficiently conservative actions is made [i.e., to suspend movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, and operations involving positive reactivity additions that could result in loss of the required SDM (MODE 5) or boron concentration (MODE 6)]. Suspending positive reactivity additions that could result in failure to meet the minimum SDM or boron concentration limit is required to assure continued safe operation. Introduction of coolant inventory must be from sources that have a boron concentration greater than that required in the RCS for the minimum SDM or refueling boron concentration. This may result in an overall reduction in RCS boron concentration, but provides an acceptable margin to maintaining subcritical operation. Introduction of temperature changes including temperature increases when operating with a positive MTC must also be evaluated to ensure they do not result is a loss of the required SDM.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.10-3 Revision 29

Distribution Systems-Shutdown B 3.8.10 BASES Suspension of these activities shall not preclude completion of actions to establish a safe conservative condition.

These actions minimize the probability of the occurrence of postulated events. It is further required to immediately initiate action to restore the required AC and DC electrical power distribution subsystems and to continue this action until restoration is accomplished in order to provide the necessary power to the unit safety systems.

Notwithstanding performance of the above conservative Required Actions, a required shutdown cooling (SDC) subsystem may be inoperable. In this case, Required Actions A.2.1 through A.2.3 do not adequately address the concerns relating to coolant circulation and heat removal.

Pursuant to LCO 3.0.6, the SDC ACTIONS would not be entered.

Therefore, Required Action A.2.4 is provided to direct declaring SDC inoperable, which results in taking the appropriate SDC actions. The SDC subsystem(s) declared inoperable and not in operation as a result of not meeting this LCO, may be used if needed. However, the appropriate actions are still required to be taken.

The Completion Time of immediately is consistent with the required times for actions requiring prompt attention. The restoration of the required distribution subsystems should be completed as quickly as possible in order to minimize the time the unit safety systems may be without power.

SURVEILLANCE SR 3.8.10.1 REQUIREMENTS This SR verifies that the AC, DC, and AC vital bus Electrical Power Distribution System is functioning properly, with all the buses energized. The verification of proper voltage availability on the buses ensures that the required power is readily available for motive as well as control functions for critical system loads connected to these buses. The seven day Frequency takes into account the redundant capability of the electrical power distribution subsystems, and other indications available in the Control Room that alert the operator to subsystem malfunctions.

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.10-4 Revision 38

Distribution Systems-Shutdown B 3.8.10 BASES REFERENCES 1. UFSAR CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.10-5 Revision 19

Distribution Systems-Shutdown B 3.8.10 BASES Table B 3.8.10-1 (page 1 of 1)

AC and DC Electrical Power Distribution Systems 1 4160 Volt Emergency Bus 1 480 Volt Emergency Bus 2 120 Volt AC Vital Busses 2 125 Volt DC Busses 2 125 Volt Battery Banks (one of which may be the reserve battery) (one associated battery charger per battery bank supplying the required DC busses)

CALVERT CLIFFS - UNITS 1 & 2 B 3.8.10-6 Revision 19